DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM ... - Urmet

INDEX 

DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM - PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL 

DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR 

PHONE SYSTEM: 

Product Technical Manual 

INDEX -DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM - PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL 

http://www.urmetdomus.com 

e-mail:info@urmetdomus.it 

MT 101-013E (Rev. September 2008) 

DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual 

I


INDEX 


This manual was written by Urmet Domus ST/UTI (Technical System Offi ce). 

II 

DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual

R 

FREE-HANDS 

neW 

INDEX 


NEWS 

(Index at the beginning of section) 

DOOR PHONE & VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS Sec. 1 


PANELS 

Mod. Exigo 

Mod. 1128 & Mod. 


Mod. 


Mod. 


Mod. 725 


Mod. POSTALBOX 


APARTMENT DOOR PHONE STATIONS 


APARTMENT VIDEO DOOR PHONE STATIONS 


Sec. 2H 

Sec. 2G 

Sec. 2A 

Sec. 2B 

Sec. 2D 

Sec. 2E 

Sec. 3A 

Sec. 3B 


APARTMENT STATION ACCESSORIES 

Sec. 3C 


POWER UNITS - RELAY DEVICES - VARIOUS DEVICES Sec. 4 


ONE-FAMILY AND TWO-FAMILY KITS Sec. 5 


SYSTEMS DUO WITH SINTHESI PANEL Sec. 7 



III


INDEX 


Code Product’s description Section Pag. 

725/020 Push button panels 20 buttons, on two-rows not arranged for loudspeaking unit Mod. 725 ................................2d ................3 






725/101 Push button panels 1 buttons on one row arranged for loudspeaking unit Mod. 725...........................................2d ................3 








725/204 Push button panels 4 buttons on two row arranged for loudspeaking unit Mod. 725 ...........................................2d ................3 



725/210 Push button panels 10 buttons on two row arranged for loudspeaking unit Mod. 725 .........................................2d ................3 










725/600 Black and white 1/3” CCD, camera unit for 50Hz Mod. 725 .................................................................................2d ............. 13 

725/601 Front plate and embedding box group 1 row for camera unit Mod. 725...............................................................2d ............. 13 

725/602 Front plate and embedding box group 2 rows for camera unit Mod. 725 .............................................................2d ............. 13 

725/701 Anti-rain hood cover for Ref. 725/601...................................................................................................................2d ............. 16 

725/702 Anti-rain hood cover for Ref. 725/602...................................................................................................................2d ............. 16 

725/710 Case with hood cover 1-2 buttons on 1 row Mod. 725 .........................................................................................2d ................5 

725/711 Case with hood cover 1-8 buttons on 1 row Mod. 725 .........................................................................................2d ................5 

725/721 Case with hood cover 4-10 buttons on 2 rows Mod. 725 .....................................................................................2d ................5 

725/722 Case with hood cover 12-24 buttons on 2 rows Mod. 725 ...................................................................................2d ................5 

752/1 Frames for embedding box.....................................................................................................................................7 ................5 

752/20 Power supply for free-hands system DUO .............................................................................................................7 ................6 

752/23 Duo indoor set ........................................................................................................................................................7 ................5 

786/3A Power supply 28VA, 230V for 1-wire switch board.................................................................................................4 ................6 

786/4 Power supply 28VA, with boosted note generator..................................................................................................4 ................6 

786/11 Power supply for house phone system 230V .........................................................................................................4 ................3 

786/12 Power supply for house phone system 110V .........................................................................................................4 ................3 

786/13 Door phone power supply with double call tone generator and timed relay for door opening................................4 ................4 

786/15 Door phone power supply with double call tone generator and relay.....................................................................4 ................5 

787/1 “4+n” door phone tone generator............................................................................................................................4 ............. 13 

787/2 “1+1” door phone tone generator............................................................................................................................4 ............. 13 

788/22 Miniature call repeater auxiliary relay .....................................................................................................................4 ............. 17 

788/30 Switching relay device 12V c.c.-c.a., 4 contacts.....................................................................................................4 ............. 17 

788/51 Relay device for automatic switching on 2 push button panels ..............................................................................4 ............. 16 

788/52 Monostable relay box with 2 commutation .............................................................................................................4 ............. 14 

7 ................7 

788/54 Relay device for automatic switching on 4 push button panels ..............................................................................4 ............. 15 

788/58 Relay box for automatic switching of max 4 push button panels............................................................................4 ............. 16 

789/1 Video power supply 50VA - 110/230V....................................................................................................................4 ............. 11 

789/2 Video power supply for additional monitor..............................................................................................................4 ................9 

789/3 Video power supply for 3 additional monitor...........................................................................................................4 ............. 10 

789/4 Video power supply for 3 additional monitor...........................................................................................................4 ............. 10 

789/5B Video power supply 38VA - 230V...........................................................................................................................4 ................7 

789/6B Video power supply 110/230vac.............................................................................................................................4 ................8 

789/51 Device with impedance for intercom.......................................................................................................................4 ................9 

824/500 Amplifi ed loud speaking unit with electret microphone.........................................................................................2h ................3 

952/11 Black and white 2 wire video kit for 1 family (plastic) .............................................................................................5 ............. 16 

952/21 Black and white 2 wire video kit for 1 family (zama)...............................................................................................5 ............. 16 

952/41 Colour 2 wire video kit for 1 family (plastic) ............................................................................................................5 ............. 16 

952/51 Colour 2 wire video kit for 1 family (zama) .............................................................................................................5 ............. 16 

952/100 Power unit for video kit Mod. 952 ...........................................................................................................................5 ............. 16 

955/40 4-output video distribution box................................................................................................................................4 ............. 19 

956/19 One-family video kit with Artico video door phone (110Vac, 60Hz)....................................................................... 5 ............. 23 

956/29 Two-family video kit with Artico video door phone (110Vac, 60Hz)....................................................................... 5 ............. 23 

956/31 One-family video kit with Artico video door phone (230Vac, 50Hz)........................................................................5 ............. 23 

956/32 Two-family video kit with Artico video door phone (230Vac, 50Hz)........................................................................5 ............. 23 

1032/59 Scaitel union plate kit............................................................................................................................................3b ............. 22 

IV 


INDEX 



1032/81 Lock release timer ..................................................................................................................................................4 ............. 21 

1035/25 Conversation privacy device for 1+1 wire systems Mod. 725...............................................................................2d ................6 

1035/67 Door unit for 1+1 wire door phone systems or 5 wire video door phone systems ................................................2d ...............5 

2h ................3 

1038/69 Video switch 4 in - 1 out .........................................................................................................................................4 ............. 18 

1090/850 Distributor power unit..............................................................................................................................................4 ............. 12 

1110/74 Conversation privacy device for 1+1 wire systems...............................................................................................2h ................6 

1121/53 Flush-mounting box and frame for 1121/103........................................................................................................2h ............. 11 




1121/60 Flush-mounting box and frame for 1121/204-/206 ...............................................................................................2h ............. 11 

1121/62 Flush-mounting box and frame for 1121/208-/210 ...............................................................................................2h ............. 11 






1121/103 Exigo front panel for door phone panels with dedicated box and 3 calling buttons on one row ...........................2h ............. 11 




1121/204 Exigo front panel for door phone panels with dedicated box and 4 calling buttons on two rows..........................2h ............. 11 



1121/210 Exigo front panel for door phone panels with dedicated box and 10 calling buttons on two rows........................2h ............. 11 






1128/1 Small button..........................................................................................................................................................2g ................7 

1128/2 Large button .........................................................................................................................................................2g ................7 

1128/5 Transparent module with tag for house number...................................................................................................2g ................8 

1128/10 Casing with front (anthracite)................................................................................................................................2g ................6 

1128/11 Casing with front (grey) ........................................................................................................................................2g ................6 

1128/20 Cases with front for outdoor house phone station (anthracite).............................................................................2g ................5 

1128/21 Cases with front for outdoor house phone station (grey)......................................................................................2g ................5 

1128/30 Anthracite blank modules .....................................................................................................................................2g ................8 

1128/31 Grey blank modules..............................................................................................................................................2g ................8 

1128/51 Box for fl ush mounting..........................................................................................................................................2g ............. 10 

1128/500 Outdoor housephone station for 4+n wire systems at 6Vdc .................................................................................2d ................3 

2h ................3 

2g ........... 2; 5 

1128/510 Outdoor housephone station for 4+n wire systems at 12Vdc ...............................................................................2d ................3 

2g ........... 2; 5 

1129/1 Smyle wall mounted panel with 1 call button........................................................................................................2g ................2 

1129/2 Smyle wall mounted panel with 2 call buttons ......................................................................................................2g ................2 

1129/10 ‘Audio two’ door phone kit with Smyle panel (plastic).............................................................................................5 ................2 

1129/21 ‘Audio two’ door phone kit with Smyle panel (zama) ..............................................................................................5 ................2 

1129/31 ‘Audio two’ door phone kit with Smyle panel and Utopia door phone with plastic panel ........................................5 ................6 

1129/41 ‘Audio two’ door phone kit with Smyle panel and Utopia door phone with zama vandal-proof panel.....................5 ................6 

1129/61 ‘Audio two’ door phone kit with Smyle panel and free-hands Utopia door phone with plastic panel ......................5 ............. 11 

1129/71 ‘Audio two’ door phone kit with Smyle panel and free-hands Utopia door phone with zama vandal-proof panel ..5 ............. 11 

1129/50 Flush-mounting box with frame ............................................................................................................................2g ................4 

1130 House phone without keys, ivory..........................................................................................................................3a ............. 12 

1130/1 House phone with one service key, ivory .............................................................................................................3a ............. 12 

1130/12 Socket with weight and 12-wire cord for table mounted house phone .................................................................3a ............. 15 

1130/19 Socket with weight and 19-wire cord for table mounted house phone .................................................................3a ............. 15 

1130/50 House phone without keys, white .........................................................................................................................3a ............. 12 

1130/55 Electronic house phone with insertion key on handset, white ..............................................................................3a ............. 13 

1130/100 10 button kit for door phone Ref. 1130/1 ..............................................................................................................3a ............. 14 

1130/120 Table mounting kit ................................................................................................................................................3a ............. 15 

1131/7 Adapting circuit for traditional house phone systems ...........................................................................................3a ............. 16 

1132/53 Adjustable ringer volume kit .................................................................................................................................3a ............. 16 

1132/54 Three tone gong additional chime ........................................................................................................................ 3c ............. 14 

1133 White electronic door phone with door lock release key Mod. Atlantico...............................................................3a ................2 

1133/1 White electronic door phone with door lock release key and 1 service key Mod. Atlantico..................................3a ................2 

1133/10 White electronic door phone with insertion key Mod. Atlantico ............................................................................3a ................3 

1133/12 White electronic door phone with 12 additional buttons and 1 service key Mod. Atlantico ..................................3a ................3 

1133/20 White electronic door phone with 2 leds, 1 switching device Mod. Atlantico........................................................3a ................3 

1133/35A White electronic door phone with door lock release key and 1 service key for 1+1 system.................................3a ................4 

1133/41 Atlantico door phone with 3 additional buttons (anthracite)..................................................................................3a ................4 



V


INDEX 



1133/42 Atlantico door phone with 3 additional buttons (grey)...........................................................................................3a ................4 

1133/50 Table-top mounting conversion kit Mod. 1133......................................................................................................3a ................5 

1133/55 Set of 10 additional keys Mod. 1133 ....................................................................................................................3a ................6 

1133/56 Mute key + led kit for house phone Mod. 1133.....................................................................................................3a ................6 

1133/351 White electronic door phone with adjustable call volume and mute function for 1+1 system...............................3a ................5 

1134/1 Utopia “4+n” wire Utopia door phone with 1 additional button..............................................................................3a ................8 

1134/5 Conversation privacy device for Utopia door phone.............................................................................................3a ............. 10 

1134/35 Utopia “1+1” wire Utopia door phone with 1 additional button..............................................................................3a ................8 

1134/50 Table top mounting conversion kit Mod. Utopia ...................................................................................................3a ............. 10 

1134/54 Set of 8 additional buttons for Utopia door phone (white) ....................................................................................3a ..............10 

1134/55 Additional button Mod. Utopia ..............................................................................................................................3a ............. 10 

1143/1 Exigo front panel for Sinthesi box door phone panels with 1 calling button .........................................................2h ................7 

1143/2 Exigo front panel for Sinthesi box door phone panels with 2 calling buttons........................................................2h ................7 

1143/51 Blue fi lms for customising name tag backlighting.................................................................................................2h .......10; 14 

1143/52 Green fi lms for customising name tag backlighting ..............................................................................................2h .......10; 14 

1143/60 Sinthesi spacer for fl ush-mounting box ................................................................................................................2h ................8 

1143/101 Exigo front panel for Sinthesi box door phone panels with 1 calling button .........................................................2h ................7 









1143/110 Exigo front panel for Sinthesi box door phone panels with 10 calling buttons......................................................2h ................7 

1145/11 Sinthesi module with 1 button...............................................................................................................................2a ................4 

1145/12 Sinthesi module with 2 buttons.............................................................................................................................2a ................4 



1145/18 Sinthesi module with 4 double buttons .................................................................................................................2a ................4 

1145/20 Sinthesi door unit set-up module without buttons.................................................................................................2a ................3 

1145/21 Sinthesi door unit set-up module with 1 button.....................................................................................................2a ................3 

1145/22 Sinthesi door unit set-up module with 2 buttons...................................................................................................2a ................3 

1145/32 Sinthesi door unit set-up module with 1 double button.........................................................................................2a ................3 

1145/34 Sinthesi door unit set-up module with 2 double buttons .......................................................................................2a ................3 

1145/41 Sinthesi postalbox for wall surface fi tting..............................................................................................................2e ................2 

1145/42 Sinthesi postalbox for gate fi tting..........................................................................................................................2e ................2 

1145/50 Sinthesi repertory module.....................................................................................................................................2a ................5 

1145/51 Embedding box for 1 Sinthesi module..................................................................................................................2a ............. 10 

2h ................8 

1145/52 Embedding box for 2 Sinthesi modules ................................................................................................................2a ............. 10 

2h ................8 


2h ................8 


2h ................8 

1145/59 Sinthesi blank module ..........................................................................................................................................2a ................5 

1145/61 Frame and module holder for 1 Sinthesi module..................................................................................................2a ............. 10 

1145/62 Frame and module holder for 2 Sinthesi modules................................................................................................2a ............. 10 



1145/65 Set of 10 blu colour name tags + 2 blu colour plastic headers frames for Sinthesi ..............................................2a ......... 5; 11 

1145/67 Sinthesi amplifi ed speaker unit for ‘1+1’ systems.................................................................................................2a ................3 

1145/70 DUO microphone module without call buttons .......................................................................................................7 ................2 

1145/71 DUO microphone module with 1 call button ...........................................................................................................7 ................2 

1145/72 DUO microphone module with 2 call buttons .........................................................................................................7 ................2 

1145/74 Secrecy of Conversation Device for 1+1 system..................................................................................................2a ............. 16 

2b ................9 

2h ................6 

1145/75 DUO loudspeaking module.....................................................................................................................................7 ................2 

1145/311 Housing with hood for 1 Sinthesi module .............................................................................................................2a ............. 13 

1145/312 Housing with hood for 2 Sinthesi modules ...........................................................................................................2a ............. 13 

1145/313 Housing with hood for 3 Sinthesi modules ...........................................................................................................2a ............. 13 

1145/314 Housing with hood for 4 Sinthesi modules (1 row) ...............................................................................................2a ............. 13 

1145/324 Housing with hood for 4 Sinthesi modules (2 rows) .............................................................................................2a ............. 13 



1145/332 Housing with hood for 12 Sinthesi modules (3 rows) ...........................................................................................2a ............. 13 


1145/342 Hood cover with head for gate-pillar for 2 Sinthesi modules ................................................................................2a ............. 15 

1145/343 Hood cover with head for gate-pillar for 3 Sinthesi modules ................................................................................2a ............. 15 

1145/500 Sinthesi amplifi ed speaker unit for ‘4+n’ systems.................................................................................................2a ................3 

VI 


INDEX 



1145/611 Rain hood with wall cover frame for 1 Sinthesi module........................................................................................2a ............. 12 

1145/612 Rain hood with wall cover frame for 2 Sinthesi modules ......................................................................................2a ............. 12 

1145/613 Rain hood with wall cover frame for 3 Sinthesi modules ......................................................................................2a ............. 12 

1145/614 Rain hood with wall cover frame for 4 Sinthesi modules (1 row)..........................................................................2a ............. 12 

1145/624 Rain hood with wall cover frame for 4 Sinthesi modules (2 rows) ........................................................................2a ............. 12 



1145/632 Rain hood with wall cover frame for 12 Sinthesi modules (3 rows) ......................................................................2a ............. 13 


1145/711 Wall embedded frame for 1 Sinthesi module........................................................................................................2a ............. 12 

1145/712 Wall embedded frame for 2 Sinthesi modules......................................................................................................2a ............. 12 

1145/713 Wall embedded frame for 3 Sinthesi modules......................................................................................................2a ............. 12 

1145/714 Wall embedded frame for 4 Sinthesi modules (1 row)..........................................................................................2a ............. 12 

1145/724 Wall embedded frame for 4 Sinthesi modules (2 rows)........................................................................................2a ............. 12 



1145/732 Wall embedded frame for 12 Sinthesi modules (3 rows)......................................................................................2a ............. 12 


1145/800 625 panel adapters...............................................................................................................................................2a ............. 19 
















1155/11 K-Steel modules with 1 call button without loudspeaking unit ..............................................................................2b ................3 

1155/12A K-Steel modules with 2 call buttons without loudspeaking unit ............................................................................2b ................3 



1155/20 K-Steel module with door unit without call buttons ...............................................................................................2b ................2 

1155/21 K-Steel module with door unit with 1 call button...................................................................................................2b ................2 

1155/22A K-Steel module with door unit with 2 call buttons .................................................................................................2b ................2 

1155/30 K-Steel module with door unit without call buttons for 1+1 wire system...............................................................2b ................2 

1155/31 K-Steel module with door unit with 1 call button for 1+1 wire system...................................................................2b ................2 

1155/32A K-Steel module with door unit with 2 call buttons for 1+1 wire system.................................................................2b ................2 

1155/50 K-Steel directory modules ....................................................................................................................................2b ................4 

1155/54 Four embedding box joint kit ................................................................................................................................2b ................7 

1155/59 K-Steel blanc module ...........................................................................................................................................2b ................4 

1155/61 K-Steel galvanized steel back box for 1 module...................................................................................................2b ................7 

1155/62 K-Steel galvanized steel back box for 2 modules.................................................................................................2b ................7 

1155/63 K-Steel galvanized steel back box for 3 modules.................................................................................................2b ................7 

1155/75 Secrecy of conversation device for coax wire system and “4+n” wire system......................................................2b ................9 

1155/84 1 K-Steel module front frame, bright PVD inox.....................................................................................................2b ................7 

1155/85 2 K-Steel modules front frame, bright PVD inox...................................................................................................2b ................7 

1155/86 3 K-Steel modules front frame, bright PVD inox...................................................................................................2b ................7 

1155/91 1 K-Steel module front frame, glazed inox ...........................................................................................................2b ................7 



1155/311 Housing with hood for 1 K-Steel module ..............................................................................................................2b ................8 

1155/312 Housing with hood for 2 K-Steel modules ............................................................................................................2b ................8 

1155/313 Housing with hood for 3 K-Steel modules ............................................................................................................2b ................8 

1202/90 Atlantico bracket for coaxial video outdoors systems...........................................................................................3b ............. 16 

1202/95 Atlantico bracket with secrecy of conversation device for coaxial video outdoors systems .................................3b ............ 16 

1202/590 Atlantico bracket for Ranger monitor system retrofi t ............................................................................................3b ............. 16 

1202/591 Atlantico bracket for Ranger monitor system retrofi t with 5 wires.........................................................................3b ............. 16 

1202/955 Atlantico bracket for 5- wire video systems ..........................................................................................................3b ............. 16 

1332/80 Power line protection device...................................................................................................................................4 ............. 23 

1332/85 Power line protection device...................................................................................................................................4 ............. 22 

1332/86 Power line Filter......................................................................................................................................................4 ............. 23 

1702/1 Atlantico black and white video door phone (50Hz) .............................................................................................3b ............. 14 

1702/17 Atlantico black and white video door phone for deaf person ................................................................................3a ............. 14 

1702/18 Atlantico black and white video door phone (60Hz) .............................................................................................3b ............. 14 

1702/40 Atlantico colour video door phone (50Hz) ............................................................................................................3b ............. 15 

1702/41 Atlantico black and white video door phone (50Hz) anthracite colour..................................................................3b ............. 14 



VII


INDEX 



1702/42 Atlantico black and white video door phone (50Hz) high tech grey colour ...........................................................3b............ 14 

1702/47 Atlantico colour video door phone for deaf person ...............................................................................................3a ............. 15 

1702/49 Atlantico colour video door phone (60Hz) ........................................................................................................... 3b ............. 15 

1702/50 Kit of colour grilles for Atlantico monitor ...............................................................................................................3b ............. 19 

1702/86 Add-on unit with bracket, one switch, two LED and six buttons with bracket ...................................................... 3b ............. 17 

1702/92 Kit for Atlantico monitor table mounting................................................................................................................3b ............. 17 

1702/93 Key add-on adapter for table-top stand ................................................................................................................3b ............. 18 

1703/1 Utopia colour video door phone (50Hz)................................................................................................................3b ................9 

1703/2 Utopia free-hands colour video door phone (50Hz) grey......................................................................................3b ................2 

1703/3 Utopia free-hands colour video door phone (50Hz) white ....................................................................................3b ................2 

1703/17 Utopia colour video door phone for deaf person ................................................................................................. 3a ................9 

1703/19 Utopia colour video door phone (60Hz)............................................................................................................... 3b ................9 

1703/29 Utopia free-hands colour video door phone (60Hz) grey..................................................................................... 3b ................2 

1703/51 Front fl aps for Utopia (yellow)...............................................................................................................................3b ......... 8; 11 

1703/52 Front fl aps for Utopia (green) ...............................................................................................................................3b ......... 8; 11 

1703/53 Front fl aps for Utopia (black) ................................................................................................................................3b ......... 8; 11 

1703/60 Embedding box for Utopia ....................................................................................................................................3b ................7 

1703/61 Kit for installation of Utopia video door phones on plasterboard ..........................................................................3b ................7 

1703/90 Utopia bracket for coaxial video outdoors systems ..............................................................................................3b ............. 10 

1703/91 Utopia free-hands bracket for coaxial video outdoors systems ............................................................................3b ................3 

1703/93 Utopia free-hands bracket for coaxial video outdoor system................................................................................3b ................3 

1703/955 Utopia bracket for 5-wire video outdoors systems................................................................................................3b ............. 10 

1704/102 Plastic support for retrofi tting with Sentry .............................................................................................................3b ............. 13 

1705/1 Artico video door phone (50Hz)............................................................................................................................3b ............. 12 

1705/17 Artico black and white video door phone for deaf person.....................................................................................3a ............. 12 

1705/18 Artico video door phone (60Hz)............................................................................................................................3b ............. 12 

1705/90 Artico bracket for coaxial video outdoors systems ...............................................................................................3b ............. 13 

1705/100 Plastic support for retrofi tting with Sentry .............................................................................................................3b ............. 13 

1705/101 Front glass smoky grey ........................................................................................................................................3b ............. 13 

1705/102 Front glass blue ....................................................................................................................................................3b ............. 13 

1705/955 Artico bracket for 5-wire video outdoors systems.................................................................................................3b ............. 12 














1721/103 Exigo front panel for video door phone panels with dedicated box 3 calling buttons on one row ........................2h ............. 11 




1721/204 Exigo front panel for video door phone panels with dedicated box 4 calling buttons on two rows .......................2h ............. 11 



1721/210 Exigo front panel for video door phone panels with dedicated box 10 calling buttons on two rows .....................2h ............. 11 






1728/20 Casing with front for video outdoor house phone station (anthracite) ..................................................................2g ................6 

1728/21 Casing with front for video outdoor house phone station (grey) ...........................................................................2g ................6 

1728/40 Door unit with coax colour camera unit ................................................................................................................2g ................7 

1728/80 Video door phone unit ..........................................................................................................................................2g ........... 3; 7 

1729/1 Smyle wall mounted video panel with 1 call button ..............................................................................................2g.............. 2 

1729/2 Smyle wall mounted video panel with 2 call buttons ............................................................................................2g.............. 2 

1732/1 Scaitel 4” video module, white 50Hz ....................................................................................................................3b ............. 20 

1732/18 Scaitel 4” video module, white 60Hz ....................................................................................................................3b ............. 20 

1732/41 Scaitel 4” colour video door phone .......................................................................................................................3b ............. 21 

1732/56 Table mounting kit for video module without bracket, white .................................................................................3b ............. 23 

1732/91 Bracket with connector for video outdoor systems with coaxial wire....................................................................3b ............. 22 

1732/955 Bracket with connector for video outdoor systems with fi ve wire ........................................................................3b ............. 22 

1742/13A Coax / 5 wires adapter device for TV camera ......................................................................................................2a ................9 

2d ............. 14 

2h ................5 

1743/1 Exigo front panel for Sinthesi box video door phone panels with 1 calling button................................................2h ................7 

1743/2 Exigo front panel for Sinthesi box video door phone panels with 2 calling buttons ..............................................2h ................7 

VIII 


INDEX 



1743/101 Exigo front panel for Sinthesi box video door phone panels with 1 calling button................................................2h ................7 









1743/110 Exigo front panel for Sinthesi box video door phone panels with 10 calling buttons ............................................2h ................7 

1745/20 Sinthesi camera unit module 50Hz with door unit without button (B/W 5 wire) ....................................................2a ................8 

1745/21 Sinthesi camera unit module 50Hz with door unit 1 button (B/W 5 wire)..............................................................2a ................8 

1745/22 Sinthesi camera unit module 50Hz with door unit 2 buttons (B/W 5 wire)............................................................2a ................8 

1745/40 Sinthesi camera unit module 50Hz colour without door unit (Coax).....................................................................2a ................7 

1745/41 Sinthesi camera unit module 50Hz colour with door unit 1 button (Coax)............................................................2a ................7 

1745/70 Sinthesi camera unit module 50Hz without door unit (B/W Coax)........................................................................2a ................6 

1745/79 Sinthesi camera unit module 60Hz without door unit (B/W Coax)........................................................................2a ................6 

1745/80 Sinthesi camera unit module 50Hz with door unit without button (B/W Coax) .....................................................2a ................6 

1745/81 Sinthesi camera unit module 50Hz with door unit 1 button (B/W Coax)...............................................................2a ................6 

1745/82 Sinthesi camera unit module 50Hz with door unit 2 buttons (B/W Coax) .............................................................2a ................6 

1750/32 Scaitel thirty-two image memory module, white ...................................................................................................3b ............. 24 

1755/20 K-Steel camera unit module 50Hz with door unit without button (B/W 5 wire) .....................................................2b ................4 

1755/21 K-Steel camera unit module 50Hz with door unit 1 button (B/W 5 wire)...............................................................2b ................4 

1755/30A K-Steel camera unit module for 5 wire system .....................................................................................................2b ................4 

1755/39A K-Steel camera unit module 60Hz without door unit without button (B/W 5 wire) ................................................2b ................4 

1755/40 K-Steel camera unit module colour (coax) ...........................................................................................................2b ................4 

1755/41 K-Steel camera unit module with door unit 1 button.............................................................................................2b ................4 

1755/45 K-Steel camera unit module 50Hz colour without door unit for 5 wire system .....................................................2b ................4 

1755/49 K-Steel camera unit module 60Hz colour (coax) ..................................................................................................2b ................4 

1755/70 K-Steel camera unit module 50Hz without door unit (B/W coax)..........................................................................2b ................4 

1755/79 K-Steel camera unit module 60Hz without door unit (B/W coax)..........................................................................2b ................4 

1755/80 K-Steel camera unit module with door unit without button ...................................................................................2b ................4 

1755/81 K-Steel camera unit module with door unit 1 button.............................................................................................2b ................4 

1794/4A Video distributor......................................................................................................................................................4 ............. 20 

1810/40 Colour camera unit ...............................................................................................................................................2h ................3 

1810/70 Adjustable CCD TV camera unit for artistic brass push button panels.................................................................2h ...............3 

1840/44 Voltage adapter for secondary camera ..................................................................................................................4 ............. 22 

4311/2 Mistral 12Vac/dc radio ringer with fl ash................................................................................................................ 3c ................8 

4311/3 Mistral 230Vac radio ringer with fl ash................................................................................................................... 3c ................9 

4311/11 Mistral transmitter push button ............................................................................................................................. 3c ............. 10 

4311/13 Wireless call repeater ........................................................................................................................................... 3c ............. 12 

4311/701 Kit consisting of call repeater Ref. 4311/13 and ringer with range of up to 100m with batteries .......................... 3c ............. 11 

4311/702 Mistral 12Vac/dc radio ringer kit ........................................................................................................................... 3c ............. 11 

4311/703 Mistral 12Vac/dc radio ringer kit ........................................................................................................................... 3c ............. 12 

4328/16 Flush-mounting box for Duo two-channel apartment station ..................................................................................7 ................5 

5330/60 Push button panel switch-off device .....................................................................................................................2a ............. 16 

2d ................7 

2h ................7 

7057/234 14 wires plus COAX cable......................................................................................................................................4 ............. 24 

7057/235 8 wires plus COAX cable........................................................................................................................................4 ............. 24 

9000/110 Transformer 12V - 110V - 18VA ............................................................................................................................ 4 ............. 12 

9000/230 Transformer 12V - 230V - 18VA .............................................................................................................................4 ............. 12 

9330/12 Call repeater relay ................................................................................................................................................3a ............. 14 

9854/40 Additional electronic chime 12Vac........................................................................................................................ 3c ................2 

9854/41 Additional chime for electronic ringer ................................................................................................................... 3c ................3 

9854/42 Three tone gong additional chime ........................................................................................................................ 3c ................4 

9854/52 Additional electronic buzzer 12Vca ...................................................................................................................... 3c ................5 

7 ................7 

9854/53 Additional buzzer for fl oor calling......................................................................................................................... 3c ................6 

9854/54 Additional speaker for Sinthesi door phone..........................................................................................................3a ................7 



IX


INDEX 


X 


SECTION NEW 2008 

neW 

NEWS 

2008 

Download from www.urmetdomus.com Technical Manuals area. 

Mod. 1128 WALL-MOUNTED PANEL 2 

EXIGO PANEL 3 

SECTION CONTENTS 

DOOR PHONE 2 


sec. new 2008−−−− 1

Mod. 1128 

neW 

WALL-MOUNTED PANEL Mod. 1128 

TECHNICAL FEATURES 

UTOPIA DOOR PHONES 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

WALL-MOUNTED PANEL 



The push-button panels Mod. 1128 are the ideal compromise 

between inexpensiveness, design, straightforward installation and 

communicating effi ciency for making DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS and 

video door phone systems. 

All the push-button panels can be installed rested on the wall with 

screws and plugs keeping a low projection from the wall: just 41mm. 

In consideration of its reduced width, installation of the push-button 

panel is also possible on a gatepost. 

The push-buttons, which also act as transparent cover for the name 

tag, are modular and come in two versions with different sizes. 

The following three models of push-button panels are available: set-up 

for outdoor house phone station, set up for outdoor video house phone 

station, and set-up for push-buttons only. Every model is available in 

two different colours: Anthracite and grey. 

The additional casings with push-buttons only can be fi tted at the side 

of those set up for the outdoor station, thereby making it possible to 

make DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS with a maximum of 16 small pushbuttons 

or VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS with a maximum of 14 

small push-buttons. 

It is possible to make the following types of systems depending on the 

outdoor station installed in the casings: 

• 4+n wire door phone systems – with 6Vdc power voltage 

• 4+n wire door phone systems – with 12Vac power voltage 

• Black and white video door phone system with coaxial cable 

In the case of particular requirements the push-button panel can be 

fl ush-fi tted using the specifi c box Ref. 1128/51, in this case, protrusion 

from the edge of the wall is reduced to a few millimetres. 


Dimensions: 

246 x 99 x 41mm 

Material: 

ABS base and hood 

Anodised aluminium front 

Name tag: small button 20 x 60mm 

big button 

40 x 60mm 

Total button stroke: 

2mm 

Idle button stroke: 

1,2mm 

Before contact closes 

Isolation voltage between contacts: 

500Veff 

Maximum cut-off current: 

2A on resistive load 

Name tag lighting: 

green LEDs on reflecting base 

Name tag light power: 

12Vac 

Name tag light draw: 

see housing description 

Working temperature range: -10 ÷ 50°C 

Degree of protection: 

IP44 

Refer to section “2G” to more information and installation method. 


The Utopia door phone model is extremely compact with low projection 

from the wall, which simplifi es its installation in any point of an 

environment. 

It has been developed for any type of system, either with 4+n or 1+1 

wires and can be installed either rested on the wall using screws and 

plugs with no masonry works, or table-mounted buying the specifi c 

stand Ref. 1134/50. 

The following versions of the door phone are provided: 

For “4+n” wire systems 

• Door phone with 1 additional button 

(set-up for 2 additional buttons) Ref. 1134/1 

For “1+1” wire systems 



Utopia door phones can be fi tted in parallel in video door phone 

systems. In this case, “4+n” wire system door phones should be 

used in coax systems and “1+1” wire door phones should be 

used in 5 wire video door phone systems. 


Characteristics of Utopia door phones are: 

• Adjustable and mutable call volume as standard feature. A red tab 

will appear at the top when the volume is muted. 

• Dedicated button for door opener function. 

• Additional push-button for operating electrical loads (stair lights, 

secondary door opening) or for standard intercom calls on all 

models. 

• Possibility of adding two extra push-buttons on all models. 

• Top clipped onto base without screws. 

• Dedicated call speaker for a stronger and clearer sound. 

• Telephone-like handset hook switch. 

• Fixed carriage terminal fi tted on basic printed circuit. 

• Rubber, round cross-section spiral cord with telephone plug on base 

on door phone. 

225 mm 

3 

2 

1 

90 mm 48,5 mm 

Refer to section “3A” to more information and installation method. 

2 −−−− sec. new 2008 


EXIGO PANEL 

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

CONFIGURATION 

neW 

EXIGO PANEL 

Exigo is the new, elegant and customisable, brass-plated Urmet 

Domus panel. 

A special space for an engraved plate is provided on the panel. The 

space may be used to fi t plate showing the name of the building, the 

address, the street number and other information, on one or two lines. 

Two types of fonts may be chosen. 

The basic panel is supplied with a brass panel to be engraved. Other 

two options are available upon request: an engraved brass plate or 

an anthracite grey PVC plate. You may choose what information to be 

written on the name tags (name, fl oor/apartment number, etc.) and the 

number of lines (1 or 2). 

The name tags are backlit by a set of high-effi ciency white LEDs. 

This feature may also be customised by purchasing a blue or green 

coloured fi lm. 

Polished brass-plate and matte brass-plate panels are available. The 

system is suitable for use in both door phone and video door phone 

systems (colour or black and white). 

All parts of the front panel are treated by means of a ion plating 

protection process (PVD) to make them corrosion and rustproof. The 

panels are particularly resistant to weather elements. 

The Exigo panels may be installed in Sinthesi fl ush-mounting boxes or 

in specifi c boxes. 

EXIGO PANEL 

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL 

SPECIFICATIONS 

Front projection from wall: 

17mm 


>4mm 


>2.4mm 


500Vac 

Max. button cut-off current: 

2Aac 


white LED diodes 

Temporary name tags: 

Plexiglas 

Max. wire cross-section area for button and light terminals: 1.5mm 2 

Corrosion: 

as per DIN 5342/64 standard 

Test duration: 

16 hours 

Test temperature range: 35°C 

IMPORTANT: Clean with a dry, soft cloth. Do not use brass polish. 

CONFIGURATION 

Exigo artistic panels may be used: 

• To make new 4+n wire (with traditional or electronic call) and 1+1 

wire door phone systems. 

• To make new coax and 5 wire video door phone systems. 

• To retrofi t existing door phone system with panels Mod. 625. 

All versions are complete with: 

• LED name tag lighting unit. 

• Brass-plate name tags to be engraved. 

• Tamperproof screws and screwdriver. 

• Drilling template for fastening the door unit (versions 1143 and 

1743). 

For further information on Exigo panels, refer to section “2H” of this 

manual. 


sec. new 2008−−−− 3

neW 

4 −−−− sec. new 2008 


SECTION 1 

(REV.E) 

DOOR PHONE 

& 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE 

SYSTEMS 



SYSTEM TYPOLOGIES...................................................................2 

Door phone systems.....................................................................2 

Video door phone systems ...........................................................2 

CHOOSING THE RIGHT SYSTEM..................................................2 

Door phone systems.....................................................................2 

Video door phone systems ...........................................................3 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY............................................................4 

CE MARKING...................................................................................4 

Ec consumer rights.......................................................................4 


sec.1 −−−− 1

DOOR PHONE & VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

SYSTEM TYPOLOGIES 

CHOOSING THE RIGHT SYSTEM 

The Urmet Domus products described in this manual can be used to 

make door phone and video door phone systems to satisfy all needs. 

The full range of products offered by Urmet Domus is suitable for both 

one-family installations and complex systems with several doors (riser 

columns). 

The design of the devices to be installed inside and outside the 

apartments ensures appealing solutions for all types of architecture. 

The various devices are careful designed to ensure easy installation, 

maintenance and use. Components are modular which means a only 

limited number of components need to be kept in stock. 

Each section in this manual can be downloaded from the 

www.urmetdomus.com web site, technical manual area. 

SYSTEM TYPOLOGIES 

DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

Door phone systems functions include conversation, calling and door 

opening in a normal electrical system. 

The following devices are needed to make a basic door phone 

system: 

• Panel with buttons and door unit. 

• Apartment station door phones. 

• Door phone system power unit. 

Door phone systems are split into two families according to the number 

of wires needed to make the system. 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

Urmet Domus video door phone systems ensure a high level of user 

safety; visitors can be recognised at the door (of a detached house, 

a semi-detached house or a block of fl ats) thanks to the picture which 

appears on the monitor located inside. 

The following devices are needed to make a basic video door phone 

system: 

• Panel with buttons, door unit and camera. 

• Apartment station video door phones. 

• Video door phone system power unit. 

Either black and white or colour video door phone systems are 

available using specific monitors and camera. 

Video door phone installation is simple and quick thanks to the use 

of specifi c brackets with terminal boards onto which the monitor is 

fastened. 

Two system types are available: coax and 5 wires. 

730 model door phone in existing systems and for making intercom 

systems. 

KEY 

A: Door phone 

B: Power unit 

A 

C: Panel 

D: Electrical lock 

A 

“1+1” wire systems 

“1+1” wires systems are available with electronic call option only. 

These systems are characterised by simple wiring with only 2 wires for 

each user. 

They are suitable for making new installations and are most appreciated 

for use in old buildings to replace an existing call only system (button 

and bell). The existing service can be transformed into a door phone 

system without adding wires to the column or in the apartments. 

In this systems, only the called door phone can pick up the conversation 

with the visitor (no other users can cut into the call in progress) and 

open the electrical door lock. 

Existing call only system 

E 

F 

B 

G 

C 

D 

KEY 

B: 12V transformer 

C: Panel 


E: Lock release button 

F: Apartment ringer 

G: Floor call button 



“4+n” wire systems 

E 

B 

F 

G 

This type of system employs 4 wires (2 for voice in and out, 1 for door 

phone power ground and 1 for operating the electrical lock) plus one 

call wire. 

The system may implement either traditional or electronic call tone 

options. 

C 

D 

Door phones with different designs and colour are available for 4+n 

wire electronic call systems. 

Door phones with special functions can be used (privacy indicator and 

door monitoring LED, voice circuit on button, additional buttons directly 

on the door phone top). Various accessories are also available (threetone 

gong, call volume adjustment kit, etc.). 

Various doors phones can be connected one to the each other in 

addition to the door unit for making intercom systems. 

Traditional call systems are suitable for making new systems with call 

signal to a dedicated buzzer fi tted inside the door phone. 

This type of door phone is suitable for replacing 1030, 930 and 

2 −−−− sec.1 DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual



“1+1” wire door phone system 

F 

G 

A 

F 

G 

A 

KEY 

A: Door phone 

B: 12V transformer 

C: Panel 


F: Apartment ringer 

G: Floor call button 

“5 wire” systems 

These systems are particularly suitable for new installations and 

for transforming existing door phone systems into video door 

phone systems without addition other wires in the column and the 

apartments. 

Urmet Domus 5 wire video door phone systems (without coax) can be 

used to make video door phone systems with only 4 wires for powering 

the monitor and the video signal plus 1 wire for the call signal. 

The picture only appears on the called monitor. Conversation is private. 

Users must have been called to connect to the door unit. 

Simple “1+1” door phones can be connected to the 5 wire video door 

phone system for offering voice service only. 

Existing door phone system 

B 

C 

L 

D 


Coax systems 

The construction of a coax video door phone system is similar to that 

of an electronic call “4+n” door phone system with the addition of video 

functions. The wires are the same as those shown for the door phone 

system with the addition of those needed to power the camera and the 

monitor, in addition to the coax cable for the video signal. 

This system offers countless possible confi gurations for both black and 

white and colour installations; it is particularly indicated when there is 

a long distance between the camera and the monitors. 

Apartment stations in coax systems can be connected one to another 

to make intercom systems. 

Apartment stations in coax systems can be complemented with a 

wide range of accessories (three-tone gong, Scaitel picture memory 

module, supplementary buzzer, etc.). 

Simple “4+n” door phones can be connected to the coax video door 

phone system for offering voice service only. 

L 

F 

A C 

5 wire video door phone system 

E 

KEY 

A: Door phone system 

power unit 

B: Video power unit 

C: Electrical lock 

D: Camera unit 

E: Door unit 

F: Panel 

G: Video door phone 

H: Distribution box 

I: Conversation 

privacy board 

L: Door phone 

A 

A 

D 

A 

A 

KEY 

A: Apartment station 

B: Power unit 

C: Video door unit 

D: Video distribution 

E: Electrical lock 

G 

H 

G 

D 

G 

G 

A 

A 

H 

D 

D 

TC 

TC 

F 

E 

C 

B 

I 

B 

E 

C 


sec.1 −−−− 3


CONVERSATION PRIVACY 

CE MARKING 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY 

Special conversation privacy circuits are fi tted inside the panel (one 

for each button) to ensure privacy for all 1+1 wire door phones and 

5 wire video door phones in the system. All door phones and video 

door phones are normally deactivated (no sound is heard when the 

handset is picked up); only the device called from the door can start 

the conversation. No other users can cut into the call. 

The voice circuit of the called device remains activated until the 

following call is made from the panel to another device. 

Operation of the electrical door lock is also enabled by the privacy 

circuit. Consequently, a call must be received to open the lock. 

The conversation privacy function is not standard in normal 4+n door 

phone systems and standard coax video door phone systems. This 

means that all users can listen into a conversation in progress with a 

visitor simply by picking up the handset. 

This is because all door phone voice lines are connected in parallel to 

the same conversation circuit. 

Conversation privacy can be obtained in door phone systems by using 

a specifi cally designed device to be fi tted in each door phone (this 

device can only be fi tted in Scaitel and Utopia door phones). A device 

(Ref. 5330/60) in common to the entire system must be arranged in the 

panel to deactivate any conservation privacy devices activated by a 

previous call. This device consequently ensures absolute secrecy also 

if a door phone remains off the hook. 

The conversation privacy function can be obtained by fi tting a special 

bracket with conversation privacy and switch-off device (Ref. 5330/60) 

in the panel in coax video door phone systems. 

goods into conformity. Consumers will not be entitled to have the 

goods brought back to conformity in the following cases: 

• Disrespect of instructions for installation and use. 

• Accidental causes or negligence of the consumer (specifi cally for 

outdoor surfaces). 

• Modifi cations or repairs carried out by personnel not authorised by 

Urmet Domus. 

• Inappropriate maintenance. 

• Operation or storage out of the environmental range specifi ed for 

the product. 

• Damage caused by electrical system anomalies, atmospheric 

conditions (e.g.lightening)or other caused external to the product. 

• Use in combination with accessories not marketed by Urmet Domus 

and/or parts not designed for product use. 

CE MARKING 

CE conformity marking indicates that the product respects the 

requirements of the applicable European Community Directives in 

force (specifi cally 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEC and the Electromagnetic 

Compatibility Directive 89/336). 

CE marking is applied by the manufacturer (or party delegated to do so 

by the manufacturer) under their own responsibility. It was created to 

eliminate obstacles to the circulation of productions in European Union 

Member States by harmonising different national standards. 

As required by the aforesaid Directives, Urmet Domus prepares 

Technical Documentation of each product on which CE marking is 

affi xed before marketing the product. The Technical Documentation 

describes the device and lists the standards to which it complies, 

documenting the test carried out. 

Urmet Domus also writes a CE Declaration of Conformity which is 

fi led at the company’s headquarters with the Technical Documentation 

in a booklet which is available for checks and inspections by the 

competent authorities for no less than ten years after the last product 

was marketed. 

The CE marking is affi xed on products after completing all design, 

production and product testing activities. Inspections are guaranteed 

by the Urmet Domus UNI EN ISO 9001:2000 compliant Quality 

Assurance System 

(certifi cate nr. 9110.URMD issued by CSQ accredited body). 

EC CONSUMER RIGHTS 

The consumer has legal rights under applicable national legislation 

governing the sale of consumer goods as per European Directive 

1999/44/EC 25 May 1999. Urmet Domus guarantees all products from 

lack of conformity which become apparent within two years from the 

date of purchase. 

Urmet Domus shall repair or replace the goods in the event of lack of 

conformity taking into account: 

• The value the goods would have if there were no lack of conformity. 

• The signifi cance of the lack of conformity. 

• Whether the alternative remedy can be completed without signifi cant 

inconvenience for the consumer. 

Goods shall be brought back to conformity by Urmet Domus or the 

company ’s representative on the national territory within a reasonable 

time taking into account of the nature of the goods,the purpose for 

which they were purchased and the method undertaken to bring the 


SECTION 2A 

(REV.E) 

PANELS 


ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................2 

CONFIGURATION ...........................................................................2 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE MODULES .....................2 

Name tag light ..............................................................................2 

DOOR UNIT SET-UP MODULES ....................................................3 

Door units .....................................................................................3 

BUTTON MODULES........................................................................4 

Call button contact separation ......................................................4 

Button module wiring ....................................................................5 

Name tag replacement .................................................................5 

SPECIAL MODULES........................................................................5 

Repertory modules Ref. 1145/50..................................................5 

Blank Modules Ref. 1145/59 ........................................................5 

SINTHESI CAMERA UNIT MODULES ............................................6 

Technical specifi cations................................................................6 

Coax camera unit .........................................................................6 

5-wire camera units ......................................................................8 

CAMERA ADAPTER Ref. 1742/13A ................................................9 


GATE SEMI-FLUSHED PANEL ACCESSORIES ..........................15 

Case and hood for semi-fl ushed gate installation 

with frame and module holder ....................................................15 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE 

FOR “1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 1145/74 ....................................16 

Conversation privacy device insertion ........................................16 


FOR “4+n” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 5330/60 ....................................16 

SINTHESI PANEL INSTALLATION................................................17 

Flush-mounted version ...............................................................17 

ACCESSORIES FOR RETROFITTING OLD SYSTEMS...............19 

625 Panel adapters ....................................................................19 

Adapter plate installation ............................................................20 

DIMENSIONS.................................................................................21 

4+n WIRE DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 

Examples of modular constructions with various capacities...........22 

1+1 WIRE DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 


FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES..........................................................10 

Joining fl ush-mounting boxes .....................................................10 

FRAMES AND MODULE HOLDERS .............................................10 

Module holder installation...........................................................10 

Frame installation .......................................................................11 

Horizontal holder and frame installation .....................................11 

FLUSH-MOUNTED PANEL ACCESSORIES.................................12 

Wall cover frame.........................................................................12 

Rain hood with wall cover frame.................................................12 

B&W COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 


B&W 5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 


COLOUR COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 


COLOUR 5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 


WALL-MOUNTED PANEL ACCESSORIES...................................13 

Case and hood with frame and module holder...........................13 

Some products may be described in the “New” section. 


sec.2a −−−− 1

SINTHESI PANELS 


CONFIGURATION - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE MODULES 

PANELS SINTHESI PANELS 


The module consists of anodised aluminium profi le modular elements 

which can be fi tted in specifi c frames. 

The innovative feature of this system consists in the possibility of 

vertical or horizontal installation. Furthermore, the fl ush-mounting 

boxes can be coupled by means of shims to create various panel 

types and confi gurations with a small number of components. The 

advantage of needing to stock fewer components is relevant for both 

wholesalers and installers. 

Module installation is simple thanks to the pre-wired connections on 

the modules and system terminal boards on extractable carriages. 

Sinthesi panels may be used in the following system types: 

• 4+n wire door phone systems. 

• 1+1 wire door phone systems. 

• B&W and colour coax video door phone systems. 

• B&W and colour 5-wire video door phone systems. 

• DUO free-hands systems. 



Front width of one row with frame: 


Flush mounting box depth: 

Front module fi nish: 

Urmet brand: 

Button body: 





125mm 

0.8mm 

45mm 

anodised aluminium 

on module holder frame 

Ø 10.5mm 

3mm 

1mm 

50Veff 

2Aeff 

Name tag dimensions: with single button: 67 x 12.5mm 

Tag and button light: 

LED 

Tag protection: 

self-extinguishing polycarbonate 

Max. wire cross-section area 

for button and light terminals: 1.5mm 2 


IP42 as per CEI 70.1 standard 

Corrosion: 



16 hours 


CONFIGURATION 

The following installations are possible: 

• Flush-mounting 

• Wall-mounting 

The system consists of the following parts: 

• Modules 

• Flush-mounting box with fairleads 

• Module holder and frame 

• Accessories 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE 

MODULES 

Assemble the various modules by fi tting them in the specifi c columns 

in the module holders. 

The following module versions are available: 

• Door unit set-up 

• With buttons only 

• Special (blank or repertory) 

• With camera 

The modules have a natural anodised aluminium front panel. 

Each module may be clipped onto the module holder for perfect 

alignment with the outer frame without the need for screws or tools. 

The buttons and name tags are backlit by LED in modules with call 

buttons. 

The Sinthesi includes both single and double modules. Module 

dimensions are: 

Single module: 90 x 90mm 

Double module: 90 x 180mm (5-wire video door phone systems only) 

The front part can be opened in all modules to facilitate operations. 

The frame must be removed for this purpose. 

NAME TAG LIGHT 

Name tag light uptake is shown in the following table: 

Ref. Description Power [W] 

1145/11 Module with 1 button............................................ 0.35 

1145/12 Module with 2 buttons .......................................... 0.35 

1145/13 Module with 3 buttons ............................................ 0.7 

1145/14 Module with 4 buttons ............................................ 0.7 

1145/21 Door unit module with 1 button ............................ 0.35 

1145/22 Door unit module with 2 buttons .......................... 0.35 

1145/50 Repertory/house number module .......................... 0.7 

1745/21 50Hz camera module with door unit 

and 1 button (B&W, 5 wires) ................................ 0.35 


and 2 buttons (B&W, 5 wires ............................... 0.35 


and 1 button (colour, coax) .................................. 0.35 


and 1 button (B&W, coax).................................... 0.35 


and 2 buttons (B&W, coax) .................................. 0.35 

2 −−−− sec.2a DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual


DOOR UNIT SET-UP MODULES 

DOOR UNIT SET-UP MODULES 

The following confi gurations of door unit set-up modules (i.e. modules 

without voice signal processing device) are available: 

• Without call buttons Ref. 1145/20 

• With call buttons Ref. 1145/21 

• With 2 call buttons (*) Ref. 1145/22 

• With 1 double call button Ref. 1145/32 

• With 2 double call buttons (*) Ref. 1145/34 

(*) For use in 4+n wire door phone systems and coax video door 

phone systems only. 

Ref. 1145/20 Ref. 1145/21 Ref. 1145/22 

DESCRIPTION OF TERMINALS 

Models Ref. 1145/21 - Ref. 1145/22 

~12 

} Name tag lighting LED power 

~0 

U2 Call button 2 (Ref. 1145/22 only) 

U1 Call button 

G/T Call button common 

G/T2 Call button contact 2 (Ref. 1145/22 only) 

Models Ref. 1145/32 - Ref. 1145/34 

} 

U1 Call buttons 

U2 

U3 

} Call buttons (Ref. 1145/34 only) 

U4 


~12 

} Name tag lighting LED power 

~0 

Note: obviously, module Ref. 1145/20 is without terminals because it 

contains no electrical devices. 

DOOR UNITS 

Ref. 1145/32 Ref. 1145/34 

DOOR UNIT FOR “4+N” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 1145/500 

The amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500 is commonly fi tted in Sinthesi 

modular panels in 4+n door phone systems, coax video door phone 

systems. 

User call feedback is provided on the door unit by means of a LED: the 

LED lights up on the door unit set-up panel only if the door phone or 

video door phone has picked up the call. 

The Ref. 1145/500 device is clipped onto the back on the module 

by means of specifi c clips. No tools are required for this operation. 

The door unit occupies the space of two buttons (half a module). 

Consequently, Ref. 1145/500 can be fi tted in: 

• Door unit set-up module without buttons Ref. 1145/20 

• Door unit set-up module with 1 single button Ref. 1145/21 

• Door unit set-up module with 2 single buttons Ref. 1145/22 

• Door unit set-up module with 1 double button Ref. 1145/32 

• Door unit set-up module with 2 double buttons Ref. 1145/34 


1 A Electronic voice out (from speaker to door phone) 

1 Traditional voice out (from speaker to door phone) 

+ Door unit power positive 

2 Voice in (from microphone to door phone) 

L Call feedback LED in (connect to panel button common) 

- Door unit power negative 

IMPORTANT 

Terminal “L” for call feedback cannot be used when the door unit is 

fi tted in traditional call buttons (12V ~ on buzzer). 

Note: use terminal “1A” in systems with electronic call door phones 

and terminal “1” for Mod. 1130 door phones. 

DOOR UNIT FOR “1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 1145/67 

Fit door unit Ref. 1145/67 in the panel for speak-and-listen service in 

“1+1” wire door phone systems. 

The Ref. 1145/67 device is clipped onto the back on the module by 

means of specifi c clips. No tools are required for this operation. The 

door unit occupies the space of three buttons (3/4th of a module). 

Consequently, Ref. 1145/67 only can be fi tted in: 

• Door unit set-up module without buttons Ref. 1145/20 

• Door unit set-up module with 1 single button Ref. 1145/21 

• Door unit set-up module with 1 double button Ref. 1145/32 


PS Tone generator output for simultaneous call of up to 2 units 

1/~ Door unit power earth 

5 (Electrical lock emergency relay control) 

~ Door unit power 

3 Call buzzer for 1130 door phones 

2 Electrical lock control 

SN Video power on control signal 

F Voice 

1 Conversation privacy device earth 

C1 Conversation privacy button 1 

4 Conversation privacy device power 

C2 Conversation privacy button 2 



sec.2a −−−− 3


BUTTON MODULES 

AMPLIFICATION REGULATION 



All door units have two integrated circuits for external and internal 

amplifi cation and an electret microphone (transmitting unit). 

Amplifi cation in the two directions may be adjusted by means of two 

potentiometers which can be accessed after removing the extractable 

front panel. 

Transmission levels are calibrated at the factory. For this reason, 

they should only be adjusted when absolutely necessary (e.g. to 

eliminate Larsen feedback). In these cases, turn the volume adjustment 

potentiometer outwards to avoid worsening acoustic balance. 

To adjust external volume: 

• Turn the potentiometer shown clockwise to turn the volume up and 

anticlockwise to turn it down ( ). 

To adjust internal volume: 


anticlockwise to turn it down ( ). 

BUTTON MODULES 

The following module versions are available: 

• With 1 button Ref. 1145/11 

• With 2 buttons Ref. 1145/12 



• With 4 double buttons Ref. 1145/18 

Note: the 1145/18 module can only be installed in 4+n or intercom 

door phone systems and coax video door phone systems. 

Models Ref. 1145/11, Ref. 1145/12, Ref. 1145/13 and Ref. 1145/14 

~12 

} Button and name tag light LED power 

~ 0 

U4 Call button 4 (Ref. 1145/14 only) 

U3 Call button 3 (Ref. 1145/13 and Ref. 1145/14 only) 

U2 

Call button 2 (Ref. 1145/12, Ref. 1145/13 and Ref. 1145/14 

only) 

U1 Call button 1 


G/T2 

Button contact 2 (°) 

(Ref. 1145/12, Ref. 1145/13 and Ref. 1145/14 only) 

G/T3 Button contact 3 (°) (Ref. 1145/13 and Ref. 1145/14 only) 

G/T4 Button contact 4 (°) (Ref. 1145/14 only) 

(°) These terminals are usually short-circuited and may be separated 

by the installer. 

Models Ref. 1145/18 

~12 


~ 0 










CALL BUTTON CONTACT SEPARATION 

Proceed as shown below to separate the G/T common contacts in 

button modules Ref. 1145/12, Ref. 1145/13 and Ref. 1145/14 and in 

door unit module Ref. 1145/22: 

~0 

~12 

G/T4 

G/T3 

G/T2 

~12 

~0 

U4 

U3 

U2 

U1 

G/T 

G/T4 

G/T3 

G/T2 

G/T 

Either groups or buttons or single buttons may be isolated according to 

the point where the contacts are separated (dotted X in the drawings). 

Use the specifi c terminals according to the separation employed to 

connect the buttons. 

U1 

U1 

G/T 

G/T 

U2 

U2 

G/T2 

G/T2 

U3 

G/T3 

U4 

G/T4 

Module with door unit 

set-up and 2 buttons (Ref. 1145/22) 

Modules with 2 and 3 buttons (Ref. 1145/12 and Ref. 1145/13) will be 

equipped only with the terminals referred to the buttons on the device. 

The button separation and connection methods are the same in all 

cases. 

A 

B 

Button modules 

(Ref. 1145/12-/13-/14) 



SPECIAL MODULES 

BUTTON MODULE WIRING 


The button modules are pre-wired for connecting light circuits to make 

wiring connections easier. A wire with mini-faston connectors is also 

provided to connect the call button common of the various modules. 

NAME TAG REPLACEMENT 

There are different types of name tags: 

• White: for provisional writing with a felt-tip pen (standard) 

• Anthracite: for engraving (standard) 

• Red: for staircase light button (door unit set-up modules only) 

• Blue: for panel customisation (optional: Ref. 1145/65 consists 

of blue name tags and frame headers). 

ROSSI 

Note: The engraving side is marked by the letter A on anthracite 

name tags. 

Proceed as follows to insert the name tags in the specifi c housing: 

1) Remove the frame (if installed) and remove the extractable front. 

2) Fit the name tags. 

3) Reposition the extractable front. 

1 

~12 

~0 

U4 

U3 

U2 

U1 

G/T 

~0 

~12 

~12 

~0 

U4 

U3 

U2 

U1 

G/T 

~0 

~12 

G/T4 

G/T3 

G/T2 

G/T4 

G/T3 

G/T2 

2 

OK 

NO 

ROSSI 

3 

A 

There are two types of special modules: 

• Repertory modules Ref. 1145/50 

• Blank modules Ref. 1145/59 

REPERTORY MODULES Ref. 1145/50 

Repertory modules are normally used to indicate the house number or 

contain other information. 

Power terminals ~0 and ~12 to light the unit via LEDs. 

The procedure for fi tting repertory tags is the same as that for the 

name tags. 

BLANK MODULES Ref. 1145/59 

This module is used to fi ll in spaces which are not used in modular 

applications as required. 

The same module can be used for other applications, e.g. burglar 

alarms and automatic gates. 



sec.2a −−−− 5


SINTHESI CAMERA UNIT MODULES 



The following camera unit module versions are available: 

COAX SYSTEM VERSIONS: 

• Black/white 

with door unit 

• 50Hz without buttons ................................................Ref. 1745/80 

• 50Hz with 1 button ....................................................Ref. 1745/81 

• 50Hz with 2 buttons ..................................................Ref. 1745/82 

without door unit 



• Colour 





5-WIRE SYSTEM VERSIONS: 





• 50Hz with 2 buttons ..................................................Ref. 1745/22 


Power voltage: 

Maximum uptake: 

Image sensor: 

Lens: 

Shutter: 

Focus: 

18Vdc 

250mAdc 

1/3” CCD 

standard 

standard 

fixed 

Coax video output: 

1Vpp composite 

5-wire video output: 

1Vpp differential 

Operating temperature range: from -10 to 50°C 

COAX CAMERA UNIT 

B&W CAMERA UNIT MODULE WITH DOOR UNIT 

Ref. 1745/80 Ref. 1745/81 Ref. 1745/82 

Camera units Ref. 1745/80/81/82 consist of a single Sinthesi module 

with camera, built-in door unit and either 0, 1 or 2 call buttons. These 

devices provide complete coax video door phone panels for systems 

with up to two users in the space of a single module. 

Easy to fi t and extract in the fl ush-mounting box, module features 

comprise: 

• Camera with built-in optics and shutter (fi xed focus). 

• Possibility of adjusting camera lens vertically and horizontally. 

• Set of infrared LEDs for illuminating the subject. 

• Connection terminals. 

• Software and door unit. 

• Button and name tag lighting LEDs (where fi tted). 


R1 Camera power negative 

+TC Camera power positive 

V3 Video signal 

V5 Video signal earth 

~12 Button and name tag lighting LED power 

~0 

} 

(Ref. 1745/81-/82 versions only) 

G/T Call button common (°) (Ref. 1745/81-/82 only) 

G/T2 Call button common (°) (Ref. 1745/82 only) 

U1 Column call button 1 (Ref. 1745/81-/82 only) 

U2 Column call button 2 (Ref. 1745/82 only) 


L Call feedback LED input 




1A Electronic voice out (from speaker to door phone) 

(°) Normally short-circuited, can be separated by the installer. 

U1 

G/T 

U2 

G/T2 

Module with door unit and 2 buttons (Ref. 1745/82) 

B&W CAMERA UNIT MODULE WITHOUT DOOR UNIT 

Particularly suitable for retrofi tting old Kombi 825 systems. Two types 

of cameras without door unit are available: 

• 50Hz Ref. 1745/70 

• 60Hz Ref. 1745/79 

Both models can be fi tted in Sinthesi panels and are provided with: 

• B&W camera, fi xed focus, with built-in optics and shutter. 

• Possibility of adjusting lens direction. 

• Infrared LED subject illumination. 

This module may also be used in 5-wire systems when a horizontal 

imaging development is required. Apply adapter Ref. 1742/13A to the 

camera in this case. 



+TC Camera power positive in analogic system 

V3/A Video signal 

V5/B Video signal earth 

T Camera on control in digital system 

R2 Camera power positive in digital system 




COLOUR CAMERA MODULE WITH DOOR UNIT AND 1 BUTTON 

Ref. 1745/41 

IMAGING ANGLES 

+21 -46 

The Ref. 1745/41 camera unit consists of a single Sinthesi module 

containing the following devices: 

• Colour camera with coaxial wire. 

• Set of white High effi cency LEDs for illuminating the subject. 

• Door unit for 4+n wire systems. 

• 1 call button. 

• Name tag lighting LED. 






~12 

~0 } Name tag lighting LED power 


U2 Do not use 

U1 Column call 



2 Audio in (from microphone to door phone) 


1 Traditional audio out (from speaker to door phone) 

1A Electronic audio out (from speaker to door phone) 

COLOUR CAMERA UNIT MODULE WITHOUT DOOR UNIT 

Ref. 1745/40 

This camera may be fi tted either in coax systems or in 5-wire systems 

with a Ref. 1742/13A adapter. 

The colour camera unit without door unit provides the modular features 

of the Sinthesi range. 






T 

} Use with digital call module 

R2 

0 

50 

50 

Measurements in centimetres 

+32 -32 

+46 -21 

+10° 

+10° 

7 

0 

-15° 

Pivoting angles of the camera with respect to central position are: 

VERTICAL + 10 TO -15° 

HORIZONTAL + 10 TO -10° 

CAMERA LENS DIRECTION ADJUSTMENT 

After installation, the camera direction can be adjusted according to 

the position of the framed subject. This operation may be carried 

out manually after removing the frame and the extractable front by 

adjusting the jointed mount directly from the front. The frame does not 

need to be tipped and special tools are not required. 

15° 

10° 

10° 10° 

VOLUME ADJUSTMENTS (Models Ref. 1745/80 - Ref. 1745/81 - 

Ref. 1745/82 only) 

Volume can be adjusted both ways (internal and external) by means 

of two potentiometers which can be accessed after opening the pushbutton 

panel frame in modules with door unit. 


• Turn the EXT. ( ) potentiometer clockwise to turn the volume up 

and anticlockwise to turn it down. 

0 

0 

HORIZONTAL 

VERTICAL 

-10° 

-40 

22 

-21 

34 

-12 



sec.2a −−−− 7




• Turn the INT. ( ) potentiometer clockwise to turn the volume up 

and anticlockwise to turn it down. 


+21 -46 


Transmission level calibration is optimal. You are advised to adjust the 

volume only if required to avoid disrupting the acoustic balance using 

the potentiometer which adjusts the external volume only. 

5 WIRES CAMERA UNITS 

B&W CAMERA UNIT MODULE WITH DOOR UNIT 

Ref. 1745/20 

The following three models are available: 

• Camera unit without buttons Ref. 1745/20 

• Camera unit with 1 button Ref. 1745/21 

• Camera unit with 2 buttons Ref. 1745/22 

All models are fi tted in a two-module Sinthesi structure and are 

provided with: 

• Solid state CCD image sensor camera with fi xed focus not 

interchangeable optics. 

• Possibility of adjusting camera lens direction. 

• Infrared LED subject illumination device. 

• Software and door unit. 

• Conversation privacy (for fi tted call buttons only). 

• Name tag illumination LED (not including Ref. 1745/20). 

These modules can be made for vertical confi gurations only. 


Ref. 1745/21 

C2 Call button (Ref. 1745/22 only) 

C1 Call button (Ref. 1745/21 and Ref. 1745/22 only) 

~ Door unit and name tag light power (where fi tted) 

1/~ 

} Power earth 

1/~ 

4 Conversation privacy circuit connection 

F Voice 



PS 

Tone generator output for simultaneous call of up to 2 

units 

B Differential video signal output (positive) 


A Differential video signal output (negative) 


5 (electrical lock emergency relay control) 

SE Electrical lock 

Ref. 1745/22 

0 

50 

50 


Rocking angles of the camera with respect to central position are: 

VERTICAL +10 TO -15° 

HORIZONTAL +10 TO -10° 

CONTROLS AND ADJUSTMENTS 

+10° 

7 

0 

-15° 

Camera direction (A) and volume (B) can be adjusted as coax camera 

module models. 

A 

+32 -32 

+46 -21 

+10° 

0 

0 

HORIZONTAL 

VERTICAL 

-10° 

-40 

10° 

22 

-21 

34 

-12 

10° 10° 

15° 




B 

CAMERA ADAPTER Ref. 1742/13A 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

J2 

J2 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

J2 

J2 

The camera adapter is required for installation in the following types of 

systems: 

• “5-wire” system with colour camera. 

• “5-wire” system with horizontal imaging unit development. 

• “5-wire” system with 60 Hz camera (not available in Italy). 

• Kombi Mod. 825 system retrofi ts. 

• Bibus digital system. 

The adapter Ref. 1742/13A must be used in combination with the 

following camera modules in the cases above: 

• Colour camera without door unit, without buttons Ref. 1745/40 

• B&W camera without door unit, without buttons Ref. 1745/70 

• B&W 60 Hz camera without door unit, without buttons Ref. 1745/79 

The adapter transforms the composite video signal from the camera 

into two different video signals (A and B). 

Adapter installation 

1. Fit the adapter by the side of the camera module and fasten it with 

the screw (Fig. 1). 

2. Remove connector A from the camera module (Fig. 2). 

3. Plug connector A in the device socket and connector B in the 

camera socket (Fig. 3). 

4. Position the wires inside the groove on the device. 

A 

Fig. 2 

B 

A 

B 

Fig. 1 

B 

Fig. 3 

A 



sec.2a −−−− 9


FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES 

FRAMES AND MODULE HOLDERS 



For different versions of fl ush-mounting boxes for Sinthesi range 

products are provided according to the number of modules to be 

housed: 

• For 1 module Ref. 1145/51 

• For 2 modules Ref. 1145/52 



The fl ushing depth for all boxes is 45 mm. 

System wires lead into the boxes through the openings on the sides 

and bottom of the box. 

All openings are shut by removable closures. 

Two fairlead shims for joining the boxes are provided with fl ushmounting 

boxes for 2, 3 and 4 modules. 

The fl ush-mounting box must be turned by 90° for horizontal panel 

development. 

Note: rain hood versions, case and hood versions and gate pillar 

versions may be applied to vertical panel arrangements only. 

JOINING FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES 

Flush-mounting boxes may be joined by means of shims which double 

as fairleads. 

Any number of fl ush-mounting boxes may be fi tted if no accessories 

are used. In this case, the boxes may be joined either horizontally or 

vertically by means of fairlead shims. Conversely, up to three boxes 

can be joined along the longer sides with wall cover frames and rain 

hoods. 

All shims are hollow to allow the passage of wires from one box to the 

other. 


1, 2, 3 and 4 module versions of the module holders and frames are 

available. 

The anodised aluminium frames are required for appearance and 

protection and must be applied at the end of the installation. 

Module holders on the other hand are used for simple, immediate 

fastening of single and double Sinthesi modules. 

A hinge is provided in the lower part of the frame to tip the modules 

and facilitate wiring and adjustments. 

Available versions are: 





MODULE HOLDER INSTALLATION 

Arrange the module holder and fasten the lower screw after fl ush 

mounting the box. Raise the frame and fasten the upper screw. 

A 

4 mm 




FRAME INSTALLATION 

After installation, insert the heads on the frame and arrange the 

assembly on the module holder. 

Adjust correct perpendicularity of the panel by means of the screws 

A. 

Secure the frame by fastening the screws B. 

Note: the blue headers Ref. 1145/65 may be used to customise the 

panel (the kit also comprises blue name tags). 

HORIZONTAL HOLDER AND FRAME 

INSTALLATION 

The procedure for horizontal installation of module holders and frames 

is similar to that described above. 

The frame hinge will be found on a side instead of on the bottom and 

will consequently open horizontally. The modules are fastened to the 

frame in the same way, regardless of the direction of development of 

the panel. 

B 

B 

A 

A 

J2 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

J2 

A 

4 mm 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

A 



sec.2a −−−− 11


FLUSH-MOUNTED PANEL ACCESSORIES 


FLUSH-MOUNTED PANEL ACCESSORIES 

WALL COVER FRAME 

These frames are used to conceal irregularities of the wall in the fl ush 

mounting area surrounding the panel; insert the cover frames between 

modules and wall. Rubber seals prevent water leakage. 

The following anodised aluminium frames are provided: 





H is 148, 238, 328 and 418mm for 1, 2, 3 and 4 module versions, 

respectively. 

• For 4 modules (2 frames for 2 joined modules) Ref. 1145/724 



H is 238, 328 and 418mm for 2, 3 and 4 module versions, 

respectively. 



H 

H 

H 

151 mm 2,5 mm 

280 mm 

409 mm 

2,5 mm 

2,5 mm 

H is 328 and 418mm for 3 and 4 module versions, respectively. 

WALL FRAME COVER INSTALLATION 

Embed the fl ush mounting box in the wall, position the wall cover frame 

and fasten the module holder lower screw. 

Frame fastening is completed by tightening the upper frame screw 

last. 

A 

4 mm 

For horizontal development of the panels, simply turn the wall cover 

frame by 90° to adapt it to the fl ush-mounting box. 

RAIN HOOD WITH WALL COVER FRAME 

The rain hoods may be only applied to vertical panels 

arrangements. 

They are useful to make the panel installation weatherproof. 

The following versions of hoods to be fi tted between modules and wall 

are provided: 





47 mm 

H 

158 mm 

22 mm 


respectively. 






WALL-MOUNTED PANEL ACCESSORIES 

47 mm 



respectively. 



H 


RAIN HOOD INSTALLATION 

Embed the fl ush mounting box in the wall, position the waterproof hood 

and fasten the module holder lower screw. 

Hood fastening is completed by tightening the upper frame screw last. 

A 

H 

287 mm 

416 mm 

4 mm 

22 mm 

47 mm 

22 mm 

CASE AND HOOD WITH FRAME AND MODULE 

HOLDER 

Wall-mounted installation is possible for vertical panels 

arrangements only. 

Cases and hoods protect the panel from the weather and may be used 

for installation on walls without fl ush-mounted parts. 

The following versions are provided (with frame and module holder): 






respectively. 





respectively. 



H 

H 

H 

157 mm 

286 mm 

416 mm 

79 mm 

59 mm 

79 mm 

59 mm 

79 mm 

59 mm 




sec.2a −−−− 13

J2 

J2 



CASE AND HOOD INSTALLATION 

• Fasten the hood to the wall by means of four bolts. 

• Loosen the upper frame screw, open the box and make the electrical 

connections. 


• Fit the modules on the frame. 

• Fit the frame. 

A 

A 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

B 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 


J2 

J2 


GATE SEMI-FLUSHED PANEL ACCESSORIES 

GATE SEMI-FLUSHED PANEL ACCESSORIES 

CASE AND HOOD FOR SEMI-FLUSHED GATE 

INSTALLATION WITH FRAME AND MODULE HOLDER 

Cases and hood for gate pillar installation are suitable for vertical 

installation on a gate pillar. 

Semi-fl ushed cases with module holder and front aluminium frame 

may be used for this type of installation. 

Versions are: 



Gate pillar installation dimensions are: 

2 module semi-fl ushed box: h 215 x l 104 x d 93.2mm 

3 module semi-fl ushed box: h 305.3 x l 104 x d 93.2mm 

Maximum projection from pillar: 

76mm 

GATE PILLAR INSTALLATION 

Ref. 1145/342 

Ref. 1145/343 

H= 198mm 

H= 288mm 

Drill a hole dimensioned as shown on the provided template in the 

pillar and arrange the case on the pillar. 

To fasten the case: 

a. Push the screw to the bottom of the box with a screwdriver. 

b. Push the screw outwards with a screwdriver. 

c. Fasten the screw. 

B 

H 

87 mm 

A 

C 


WARNING: Eliminate a crossbar with cutters to fi t double modules. 

• Turn the frame round and connect wires. 

• Fit the panel on the frame. 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 



sec.2a −−−− 15


CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE FOR “1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 1145/74 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE FOR “4+n” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 5330/60 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE FOR “1+1” 

WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 1145/74 

• Apply the shims and conversation privacy device to the module. 


The device is used for conversation privacy function in 1+1 door phone 

systems and 5-wire video door phone systems only. 

Each device may be fi tted in a 4-button module with the two screws 

provided as shown below. Connect wires C1, C2, C3 and C4 to 

terminals U1, U2, U3 and U4 of the button module; use the terminals 

on the device for connecting to the system. 

The device will only be partially used in the case of 1, 2 and 3 button 

modules. 

The number of boards consequently depends on the number of buttons 

(from 1 to 4) on the panel. 

When counting the number of boards required, remember that door 

unit Ref. 1145/67 and camera modules Ref. 1745/21 and Ref. 1745/22 

are already equipped with conversation privacy devices for two users. 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE INSERTION 

• Fasten the devices to the two shims with the respective screws. 

• Connect the wires to each call button. 

C1 

C2 

~0 

~12 

~12 

~0 

U4 

U3 

U2 G/T4 

U1 G/T3 

G/T G/T2 

U1 

C3 

C4 

U2 U3 U4 

~12 

~0 

U4 

U3 

U2 G/T4 

U1 G/T3 

G/T G/T2 


C1 Privacy circuit button 1 




1 Power earth 

4 Audio input 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE FOR “4+N” 


This device is used for conversation privacy function in 4+n door 

phone systems and coax video door phone systems, only. 

Fit device Ref. 1131/5 or Ref. 1134/5 in each (only Scaitel Mod. 1132 

or Utopia Mod. 1134) door phone for the function; fi t the video door 

phones on the specifi c conversation privacy bracket (Ref. 1202/95 for 

Atlantico). 

The device shuts down privacy from previous calls and consequently 

ensures total privacy also if a door phone is forgotten off hook. 

All devices are normally deactivated (no conversation is heard when 

the handset is picked up): only the device called by the panel may start 

a conversation with the caller; no other device can take or intercept the 

call. 

The device must be fastened to the fl ush-mounting box or case with 

hood with two screws. 

Considering its size, the device must be fi tted in button modules or 

special modules. 

~0 

~12 



SINTHESI PANEL INSTALLATION 

FLUSH MOUNTING BOX 

∅ 2,9 x 6,5mm 

DESCRIPTION OF THE TERMINALS 

PS Call tone input 

+ Do not use 

9 Door opener control 

Ap Electrical lock operation 

-/~ Power earth 

2B Audio signal input from microphone to door phone (2) 

1B Audio signal output to door phone speaker (1) 

2A Audio signal output from door unit (2) 

1A Audio signal input from door unit (1A) 

~12 Power input 


FLUSH-MOUNTED VERSION 

CASE AND HOOD 

h = 4 

∅ 2,2 x 9,5mm 

You are advised to install the modules at the heights shown below 

according to the required system confi guration. 

1,55 ÷ 1,60 m 1,55 ÷ 1,60 m 

1,55 ÷ 1,60 m 

1,55 ÷ 1,60 m 

In any case, consider the height shown in the fi gure for fastening the 

camera for correct installation of complex arrangement with several 

modules. The height refers to the door unit in door phone systems. 

The procedure for horizontal panel development is the same at that 

shown below for vertical development. 

Obviously, in this case, the boxes, module holders, modules and 

frames must be turned by 90°. 

• Arrange the hole (on the bottom or on the sides) for letting through 

the connection wires before closing the fl ush-mounting box (single 

or joined to other boxes). 

• Fit the fl ush mounting box in line with the wall: it must not project. 

• Fit the module holder frame. 

A 

4 mm 



sec.2a −−−− 17

J2 

J2 



• Fit the modules in the frame. 

• Fit the name tags. 



• Adjust correct perpendicularity of the panel. 

Close the frame and fasten the screws A. 

A 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

• Position the panel on the frame. 

Fasten screws B on screws A. 

A 

A 

B 

B 

B 

A 

A 



ACCESSORIES FOR RETROFITTING OLD SYSTEMS 

ACCESSORIES FOR RETROFITTING OLD 


• Panels with two row of buttons. 

625 PANEL ADAPTERS 

The 625 panel adapter boards are made to install Sinthesi panels in 

625 model fl ush-mounting boxes without the need for masonry work. 

The boards can be used only to retrofi t 4+n door phone systems. 

The adapter plates are provided with module holder and frame 

according to the 625 panel to be replaced as follows: 

• Panels with one row of buttons. 

Adapter plate 

Number of 625 Ref. External 

buttons panel code dimensions (mm) 

3 7701/3 1145/803 166 x 276 

4 7701/4 1145/804 166 x 304 

5 7701/5 1145/805 166 x 332 

6 7701/6 1145/806 166 x 360 

4 7711/4 1145/800∗ 130 x 164 

∗ Available to order. 

Adapter plate 

Number of 625 Ref. External 

buttons panel code dimensions (mm) 

4 7702/4 1145/846 220 x 248 

6 7702/6 1145/846 220 x 248 

8 7702/8 1145/810 220 x 304 

10 7702/10 1145/810 220 x 304 

12 7702/12 1145/812 220 x 332 

14 7702/14 1145/814 220 x 360 

16 7702/16 1145/816 220 x 388 

18 7702/18 1145/818∗ 220 x 416 

20 7702/20 1145/820∗ 220 x 444 

22 7702/22 1145/822∗ 220 x 472 

24 7702/24 1145/824∗ 220 x 500 

26 7702/26 1145/826∗ 220 x 528 

28 7702/28 1145/828∗ 220 x 556 

∗ Available to order. 

The Sinthesi modules needed to retrofi t 625 panels are: 

No. No. Adapter Door Door Button Repertory 

of of plate unit unit modules modules 

rows buttons 

modules 

3 1145/803 1145/500 1145/20 1145/13 -- 

4 1145/804 1145/500 1145/20 1145/14 -- 

1 5 1145/805 1145/500 1145/21 1145/14 -- 

6 1145/806 1145/500 1145/22 1145/14 1145/50 

4 1145/800 - - 1 x 1145/14 -- 

4 1145/846 1145/500 1145/20 1145/14 -- 

6 1145/846 1145/500 1145/22 1145/14 -- 

8 1145/810 1145/500 1145/20 1145/18 -- 

10 1145/810 1145/500 1145/32 1145/18 -- 

12 1145/812 1145/500 1145/34 1145/18 -- 

2 

14 1145/814 1145/500 1145/20 2 x 1145/18 -- 

16 1145/816 1145/500 1145/20 2 x 1145/18 -- 

18 1145/818 1145/500 1145/32 2 x 1145/18 -- 

20 1145/820 1145/500 1145/34 2 x 1145/18 1145/50 

22 1145/822 1145/500 1145/20 3 x 1145/18 -- 

24 1145/824 1145/500 1145/20 3 x 1145/18 -- 

26 1145/826 1145/500 1145/32 3 x 1145/18 -- 

28 1145/828 1145/500 1145/34 3 x 1145/18 1145/50 



sec.2a −−−− 19

J2 

J2 


ACCESSORIES FOR RETROFITTING OLD SYSTEMS 


ADAPTER PLATE INSTALLATION 

• Remove the 625 panel by disconnecting the existing wiring and 

remove the call buttons, the bulbs and the door unit fastening 

columns (where fi tted). Do not remove the internal plate supporting 

frame (some versions only). 

• Adapt the length of existing wires to the new panel, if required. 

• Fasten the adapter plate to the 625 fl ush-mounting box by means of 

the 4 screws provided. 

• Fit the modules in the frame. 


GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

• Close the frame. 

• Adjust corect perpendicularity of the panel. 

• Fasten the screws A. 

A 

4 mm 

• Position the panel on the frame. 

• Fasten screws B on screws A. 

A 

A 

B 

A 

B 

B 

A 



DIMENSIONS 


Note: H1= 114, 204, 294, 384 indicates flush mounting height and H2= 119, 209, 299, 389 indicates to total height relative to 1, 2, 3 and 

4 module versions. 

H3 

151 / 241 / 331 / 421 

45 mm 

158 mm 

118 mm 

H1 

114 / 204 / 294 / 384 mm 

45 mm 

244 mm 

WALL-MOUNTED VERSION 

370 mm 

Note: H3 referred to the total height may differ according to the number of modules that the case may contain. 

H1 

114 / 204 / 294 / 384 mm 

125 mm 250 mm 375 mm 

79 mm 

59 mm 

H2 

119 / 209/ 299/ 389 mm 

H3 

241 / 331 / 421 

287 mm 

H2 

119 / 209/ 299/ 389 mm 

79 mm 

59 mm 

H3 

331 / 421 

416 mm 

H1 

114 / 204 / 294 / 384 mm 

H2 

119 / 209/ 299/ 389 mm 

79 mm 

59 mm 



sec.2a −−−− 21


4+n WIRE DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

EXAMPLES OF MODULAR CONSTRUCTIONS WITH VARIOUS CAPACITIES 

PANELS 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

4+n 

Button and 

repertory 

modules 

Door unit 

modules 

Door unit 

Flush-mounting 

box 

Module holders 

and frames 

FLUSH 

MOUNTED (#) 

Wall 

cover frame 

(°) 

Rain hood with 

wall cover frame 

(°) 

(for vertical 

panels only) 

WALL 

MOUNTED (#) 

Case with hood 

frame and 

module holders 

(for vertical 

panels only) 

GATE 

PILLAR (#) 

(°) optional, alternatives 

(#) alternatives 


1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/50 

1145/20 

1145/21 

1145/22 

1145/500 

1145/51 

1145/52 

1145/53 

1145/54 

1145/61 

1145/62 

1145/63 

1145/64 

1145/711 

1145/712 

1145/713 

1145/714 

1145/726 

1145/728 

1145/739 

1145/732 

1145/611 

1145/612 

1145/613 

1145/614 

1145/626 

1145/628 

1145/639 

1145/632 

1145/311 

1145/312 

1145/313 

1145/314 

1145/326 

1145/328 

1145/339 

1145/332 

1145/342 

1145/343 

SINTHESI PANELS - 4+n WIRE DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

BUTTONS NUMBER 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 2 

1 

2 2 2 3 

3 3 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 3 3 1 1 

3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 7 7 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

3 3 3 3 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 






EXAMPLES OF VERTICAL CONFIGURATIONS 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

12 13 14 

15 

16 17 18 


19 20 

21 

22 23 24 

25 26 27 28 29 30 

PANELS 

31 32 

33 34 


sec.2a −−−− 23





35 36 

37 

38 

39 40 41 42 

43 44 45 

46 

EXAMPLES OF HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATIONS 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

7 

8 9 10 11 

PANELS 

12 13 

14 



1+1 WIRE DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


1+1 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

Button and 

repertory 

modules 

Door unit 

modules 

Door unit 

Conversation 

privacy device 


box 


and frames 

FLUSH 

MOUNTED (#) 

Wall 

cover frame 

(°) 



(°) 

(for vertical 

panels only) 

WALL 

MOUNTED (#) 


frame and 


(for vertical 

panels only) 

GATE 

PILLAR (#) 




PANELS 

1145/12 

1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/50 

1145/20 

1145/21 

1145/67 

1145/74 

1145/51 

1145/52 

1145/53 

1145/54 

1145/61 

1145/62 

1145/63 

1145/64 

1145/711 

1145/712 

1145/713 

1145/714 

1145/726 

1145/728 

1145/739 

1145/732 

1145/611 

1145/612 

1145/613 

1145/614 

1145/626 

1145/628 

1145/639 

1145/632 

1145/311 

1145/312 

1145/313 

1145/314 

1145/326 

1145/328 

1145/339 

1145/332 

1145/342 

1145/343 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 

1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 7 9 9 

7 8 7 10 10 11 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 

10 10 11 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 

11 

11 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

3 3 3 3 

3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 


SINTHESI PANELS - 1+1 WIRE DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


sec.2a −−−− 25






1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

12 13 14 

15 

16 17 18 

19 20 

21 

22 23 24 

25 26 27 28 29 

30 

PANELS 

31 

32 

33 34 





35 36 

37 

38 

39 40 41 42 


43 44 

45 


1 2 3 4 5 

6 

7 

8 9 10 

11 

12 13 

PANELS 


sec.2a −−−− 27


B&W COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


PANELS 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

b/w coax 

Button and 

repertory 

modules 

Camera 

modules 

and door unit 


box 


and frames 

FLUSH 

MOUNTED (#) 

Wall 

cover frame 

(°) 



(°) 

(for vertical 

panels only) 

WALL 

MOUNTED (#) 


frame and 


(for vertical 

panels only) 

GATE 

PILLAR (#) 




1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/50 

1745/80 

1745/81 

1745/82 

1145/51 

1145/52 

1145/53 

1145/54 

1145/61 

1145/62 

1145/63 

1145/64 

1145/711 

1145/712 

1145/713 

1145/714 

1145/726 

1145/728 

1145/739 

1145/732 

1145/611 

1145/612 

1145/613 

1145/614 

1145/626 

1145/628 

1145/639 

1145/632 

1145/311 

1145/312 

1145/313 

1145/314 

1145/326 

1145/328 

1145/339 

1145/332 

1145/342 

1145/343 

SINTHESI PANELS - B&W COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 

1 1 1 2 

1 

2 2 2 3 

3 3 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 3 3 1 1 

3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 7 7 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 1 

1 

1 

1 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

3 3 3 3 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 


11 

1 






1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

12 13 14 

15 

16 17 18 


19 20 

21 

22 23 24 

25 26 27 28 29 30 

31 32 

33 34 

PANELS 


sec.2a −−−− 29





35 36 

37 

38 

39 40 41 42 

43 44 45 

46 


1 2 3 4 5 6 

7 

8 9 10 11 

PANELS 

12 13 

14 



B&W 5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


b/w 5 wires (vert.) 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

FLUSH 

MOUNTED (#) 

WALL 

MOUNTED (#) 

GATE 

PILLAR (#) 

Button and 

repertory 

modules 

Camera 

modules 

and door unit 

Conversation 



box 


and frames 

Wall 

cover frame 

(°) 



(°) 

(for vertical 

panels only) 


frame and 


(for vertical 

panels only) 


1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/50 

1745/20 

1745/21 

1745/22 

1145/74 

1145/52 

1145/53 

1145/54 

1145/62 

1145/63 

1145/64 

1145/712 

1145/713 

1145/714 

1145/726 

1145/728 

1145/739 

1145/732 

1145/612 

1145/613 

1145/614 

1145/626 

1145/628 

1145/639 

1145/632 

1145/312 

1145/313 

1145/314 

1145/326 

1145/328 

1145/339 

1145/332 

1145/342 

1145/343 



PANELS 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 7 7 9 10 10 10 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 

1 1 

1 

1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 

2 2 

1 1 

1 1 

1 1 

2 2 

1 1 

2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 

1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

3 3 3 

3 3 3 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 


3 

3 

1 

1 

1 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

SINTHESI PANELS - B&W 5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


sec.2a −−−− 31






1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 24 25 26 

27 

28 29 

30 31 

PANELS 





32 33 

34 

35 

36 37 38 39 


40 41 

42 

PANELS 


sec.2a −−−− 33





b/w 5 wires (horiz.) 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

FLUSH 

MOUNTED 

Button and 

repertory 

modules 

Door unit 

modules 

Door unit 

Conversation 


Camera 

modules 

Camera 

adapter 


box 


and frames 

Wall 

cover frame 

1145/11 

1145/12 

1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/20 

1145/21 

1145/67 

1145/74 

1745/70 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 2 


2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1745/13A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1145/52 1 

1145/53 1 1 1 1 

1145/54 

1 1 1 1 

1145/62 1 

1145/63 1 1 1 1 

1145/64 

1 1 1 1 

1145/712 1 

1145/713 1 1 1 1 

1145/714 

1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 


1 2 

3 4 5 

6 7 8 

9 

PANELS 



COLOUR COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

FLUSH 

MOUNTED (#) 

WALL 

MOUNTED (#) 

GATE 

PILLAR (#) 

colour coax 



Button and 

repertory 

modules 

Camera 

modules 

Door unit 

modules 

Door unit 


box 


and frames 

Wall 

cover frame 

(°) 



(°) 

(for vertical 

panels only) 


frame and 


(for vertical 

panels only) 


1145/11 

1145/12 

1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/50 

1745/40 

1745/41 

1145/20 

1145/21 

1145/22 

1145/500 

1145/51 

1145/52 

1145/53 

1145/54 

1145/61 

1145/62 

1145/63 

1145/64 

1145/711 

1145/712 

1145/713 

1145/714 

1145/726 

1145/728 

1145/739 

1145/732 

1145/611 

1145/612 

1145/613 

1145/614 

1145/626 

1145/628 

1145/639 

1145/632 

1145/311 

1145/312 

1145/313 

1145/314 

1145/326 

1145/328 

1145/339 

1145/332 

1145/342 

1145/343 

PANELS 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 2 1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 9 9 9 9 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 

1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

7 8 7 10 10 10 

3 3 3 3 

3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 


3 

3 

10 10 11 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

SINTHESI PANELS - COLOUR COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


sec.2a −−−− 35






1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

12 13 14 

15 

16 

17 18 

19 20 

21 

22 23 24 

25 26 27 28 29 

30 

PANELS 

31 32 

33 

34 





35 36 

37 

38 

39 40 41 42 


43 44 

45 


1 2 3 

4 5 

6 

7 8 9 10 

11 

12 13 

PANELS 


sec.2a −−−− 37


COLOUR 5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


PANELS 

colour 5 wires 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

FLUSH 

MOUNTED (#) 

WALL 

MOUNTED (#) 

GATE 

PILLAR (#) 

Button and 

repertory 

modules 

Door unit 

modules 

Door unit 

Conversation 


Camera 

modules 

Camera 

adapter 


box 


and frames 

Wall 

cover frame 

(°) 



(°) 

(for vertical 

panels only) 


frame and 


(for vertical 

panels only) 


1145/12 

1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/50 

1145/20 

1145/21 

1145/67 

1145/74 

1745/40 

1742/13A 

1145/52 

1145/53 

1145/54 

1145/62 

1145/63 

1145/64 

1145/712 

1145/713 

1145/714 

1145/726 

1145/728 

1145/739 

1145/732 

1145/612 

1145/613 

1145/614 

1145/626 

1145/628 

1145/639 

1145/632 

1145/312 

1145/313 

1145/314 

1145/326 

1145/328 

1145/339 

1145/332 

1145/342 

1145/343 



SINTHESI PANELS - COLOUR 5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 7 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

2 2 2 

2 2 2 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 


3 

3 

1 

1 

1 

3 3 3 

3 3 3 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

3 3 3 3 3 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 






1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 9 

11 12 13 

14 

17 18 

19 20 

15 

21 

16 

22 

10 


23 24 25 

27 28 

29 

30 31 

32 

PANELS 


sec.2a −−−− 39





33 34 

35 

36 

37 38 39 40 

41 


1 2 

3 4 5 

PANELS 

6 7 8 9 


SECTION 2B 

(REV.E) 

K-STEEL MODULAR 

VANDAL-PROOF PANEL 




MODULE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................2 

Name tag light ..............................................................................2 

MODULES WITH DOOR UNIT ........................................................2 

Description of terminals 

Ref. 1155/20, Ref. 1155/21 and Ref. 1155/22A ...........................3 

Description of terminals 

Ref. 1155/30, Ref. 1155/31 and Ref. 1155/32A ...........................3 

PUSHBUTTON MODULES..............................................................3 

CALL BUTTON CONTACT SEPARATION ......................................3 

ENGRAVING OF NAME TAGS........................................................4 


DOOR CAMERA MODULE..............................................................4 


Camera orientation .......................................................................5 

Demister power ............................................................................6 

Volume adjustment (Ref. 1755/80, Ref. 1755/81, 

Ref. 1755/20, Ref. 1755/21 Version only) ....................................6 

Engraving of name tags for Ref. 1755/81 and 1755/21................6 

DESCRIPTION OF TERMINALS .....................................................6 

FRAMES...........................................................................................7 

FLUSH-MOUNTING BACK BOXES WITH MODULE HOUSINGS ..7 

Galvanized steel back boxes........................................................7 

Joining fl ush-mounting boxes .......................................................7 

Stainless steel module housings ..................................................8 

CASES WITH HOOD .......................................................................8 


CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE..............................................9 

1+1 Wire systems Ref. 1145/74 ...................................................9 

4+N wire systems Ref. 1155/75....................................................9 

INSTALLATION..............................................................................10 

DIMENSIONS.................................................................................12 

DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 


VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 




sec.2b −−−− 1

K-STEEL MODULAR VANDAL-PROOF PANEL 

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONFIGURATION 

MODULE SPECIFICATIONS - MODULES WITH DOOR UNIT 


MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 

PANELS K-STEEL MODULAR VANDAL-PROOF PANEL 

This range of panels is characterised by a high degree of protection 

from acts of vandalism and the modularity of the elements. 

The system consists of modular stainless steel elements. Modules are 

secured to specially designed housings complete with fl ush-mounting 

back boxes, a structure which enables modules to be combined either 

vertically or horizontally. 

Modular design reduces the number of different products used in the 

system, making stock management easier for both wholesalers and 

installers. 

The K-steel line can be used in the following types of system: 

• 4+n wire doorphone system. 

• 1+1 wire doorphone system. 

• B&W and colour coax video door phone systems with 4+n wire 

electronic call. 

• B&W and colour 5-wire video door phone system with electronic 

call. 



Width, 1-row faceplate: 

Faceplate protrusion from wall: 

Recessed depth: 

Maximum permissible recess error: 

Faceplate fi nish: 

Urmet trademark: 

Button body: 

Total pushbutton stroke: 

Pushbutton free stroke: 

Insulation voltage across terminals: 

Max. break current: 

148mm 

19mm 

55mm 

6 mm from finished wall 

Bright stainless steel 

On speaker unit 

Bright stainless steel 

1.5mm 

1mm (before making contact) 

50V rms 

2A rms, resistive load 

Tag and button light: 

LED 

Tag protection: 

self-extinguishing polycarbonate 

Nameplate dimensions: 

73 + 12 (1) x 16.7 x 0.5mm max 

(surface available for inscription = 58 x 16.7mm) 

Max. conductor cross-section: 

for button and lighting terminals: 1.5mm 2 

Protection level: IP 45 as per IEC 70.1 

Corrosion: As per DIN 5342/64 


16 hours 

Temperature: 35°C 

____ 

(1) 

12mm = length of tab provided for removal purposes 

CONFIGURATION 

The system can be used for fl ush-mounting or wall-mounting; it 

consists of the following parts: 

• Modules 

• Frames 

• Flush mounting box with module holder frames 

• Accessories 

Each module is secured to the associated housing by means of 

threaded fasteners to ensure perfect alignment with the exterior 

frame. 

System connections are made via terminal blocks on the rear of each 

module. 

Modules are provided with a plastic rear protector, while a rubber 

gasket is installed between module and frame. 

Pushbutton modules are provided with button and nameplate 

backlighting. 

Nameplates are provided for engraving the user’s name. Nameplates 

can be replaced only with plates of the same type supplied by Urmet- 

Domus; to replace, remove frame and take nameplate out. 

Transparent nameplate covers can be replaced only after completely 

disassembling the module. 

The wide range of modules can be combined in any desired 

confi guration. 

The dimensions of all K-Steel line modules are: 125 x 106mm. 


Pushbuttons and nameplates are lit by means of leds. 

Modules are illuminated by supplying terminals ~0 and ~12. 

The doorphone power supply unit used in the system is suffi cient 

for a maximum of 2 modules. For a larger number of modules, an 

appropriate power transformer will be required. 

The Ref. 9000/230 transformer can supply a maximum of 5 button 

modules. 

MODULES WITH DOOR UNIT 

The following versions with built-in door unit are available: 

Without call button 

for 4+n systems Ref. 1155/20 

for 1+1 systems Ref. 1155/30 

With 1 call button 

for 4+n systems Ref. 1155/21 

for 1+1 systems Ref. 1155/31 

With 2 call buttons 

for 4+n systems Ref. 1155/22A 

for 1+1 systems Ref. 1155/32A 

2 −−−− sec.2b DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual


PUSHBUTTON MODULES 


DESCRIPTION OF TERMINALS Ref. 1155/20, Ref. 

1155/21 AND Ref. 1155/22A 

• Two pushbuttons Ref. 1155/12A 






~0 


~12 

U2 Call button (Ref. 1155/22A module only) 

G/T2 (°) Call button common (Ref. 1155/22A modules only) 

U1 Call button (Ref. 1155/21 and 1155/22A modules only) 

G/T (°) Call button common (Ref. 1155/21 and 1155/22A 

modules only) 

(°) This terminals are usually short-circuited and may be separated by 

the installer. 

Note: use terminal “1A” in systems with electronic call door phone and 

terminal “1” for Mod. 1130 door phone. 

DESCRIPTION OF TERMINALS Ref. 1155/30, 

Ref. 1155/31 AND Ref. 1155/32A 




F Vioce 


3 Call buzzer (1130 door phones) 



4 

1 

C1 

C2 

~0 

~12 

Conversation privacy device power 

(Ref. 1155/31 and 1155/32A modules only) 

Conversation privacy device earth 

(Ref. 1155/31 and 1155/32A modules only) 

Call button (Ref. 1155/31 and 1155/32A modules only) 

Call button (Ref. 1155/32A only) 


U2 Call button (Ref. 1155/32A module only) 

G/T2 (°) Call button common (Ref. 1155/32A modules only) 

U1 Call button (Ref. 1155/31 and 1155/32A modules only) 

G/T (°) Call button common (Ref. 1155/31 and 1155/32A 

modules only) 

(°) This terminals are usually short-circuited and may be separated by 

the installer. 

PUSHBUTTON MODULES 

Pushbutton modules are supplied in the following versions: 

• One pushbutton Ref. 1155/11 

• Three pushbuttons Ref. 1155/13A 

• Four pushbuttons Ref. 1155/14A 

In addition to G/T and U terminals, all modules have ~0 and ~12 

terminals for button and name tag lights. 


Proceed as follows to separate G/T common contacts in Ref. 1155/12A, 

Ref. 1155/13A and Ref. 1155/14A button modules. 

Simply cut the jumper between two terminals in Ref. 1155/22A and 

Ref. 1155/32A door unit modules. 

G/T2 

G/T 

G/T4 

G/T3 

G/T2 

G/T 

Either groups or buttons or single buttons may be isolated according to 

the point where the contacts are separated (dotted X in the drawings). 

A 

B 



sec.2b −−−− 3


ENGRAVING OF NAME TAGS 

SPECIAL MODULES - DOOR CAMERA MODULE 


Use the specifi c terminals according to the separation employed to 

connect the buttons. 

Modules with 2 and 3 buttons (Ref. 1155/12A, Ref. 1155/22A, 

Ref. 1155/32A and Ref. 1155/13A) will be equipped only with the 

terminals referred to the buttons on the device. The button separation 

and connection methods are the same in all cases. 

ENGRAVING OF NAME TAGS 

Nome 

Name 

Nom 

Engraving side 

“Black” tag 

for engraving 

Detail of vandal-proof screw and tool required for opening and closing 

the panel. 


Two types of special modules are available: 

“White” tag 

for writing with permanent pen 

• Directory module Ref. 1155/50 

ROSSI 

U1 

G/T 

U2 

G/T2 

U3 

G/T3 

U4 

G/T4 

Directory modules are normally used to indicate house number or 

other information. 

Power terminals ~0 and ~12 to light the unit via LEDs. 

• Blank module Ref. 1155/59 

This module is used to fi ll unused spaces in modular installations. 

The same module can be used for other applications, e.g. burglar 

alarms and automatic gates. 

DOOR CAMERA MODULE 

Door camera modules are available in the following versions: 

COAX SYSTEM VERSIONS: 



• 50Hz without buttons ............................................... Ref. 1755/80 

• 50Hz with 1 button ................................................... Ref. 1755/81 




• Colour 






5-WIRE SYSTEM VERSIONS: 






• 50Hz without buttons .............................................Ref. 1755/30A 

• 60Hz without buttons .............................................Ref. 1755/39A 

• Colour 






Image sensor: 

Lens: 

Shutter: 

Focus: 

18Vdc 

250mAdc 

1/3” CCD 

standard 

standard 

fixed 



5-wire video output: 


Operating temperature range: from -10 to 50°C 



DOOR CAMERA MODULE 

CAMERA ORIENTATION 

Camera modules versions Ref. 1755/30A, Ref. 1755/39A, 

Ref. 1755/40, Ref. 1755/49, Ref. 1755/45, Ref. 1755/41, Ref. 1755/70, 

Ref. 1755/79, Ref. 1755/80, Ref. 1755/81 make it possible to adjust 

the orientation of the lens of the TV camera located inside these after 

tilting back the frame of the push button panel, in order to overcome 

any installation fl aws. The adjustment along the vertical axis in relation 

to the position set is 10° up and 15° down. 

The adjustment along the horizontal axis in relation to the position set 

is 10° in both directions (left-right). 

Orientation along the vertical axis 

After loosening lock screw (A), operate on the specifi c adjustment unit 

as follows: 

• Pushing plate (B) up, the area framed is moved toward the top of the 

screen. 

• Pushing plate (B) down, the area framed is moved toward the 

bottom of the screen. 

Orientation along the horizontal axis 

After loosening lock screw (A), operate on the specifi c adjustment unit 

as follows: 

• Pushing cross-tie (C) to the right of the operator, the area framed 

will be moved toward the right of the screen. 

• Pushing cross-tie (C) to the left of the operator, the area framed will 

be moved toward the left of the screen. 

After making the adjustments, tighten lock screw (A). 

Imaging angles 

50 

D 

+46 

E 

+21 

+32 

~0 ~12 

~0 ~12 

0 

G/T UI 

C 

-21 

+10° 0 -10° 

HORIZONTAL 


A B C = POSITION 

ADJUSTMENT 

D = DEMISTER 

A 

B 

-46 

-32 

50 

E = KEY + 


+10° 

7 

0 

-15° 

VERTICAL 

-40 

22 

-21 

34 

-12 

Camera modules versions Ref. 1755/20, Ref. 1755/21. The 

orientation of the camera lens inside the camera modules Ref. 1755/20, 

Ref. 1755/21 can be adjusted after opening the pushbutton panel 

frame to compensate for installation imperfections. 

The camera lens can be adjusted along the vertical axis with respect 

to the set position by 10° upwards and 15° downwards. 

D 

E 


• Push the lever (A) upwards to move the camera fi eld upwards on 

the screen. 

• Push the lever (A) downwards to move the camera fi eld downwards 

on the screen. 

Imaging angles 

0 

50 

~0 ~12 

C1 G/T 1/~ ~ 

50 

A 

A 

D 

E 

= POSITION ADJUSTMENT 

= DEMISTER 

+32 -32 

= KEY + NAME TAG LIGHT 

HORIZONTAL 

+10° 

7 

0 

-15° 

VERTICAL 


0 

-40 

22 

-21 

34 

-12 



sec.2b −−−− 5




DEMISTER POWER 

The module is provided with a demister fi tted on the lower side. 

Connect the circuit permanently via terminals (D) ~0 and ~12 to a 

12Vac voltage source in the system when installing the system in 

particularly humid areas. Note that the demister circuit will only be 

powered at night if the device is connected to a light circuit controlled 

by a dusk switch. 

Connect the circuit by means of the specifi cally provided extractable 

two-way terminal board. 

Current uptake is negligible. However, it is advisable to take voltage 

from a secondary transformer, if possible. 

VOLUME ADJUSTMENT (Ref. 1755/80, Ref. 1755/81, 

Ref. 1755/41, Ref. 1755/20, Ref. 1755/21 VERSION 

ONLY) 

Volume can be adjusted both ways (internal and external) by means 

of two potentiometers which can be accessed after opening the panel 

frame in modules with door unit. 


• Turn the EXT. potentiometer clockwise to turn the volume up and 

anticlockwise to turn it down. 


• Turn the INT. potentiometer clockwise to turn the volume up and 

anticlockwise to turn it down. 

Transmission level calibration is optimal. You are advised to adjust the 

volume only if required to avoid disrupting the acoustic balance using 

the potentiometer which adjusts the external volume only. 

ENGRAVING OF NAME TAGS FOR Ref. 1755/81, 

Ref. 1755/41, AND Ref. 1755/21 


Models Ref. 1755/70, Ref. 1755/79, Ref. 1755/40, Ref. 1755/49 

~0 (a) 

} Demister power 

~12 (a) 

+TC 

R1 

V5 

V3 

Engraving side 

Nome 

Name 

Nom 

Name tag for 

professional engraving 

Camera power positive 

Camera power negative 

Video signal earth 

Video signal 

Name tag for 

provisional engraving 

ROSSI 


~0 (a) 


~12 (a) 

+TC 

R1 

V5 

V3 




Video signal 






Models Ref. 1755/81, Ref. 1755/41 

~0 (a) 


~12 (a) 

+TC 

R1 

V5 

V3 




Video signal 






U1 Column call button 


~0 (b) 


~12 (b) 

Models Ref. 1755/30A, Ref. 1755/39A, Ref. 1755/45 

~0 (a) 


~12 (a) 

T 

R2 

+TC 

R1 

A 

B 


Camera on control in digital systems 

Camera power positive in digital systems 

Camera power positive in analogic systems 

Negativo di alimentazione telecamera 

Differential video signal output (negative) 

Differential video signal output (positive) 

~0 (a) 


~12 (a) 

+TC 

R1 

A 

B 










F Voice 


PS 


units 

1/~ Conversation privacy device earth 

1/~ Video power on earth signal 



FRAMES 

FLUSH-MOUNTING BACK BOXES WITH MODULE HOUSINGS 


~0 (a) 


~12 (a) 

+TC 

R1 

A 

B 





C1 Column call button 


1/~ Door unit and name tag light LED power negative 

~ Door unit and name tag light LED power positive 




F Voice 


PS 


units 

1/~ Conversation privacy device earth 

1/~ Video power on earth signal 

FRAMES 

Frame performs decorative and protective functions. After securing 

modules to the housing, entrance panel is completed by installing the 

frame using the tamperproof screws provided with the unit. Frames are 

available in 1, 2 and 3 module versions. 

H 

148 mm 

Frame with 1 modules H=418mm 

Bright PVD inox Ref. 1155/84 

Glazed inox Ref. 1155/91 







FLUSH-MOUNTING BACK BOXES WITH 

MODULE HOUSINGS 

GALVANIZED STEEL BACK BOXES 

19 mm 

1, 2 and 3 module versions can be combined either horizontally or 

vertically. 

Back boxes are joined by means of spacer grommets which ensure 

correct alignment and spacing. 

Back boxes and frames of differing heights cannot be combined 

horizontally. For example, as with the Kombi entrance panel, two 

different heights will result if a 3-module back box is joined to a 

2-module back box with a 1-module back box above it. 

Flush-mounting back boxes are hinged so that the bottom of the 

module housing can be swung downwards during installation. System 

wiring can be routed into the back box through the spacer grommets 

(two per side) or through the apertures provided in the bottom of the 

box. All openings are shut by removable closures. 

Available confi gurations are as follows: 

H 

138 mm 

• For 1 module with H= 139mm Ref. 1155/61 

• For 2 modules with H= 256mm Ref. 1155/62 

• For 3 modules with H= 376mm Ref. 1155/63 

All versions include spacer grommets and junction plates for assembly 

with other back boxes. 

INTERNAL MODULE GUARD 

The embedding boxes are equipped with a removable internal guard. 

The guard should be fi tted on the upper side of the box once it is 

installed to protect the modules from water infi ltration and humidity 

inside the pushbutton panel. 

Fit the guard as shown in the drawing. Fasten it in the upper housing 

which is not used for fastening the module frame. 

IMPORTANT: the warranty conditions will be forfeited if the 

protection is either not installed or installed 

incorrectly. 

JOINING FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES 

55 mm 

The fl ush-mounting joining kit Ref. 1155/54 consists of the following 

parts: 

1 Mobile crossing plate 

1 Fixed crossing plate 

1 Horizontal protection crosspiece 

1 Protection 2-module crosspiece 

1 Protection 3-module crosspiece 

1 Sliding hinge 

1 Screw cap 

2 Fairlead shims 

1 Frame alignment shim 

4 M4 x 16 galvanised screws for frame 

This product may be used to install fl ush-mounting boxes horizontally 

and vertically side by side as shown below: 

1 Fit the fl ush-mounting boxes by means of the shims provided 

through which the system connection wires may be passed. 

2 Insert crossing plate provided in the middle of with the assembled 

boxes. 

3 Insert the protective crosspieces between the fl ush-mounting 

boxes. 



sec.2b −−−− 7


CASES WITH HOOD 

1 

2 


STAINLESS STEEL MODULE HOUSINGS 

1, 2 and 3 module versions. All 2 and 3-module housings are provided 

with partitions that must be removed in cases where double modules 

are used. Single and double modules are secured to the housing by 

means of threaded fasteners. 

During installation, the housing is attached to the hinge on the lower 

side of the fl ush-mounting back box. This permits the housing to be 

swung downwards to facilitate electrical connections. 

Once electrical connections have been made, the housing is swung 

upwards and subsequently retained to the back box by means of 

threaded fasteners. Squareness errors of ±2° and errors in recess 

depth up to 6 mm made when installing back box can be corrected at 

this point. 


Use the specifi c cases with hood for K-Steel module wall-mounted 

installations: 

Ref. 1155/311 Case with hood for 1 module 

(dimension:152.4 x 151.9 x 104.2 mm) 





The cases are made of stainless steel and ensure good protection of 

the panel from direct contact with rain. 

The cases are provided with hoods. The module holder frame can be 

tipped over thanks to a hinge to ensure the same installation ease as 

normal fl ush-mounted versions. Frames are provided separately. 

4 

1,55 m 

6 

n° 4 

M4 x 16 

ROSSI 

VERDI 

BIANCHI 

ROSSI 

GIALLI 

VERDI 

3 

5 

ROSSI 

VERDI 

BIANCHI 

ROSSI 

GIALLI 

VERDI 

BIANCHI 

ROSSI 

GIALLI 

VERDI 




7 

4+N WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 1155/75 

B 

A 

B 

IMPORTANT: 

Use a dedicated raceway for wires for each case when two or more 

cases are fi tted side-by-side. 


1+1 WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 1145/74 

C 

The device is used to provide secrecy of conversation in 1+1 type door 

phone systems only. 

Each device is designed to be assembled on the 4-button module 

with the two screws provided as shown in the fi gure, connecting wires 

C1÷C4 to terminals U1÷U4 of the keys module; for connections to the 

system, use terminals C1÷C4 on the device. 

If 1, 2 or 3 button key modules are used, the device is used only 

partially. 

Note: install the device without using the shims provided. 






1 Power earth 

4 Audio input 

C 

A 






Atlantico). 






call. 

The device must be fastened to the fl ush-mounting box or case with 

hood with two screws. 

Considering its size, the device must be fi tted in button modules or 

special modules. 



+ Do not use 











sec.2b −−−− 9


INSTALLATION 


INSTALLATION 

1. Refer the protections from the hole to be used to pass the wires 

only from the fl ush-mounting box. 

NOTE: the holes in the upper part must only be used for introducing 

the cables if overlapped to other boxes. 

2. Flush the box and the required height. 

m = 1,55 

Warning: During installation, protect all parts which will be exposed 

to view from mortar, plaster and cement. 

NEVER USE ABRASIVE DETERGENTS to clean units. 

3. Fit the fl ush mounting box in line with the wall: it must not project. 

max. 

6 mm 

m = 1,55 ÷ 1,60 

NOTE: the wall surface on which the front rests must be as smooth as 

possible (max. tolerance 1.5 mm). 

4. If the internal production has been removed from the box for any 

reason, insert it as shown in the fi gure. Fix it in the upper part not 

used for fi xing the module holder frame. 

IMPORTANT: the warranty conditions will be forfeited if the 

protection is either not installed or installed 

incorrectly. 

5. Fit the modules in the frame. 

n° 4 M3 x 10 

6. Fasten the module holder frame to the fl ush mounting boxes by 

means of the specifi c hinged attachment. 

A 

B 

7. Fit the seal and close the frame. 

A 

C 



INSTALLATION 

B 

n° 4 M4 x 16 mm 

8. Fasten the frame with the three screws provided. 

The tool must only be used manually, and not fi tted on electrical 

screwdrivers, to prevent damaging the screws and/or the tool. 

OK 

BIANCHI 

ROSSI 

GIALLI 

VERDI 

90° 

NO 

In the case of module installation with several fl ush-mounting boxes 

joined together, align the modules using a frame alignment shim before 

fastening the frame. 



sec.2b −−−− 11


DIMENSIONS 

138 mm 

286 mm 

435 mm 


148 mm 

H1 

139 / 256 / 376 / 522 mm 

H2 

148 / 266 / 384 / 532 mm 

296 mm 

H1 

139 / 256 / 376 / 522 mm 

H2 

148 / 266 / 384 / 532 mm 

444 mm 

Note: H1= 139, 256, 376, 522 indicates flush mounting height and H2= 148, 266, 384, 532 indicates to total height relative to 1, 2, 3 and 

4 module versions. 

55 mm 

H1 

139 / 256 / 376 / 522 mm 

H2 

148 / 266 / 384 / 532 mm 





(•) alternatives 1155/84 

(♦) alternatives 1155/85 

(∗) alternatives 1155/86 

(@) alternatives 

4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 

4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 

Flush-mounting back boxes with module housings (@) 

Cases with hood (@) 

Pushbutton modules 

Frames 

Blank module Directory module 

Door unit modules 


Conversation privacy device 




Frames 





1 2 

3 

4 

1155/61 1155/61 1155/62 1155/62 

1155/311 1155/311 1155/312 1155/312 

- - 1155/13A 1155/14A 

1155/91 (•) 1155/91 (•) 1155/92 (♦) 1155/92 (♦) 

- - - - - - - - 

1155/21 1155/22A 1155/20 1155/20 

1155/31 1155/32A 1155/30 1155/30 

- - 1145/74 1145/74 

5 

6 

7 8 

1155/62 1155/62 1155/63 1155/63 

1155/312 1155/312 1155/313 1155/313 

1155/14A 1155/14A 1 x 1155/13A - 1 x 1155/14A 2 x 1155/14A 

1155/92 (♦) 1155/92 (♦) 1155/93 (∗) 1155/93 (∗) 

- - - - - - - - 

1155/21 1155/22A 1155/20 1155/20 

1155/31 1155/32A 1155/30 1155/30 

1145/74 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 

K-STEEL MODULAR VANDAL-PROOF PANEL - DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

9 10 

11 

12 

4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 




Frames 





1155/63 1155/63 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 

1155/313 1155/313 2 x 1155/312 2 x 1155/312 

2 x 1155/14A 2 x 1155/14A 1 x 1155/13A - 2 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A 

1155/93 (∗) 1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- - - - - - - - 

1155/21 1155/22A 1155/20 1155/20 

1155/31 1155/32A 1155/30 1155/30 

2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 

PANELS 


sec.2b −−−− 13









4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 

4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 




Frames 








Frames 





13 14 

11 

12 

2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 

2 x 1155/312 2 x 1155/312 - - 

3 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A 1 x 1155/13A - 2 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A 

2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- - - - - - - - 

1155/21 1155/22A 1155/20 1155/20 

1155/31 1155/32A 1155/30 1155/30 

3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 

13 

14 

15 16 

2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/63 2 x 1155/63 

- - 2 x 1155/313 2 x 1155/313 

3 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A 1 x 1155/13A - 3 x 1155/14A 4 x 1155/14A 

2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 

- - - - - 1155/50 - 1155/50 

1155/21 1155/22A 1155/20 1155/20 

1155/31 1155/32A 1155/30 1155/30 

3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 4 x 1145/74 4 x 1145/74 

17 18 

19 20 

PANELS 

4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 




Frames 





2 x 1155/63 2 x 1155/63 2 x 1155/63 2 x 1155/63 

2 x 1155/313 2 x 1155/313 2 x 1155/313 2 x 1155/313 

4 x 1155/14A 4 x 1155/14A 1 x 1155/13A - 4 x 1155/14A 5 x 1155/14A 

2 x 1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 

- 1155/50 - 1155/50 - - - - 

1155/21 1155/22A 1155/20 1155/20 

1155/31 1155/32A 1155/30 1155/30 

4 x 1145/74 4 x 1145/74 5 x 1145/74 5 x 1145/74 









4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 




Frames 


Flush-mounting joining kit 







Frames 



21 22 

24 25 

2 x 1155/63 2 x 1155/63 4 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/62 

2 x 1155/313 2 x 1155/313 - - 

5 x 1155/14A 5 x 1155/14A 6 x 1155/14A 6 x 1155/14A 

2 x 1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- - - - - 1155/50 - 1155/50 

- - 1 x 1155/54 1 x 1155/54 

1155/21 1155/22A 1155/20 1155/21 

1155/31 1155/32A 1155/30 1155/31 

5 x 1145/74 5 x 1145/74 6 x 1145/74 6 x 1145/74 

26 28 

29 30 

4 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/62 

- - - - 

6 x 1155/14A 7 x 1155/14A 7 x 1155/14A 7 x 1155/14A 

4 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- 1155/50 - - - - - - 

1 x 1155/54 1 x 1155/54 1 x 1155/54 1 x 1155/54 


4+n WIRE 


1155/22A 1155/20 1155/21 1155/22A 

1+1 WIRE 



1155/32A 1155/30 1155/31 1155/32A 

6 x 1145/74 7 x 1145/74 7 x 1145/74 7 x 1145/74 

23 

24 25 


3 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/63 


3 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/313 


Frames 

3 x 1155/12A - 4 x 1155/14A 2 x 1155/12A - 5 x 1155/14A 6 x 1155/14A + 1155/11 

3 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 

4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 





- 1155/50 - 1155/50 - 1155/50 

1155/21 1155/20 1155/20 

1155/31 1155/30 1155/30 

7 x 1145/74 7 x 1145/74 6 x 1145/74 

PANELS 


sec.2b −−−− 15









4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 

4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 




Frames 








Frames 





26 27 

28 

3 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/63 

3 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/313 

1 x 1155/12A - 6 x 1155/14A 1 x 1155/13A - 6 x 1155/14A 7 x 1155/14A 

3 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 

- 1155/50 - 1155/50 - 1155/50 

1155/20 1155/20 1155/20 

1155/30 1155/30 1155/30 

7 x 1145/74 7 x 1145/74 7 x 1145/74 

29 30 

31 

3 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/63 

3 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/313 

7 x 1155/14A + 1155/11 7 x 1155/14A + 1155/12A 1 x 1155/13A - 7 x 1155/14A 

3 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 

- 1155/50 - 1155/50 - - 

1155/20 1155/20 1155/20 

1155/30 1155/30 1155/30 

8 x 1145/74 8 x 1145/74 8 x 1145/74 

32 33 

34 


3 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/63 


3 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/313 


Frames 

8 x 1155/14A 8 x 1155/14A 8 x 1155/14A 

3 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 

PANELS 

4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 





- - - - - - 

1155/20 1155/21 1155/22A 

1155/30 1155/31 1155/32A 

8 x 1145/74 8 x 1145/74 8 x 1145/74 









4+n WIRE 

1+1 WIRE 




Frames 



37 

6 x 1155/62 6 x 1155/62 6 x 1155/62 

- - - 

9 x 1155/14A 10 x 1155/14A 10 x 1155/14A 

6 x 1155/92 (♦) 6 x 1155/92 (♦) 6 x 1155/92 (♦) 

1155/59 1155/50 - 1155/50 - 1155/50 

2 x 1155/54 2 x 1155/54 2 x 1155/54 

Door unit modules 1155/21 1155/20 1155/22A 


1155/31 1155/30 1155/32A 


9 x 1145/74 10 x 1145/74 10 x 1145/74 




Frames 



44 46 

6 x 1155/62 6 x 1155/62 

- - 

11 x 1155/14A 11 x 1155/14A 

6 x 1155/65 6 x 1155/65 

- - - - 

2 x 1155/54 2 x 1155/54 

40 

42 


4+n WIRE 

Door unit modules 1155/20 1155/22A 

1+1 WIRE 



1155/30 1155/32A 

11 x 1145/74 11 x 1145/74 

PANELS 


sec.2b −−−− 17




K-STEEL MODULAR VANDAL-PROOF PANEL - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 





(§) alternatives 

WIRE 

COAX 

SYSTEM 

5 WIRE 

WIRE 

COAX 


5 WIRE 




Frames 


B&W camera modules (#) 

Colour camera modules (#) 


B&W camera modules (§) 

Colour camera modules (§) 






Frames 









1 1 2 

3 

(B&W only) 

1155/61 1155/62 1155/62 1155/62 1155/63 

1155/311 1155/312 1155/312 1155/312 1155/313 

- - - 1155/13A 1155/13A 

1155/91 1155/92 (♦) 1155/92 (♦) 1155/92 (♦) 1155/93 (∗) 

- - - - - - - - - - 

1755/81 1755/70 1755/70 1755/80 1755/70 

1755/41 1755/40 1755/40 - 1755/40 

- 1155/21 1155/22A - 1155/20 

1755/21 1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/20 1755/30A 

- 1755/45 1755/45 - 1755/45 

- 1155/31 1155/32A - 1155/30 

- - - 1145/74 1145/74 

4 

(B&W only) 

4 

5 6 

1155/62 1155/63 1155/63 1155/63 

1155/312 1155/313 1155/313 1155/313 

1155/14A 1155/14A 1155/14A 1155/14A 

1155/92 (♦) 1155/93 (∗) 1155/93 (∗) 1155/93 (∗) 

- - - - - - - - 

1755/80 1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 

- 1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 

- 1155/20 1155/21 1155/22A 

1755/20 1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 

- 1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 

- 1155/30 1155/31 1155/32A 

1145/74 1145/74 1145/74 1145/74 

3 




Frames 


7 

(B&W only) 

7 

7 

8 

(B&W only) 

1155/63 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 1155/63 

1155/313 - 2 x 1155/312 1155/313 

1155/14A + 1155/13A 1155/14A + 1155/13A 1155/14A + 1155/13A 2 x 1155/14A 

1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 1155/93 (∗) 

- - - - - - - - 

WIRE 

COAX 





1755/80 1755/70 1755/70 1755/80 

- 1755/40 1755/40 - 

- 1155/20 1155/20 - 

PANELS 

5 WIRE 





1755/20 1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/20 

- 1755/45 1755/45 - 

- 1155/30 1155/30 - 

2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 










WIRE 

COAX 


5 WIRE 

WIRE 

COAX 





Frames 












Frames 





8 8 

9 

2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 

- 2 x 1155/312 - 2 x 1155/312 

2 x 1155/14A 2 x 1155/14A 2 x 1155/14A 2 x 1155/14A 

2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- - - - - - - - 

1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 

1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 

1155/20 1155/20 1155/21 1155/21 

1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 

1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 

1155/30 1155/30 1155/31 1155/31 

2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 

10 

10 

11 

(B&W only) 

9 

11 

(B&W only) 

2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 

- 2 x 1155/312 - 2 x 1155/312 

2 x 1155/14A 2 x 1155/14A 2 x 1155/14A + 1155/13A 2 x 1155/14A + 1155/13A 

2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- - - - - - - - 

1755/70 1755/70 1755/80 1755/80 

1755/40 1755/40 - - 

1155/22A 1155/22A - - 


5 WIRE 





1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 

1755/45 1755/45 - - 

1155/30 1155/30 1155/31 1155/31 

2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 2 x 1145/74 

PANELS 


sec.2b −−−− 19










WIRE 

COAX 


5 WIRE 

WIRE 

COAX 


5 WIRE 




Frames 












Frames 









11 11 

12 

(B&W only) 

12 

(B&W only) 

2 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/62 

2 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/312 - 2 x 1155/312 

2 x 1155/14A + 1155/13A 2 x 1155/14A + 1155/13A 3 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A 

2 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- 1155/50 - 1155/50 - - - - 

1755/70 1755/70 1755/80 1755/80 

1755/40 1755/40 - - 

1155/20 1155/20 - - 

1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/20 1755/20 

1755/45 1755/45 - - 

1155/30 1155/30 - - 

3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 

12 12 

13 

2 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/62 

2 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/312 3 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/312 

3 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A 

2 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/92 (♦) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- 1155/50 - 1155/50 - 1155/50 - 1155/50 

1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 

1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 

1155/20 1155/20 1155/21 1155/21 

1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 

1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 

1155/30 1155/30 1155/31 1155/31 

3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 

13 




Frames 


14 

14 

15 15 

2 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/62 2 x 1155/63 3 x 1155/62 

2 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/312 2 x 1155/313 3 x 1155/312 

3 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A 3 x 1155/14A + 1155/13A 3 x 1155/14A + 1155/13A 

2 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/92 (♦) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 3 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- 1155/50 - 1155/50 - - - - 

WIRE 

COAX 





1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 

1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 

1155/22A 1155/22A 1155/20 1155/20 

PANELS 

5 WIRE 





1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 

1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 

1155/32A 1155/32A 1155/30 1155/30 

3 x 1145/74 3 x 1145/74 4 x 1145/74 4 x 1145/74 










WIRE 

COAX 


5 WIRE 

WIRE 

COAX 


5 WIRE 




Frames 












Frames 









16 17 

18 

20 

(B&W only) 

2 x 1155/63 2 x 1155/63 2 x 1155/63 2 x 1155/63 

2 x 1155/313 2 x 1155/313 2 x 1155/313 2 x 1155/313 

4 x 1155/14A 4 x 1155/14A 4 x 1155/14A 5 x 1155/14A 

2 x 1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 2 x 1155/93 (∗) 

- - - - - - - - 

1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 1755/80 

1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 - 

1155/20 1155/21 1155/22A - 

1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/20 

1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 - 

1155/30 1155/31 1155/32A - 

4 x 1145/74 4 x 1145/74 4 x 1145/74 5 x 1145/74 

20 

(B&W only) 

20 

3 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/62 

3 x 1155/312 - - - 

5 x 1155/14A 5 x 1155/14A 5 x 1155/14 5 x 1155/14A 

3 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- - - 1155/50 - 1155/50 - - 

1755/80 1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 

- 1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 

- 1155/20 1155/21 1155/22A 

1755/20 1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 

- 1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 

- 1155/30 1155/31 1155/32A 

5 x 1145/74 5 x 1145/74 5 x 1145/74 5 x 1145/74 

21 

22 


WIRE 

COAX 





Frames 





23 

24 

28 

(B&W only) 

28 

4 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/62 3 x 1155/63 

- - - 3 x 1155/313 

5 x 1155/14A + 1155/13A 6 x 1155/14A 7 x 1155/14A 7 x 1155/14A 

4 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/92 (♦) 3 x 1155/93 (∗) 

- - - - - - - - 

1755/70 1755/70 1755/80 1755/70 

1755/40 1755/40 - 1755/40 

1155/20 1155/20 - 1155/20 

5 WIRE 





1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/20 1755/30A 

1755/45 1755/45 - 1755/45 

1155/30 1155/30 - 1155/30 

6 x 1145/74 6 x 1145/74 7 x 1145/74 7 x 1145/74 

PANELS 


sec.2b −−−− 21





WIRE 

COAX 


5 WIRE 

WIRE 

COAX 





Frames 












Frames 





30 42 

3 x 1155/63 12 x 1155/62 4 x 1155/63 

3 x 1155/313 - 4 x 1155/313 

7 x 1155/14A 10 x 1155/14A 10 x 1155/14A 

3 x 1155/93 (∗) 6 x 1155/92 (♦) 4 x 1155/93 (∗) 

- - - - - - 

1755/70 1755/70 1755/70 

1755/40 1755/40 1755/40 

1155/22A 1155/22A 1155/22A 

1755/30A 1755/30A 1755/30A 

1755/45 1755/45 1755/45 

1155/32A 1155/32A 1155/32A 

7 x 1145/74 10 x 1145/74 10 x 1145/74 

44 

(B&W only) 

6 x 1155/62 

- 

11 x 1155/14A 

6 x 1155/92 (♦) 

- - 

1755/80 

- 

- 

42 

5 WIRE 





1755/20 

- 

- 

11 x 1145/74 

PANELS 







SECTION 2D 

(REV.E) 

725 

PANELS WITH ANODIZED 

ALUMINIUM FRONT PLATE 

Mod. 725 


FEATURES ......................................................................................2 

Electrical and mechanical specifi cations ......................................2 

Structural features ........................................................................2 

Component features .....................................................................2 


PANELS ...........................................................................................3 

Name plate inscription ..................................................................3 

Lamp holder..................................................................................3 

Grid disassembly ..........................................................................3 

Door unit for 4+n wire door phone systems..................................3 

Door unit for 1+1 wire door phone systems 

or 5 wire video door phone systems.............................................5 

Amplifi cation adjustment...............................................................5 

Cases with hood ...........................................................................5 


FOR “1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 1035/25 ......................................6 

Assembly on in panels with two rows of buttons ..........................7 

Assembly on in panels with one row of buttons............................7 


FOR “4+n” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 5330/60 ......................................7 

INSTALLATION................................................................................7 

Wall fl ush-mounting installation ....................................................7 

Assembly of fl ush-mounting boxes...............................................8 

Front plate installation ..................................................................8 


DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - Dimensions.........................................9 



CAMERA UNIT...............................................................................13 

Front plate and fl ush-mounting unit ............................................13 

CCD TV camera Ref. 725/600....................................................13 

Camera adapter Ref. 1742/13A for 5 wire systems....................14 

INSTALLATION..............................................................................14 

RAIN HOOD COVER Ref. 725/701-/702........................................16 

Rain hood cover installation .......................................................16 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - Dimensions...........................17 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 




sec.2d −−−− 1

725 

PANELS WITH ANODIZED ALUMINIUM FRONT PLATE 

FEATURES 

CONFIGURATION 

PANELS PANELS WITH ANODIZED ALUMINIUM FRONT PLATE 

PANELS WITH ANODIZED ALUMINIUM FRONT 

PLATE 

Mod. 725 panels with aluminium front plate are modular. 

Two front plate widths are available: 

• One row of buttons (113mm). 

• Two rows of buttons (205mm) with door unit set-up. 

• Two rows of buttons (205mm) without door unit set-up. 

The one row confi guration may contain from 1 to 8 buttons; the two row 

confi guration may contain from 4 to 28 buttons. 

3, 4, 5, 6 row confi gurations can be obtained by arranging several 

modules side by side. Fixed wire shim-fairleads are used to couple 

the fl ush-mounting boxes horizontally. This system can be exploited 

to create panels of all types and confi gurations using a low number 

of components. The advantage in terms of stock management is 

refl ected on both the wholesaler and on the installer. 

The camera unit 725 is modular. Simply combine the camera unit 

(consisting of front unit with fl ush-mounting box and CCD camera) to a 

one or two button row 725 panel (with door unit set-up). 

Note: information on the camera unit is provided in the second part of 

this section. 

FEATURES 


1-row front plate width: 

113mm 

2-row front plate width: 

205mm 

Front plate protrusion (from the wall): 

11.5mm 

Flush-mounting depth: 

43.5mm 

Max. fl ush-mounting error tolerance: 8mm inside (finished wall) 

Front plate thickness: 

1.7 and 2mm 1 row 

2.5mm 2 rows 

Front plate treatment: 

natural anodization 

Door unit grid colour: 

anthracite 

Front header colour: 

anthracite 

Urmet trade mark: 

on loudspeaking unit grid 

Lamp holder: 

body: 

acetate resin 

contacts: nickel-plated brass 

Name plate dimension: 54.5 x 14.5mm (max. thickness 2mm) 

Distance between buttons: 

24mm 

Common contact: 

nickel-plated brass strap 

Total stroke of button: 

2mm 

Idle stroke of button: 

1.2mm (before contact closing) 

Transition of switch button: 100,000 transitions with power 0.2Aeff, 

on resistive load, voltage 12Veff 

Button control force: 

min. 850gr. 

Max. section of wire for button terminals and lamp holders: 2mm 2 

Insulation voltage between contacts: 

500Veff 

Max. cutoff current: 

max. 2Aeff on resistive load 

Lighting lamp: 

bulb 14V 3W 

Protection: IP 33 according IEC standards 70.1 

Corrosion: 

according DIN 5342/64 standards 

test duration: 

16 hours 

temperature: 35°C 

STRUCTURAL FEATURES 

The Mod. 725 panel includes 3 parts: 

• Aluminum front plate (drawn) with plastic headers. 

• Button frame. 

• Flush-mounting box. 

FRONT PLATE 

The front plate, made of drawn aluminium, if fi xed to the frame by 

means of two screws inserted in the headers. Call buttons (with name 

plates) and a door unit protective grid are arranged on the front panel. 

The name plates are built to permit replacement only from the inside 

of the panel. 

BUTTON FRAME 

1 row versions with up to 4 buttons are made of plastic; other models 

are made of metal. The buttons, lighting bulbs and door unit are 

fastened to the frame. The frame is fastened to the fl ush-mounting box 

by means of specifi c screws. 

EMBEDDING BOX 

1 row panels with up to 4 buttons have a plastic fl ush-mounting box. 

Other models are made of metal with plastic headers. All boxes are 

arranged to be jointed to other boxes for perfect front panel installation 

in confi gurations employing several panels. 

COMPONENT FEATURES 

BUTTONS 

The buttons are made of plastic and connected by means of screw 

terminals. Modular pre-connected metal strips are used for contacts. 

The strip is visible and easily cut to split common contacts. 

The total stroke of the button is 2mm with 1.2mm of idle stroke. The 

maximum cutoff current is 2A effective with resistive load. 

NAME PLATE HOLDERS 

The name plate holders are made of transparent methacrylate and 

can be accessed from the inside of the panel for replacing the 

names. One paper label is provided for temporarily writing the names 

before defi nitive engraving on a Plexiglas plate (dimensions 54.5mm x 

14.5mm - max. thickness 2mm). 

DOOR UNIT PROTECTIVE GRID 

The grid is made of plastic and ensure good protection from 

water leakage. The grid can be disassembled and turned for other 

applications (e.g. video systems). 

Important: The anodized surface protects from weather conditions 

but may be damaged by lime, cement and gypsum spots. Wash the 

anodized aluminium surface with warm water, dry and wipe to clean. 

Do not use grease acid (lanolin or Vaseline). Never use abrasive 

products. 

CONFIGURATION 

Panel confi gurations: 

• 1 or 2 rows of buttons with door unit set-up 

• 2 rows of buttons without door unit set-up. 

Installation methods: 


• Wall mounting 1 to 24 buttons in specifi c housings 

2 −−−− sec.2d DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual


PANELS 

725 

PANELS 

LAMP HOLDER 

One row of buttons with door unit set-up. 

1 button Ref. 725/101* 

2 buttons Ref. 725/102* 



5 buttons Ref. 725/105 




Two rows of buttons with door unit set-up 














Two rows of buttons without door unit set-up. 







The Mod. 725 panels are supplied with lamp holders and relevant 

lamps, in a number that guarantees a good lighting. If necessary, the 

installer can add other lamps inserting them in the proper holes. 

To remove the lamp holder, and replace a lamp operate with 

screwdriver on the side hooks or block. 

GRID DISASSEMBLY 

Simply remove block plate M to disassemble the grid G. Use the edge 

of a screwdriver on the block teeth to free it completely. 

M 

G 

M 

G 


PANELS 

* For 4+n door phone and coax video door phone systems only. 

DOOR UNIT FOR 4+N WIRE DOOR PHONE 


NAME PLATE INSCRIPTION 

To write the names of the various users, remove the plate clipped on 

to the back of each button. 

The tag is easily removed by levering with a screwdriver. Remove the 

card where to the temporarily write the corresponding name. 

The defi nitive inscription can be made on a plexiglass plate (dimensions 

54.5mm x 14.5mm thickness max. 2mm). For night lighting, the panels 

are equipped with bulb lamp 15V, 3W. Supply at 12Vac. 

The power supply is suffi cient for up to 2 lamps. 

Use a transformer providing adequate power for more than 2 lamps. 

A Ref. 9000/230 transformer can power up to 5 lamps. 

The push-button panels Mod. 725, Mod. 625 and Mod. Domus Aura 

can be equipped with the following outdoor stations for speak-andlisten 

service according to the type of system intended to be made: 

• 4+n systems powered at 6Vdc Ref. 1128/500 



sec.2d −−−− 3

725 


PANELS 

INSTALLATION 

Two-row door phone push-button panel 


The installation procedures differ depending on the push-button panel 

on which it is fi tted. Some fastening procedures associated with the 

various push-button panels are shown below. 

One-row door phone push-button panel 

1,5 m 

1,5 m 

One-row video door phone push-button panel 

1,5 m 



PANELS 

725 

Two-row video door phone push-button panel 

DOOR UNIT TERMINAL BOARDS Ref. 1035/67 

1,5 m 







Note: use terminal “1A” in systems with electronic call door phone and 



4 Voice (conversation privacy device power) 

PS Tone generator output 




SN Video power on for video door phone systems 

3 Call buzzer (for Mod. 1130 door phones) 

AMPLIFICATION ADJUSTMENT 

All door units have two separate integrated circuits for external and 

internal amplifi cation and an electret microphone transmitter unit. 

Amplifi cation in the two directions can be adjusted by means of two 

externally accessible potentiometers. 






• Turn the potentiometer EXT. 

counterclockwise to decrease it. 


• Turn the potentiometer INT. 



clockwise to increase volume, 

clockwise to increase volume, 

Use the specifi c cases with hoods to install Mod. 725 panels on the 

wall surface. 

This type of installation is possible in door phone systems only. 

One row Ref. 725/710 

The housing can be applied to panels with 1 or 2 buttons on one row 

Ref. 725/101 and 725/102. 



~ Door unit 12Vac power 

-/~ Power ground 

PS Tone generator output for simultaneous call up to two units 

1 Traditional audio out (to door phone speaker) 

1A Electronic audio out (to door phone speaker) 

2 Voice in (from door phone microphone) 

PANELS 

DOOR UNIT FOR 1+1 WIRE DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

OR 5 WIRE VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

DOOR UNIT Ref. 1035/67 


“1+1” wire door phone systems and 5 wire video door phone systems. 

2 4 PS 5 1/˜ ˜ SN 3 

Sch. 1035/67 

One row Ref. 725/711 

The housing can be applied to panels with 1 to 8 buttons on one row 

Ref. 725/101 ÷ 725/108. 

On purchase the housing is arranged for Ref. 725/101 and 102 

panels. 

For other types, loosen the two screws on the back (A), make the lower 

part of the housing slide and fasten in the appropriate holes. 

Two rows Ref. 725/721 

The housings can be applied to panels with 4 to 10 buttons on 2 rows 

Ref. 725/204 ÷ 725/210. 

The housings are arranged for Ref. 725/204 panels. 



Two rows Ref. 725/722 

The housings can be applied to panels with 12 to 24 buttons on 2 

rows (version with door unit) Ref. 725/212 ÷ 725/224 and from 20 to 

32 buttons on 2 rows (in the version without door unit) Ref. 725/020 ÷ 

725/032. 

The housings are arranged for Ref. 715/212 and Ref. 725/020 panels. 



Note: This type of door unit may not be fi tted in one row panels with 

1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons. 


sec.2d −−−− 5

725 


CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE FOR “1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 1035/25 

Ref. 725/710 

102 mm 

120 mm 

INSTALLATION 


Ref. 725/711 

Ref. 725/721 

725/722 

245 mm 

N 

N 

N 

N 

102 mm 

104 mm 

For panels with 1 row of buttons 

For panels Height/N References 

Ref. 725/101 with 1 button 

with unit door 

245 725/710 

Ref. 725/102 with 2 buttons 


Ref. 725/101 with 1 button 

with unit door 245 725/711 

Ref. 725/108 with 8 buttons 

with unit door 389 

For panels with 2 rows of buttons 

For panels Height/N References 

from Ref. 725/204 with 4 buttons 197 


725/721 

to Ref. 725/210 with 10 buttons 269 






725/722 


without unit door 


without unit door 

B 

C 

A 

C 

B 

D 

B 

C 

D 

D 

C 

B 

C 

C 

A 

D 

120 mm 

212 mm 

B 

C 

B 

C 

B 

D 

C 

B 

C 

A 

D 

B 

D 

C 

A 

C 

B 

D 

2 rows 

1 row 

Fix the housing to the wall or to the gate by using the holes (C). The 

holes (D) allow the passage of the wires from the rear side. 

Unscrew the panel front plate and fi x the box inside the housing by 

screwing the proper screws in the holes (B). 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE FOR “1+1” 


Conversation privacy boards Ref. 1035/25 separating call and voice 

circuits employing the same wire must be fi tted in traditional Ref. 725 

panels in 1+1 wire door phone systems and 5 wire video door phone 

systems. 

The number of plates required for the various capacities is indicated in 

the table of the list of equipment beside the related panels. 

41 41 

The device cannot be assembled on 1 row push button panels with a 

capacity of 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons. 

1. Loosen the screws of the terminals of the individual buttons inside 

the panel. 

2. Insert the terminals of the conversation privacy board in the abovementioned 

terminals as indicated in the drawings. 



CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE FOR “4+n” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 5330/60 

INSTALLATION 

725 

3. According to the type of panel, check that the common contact is 

positioned as shown: otherwise, move it. In the case of panels with 

one row of buttons, to make space for the conversation privacy 

board, move the lamp holder and position it as shown in the 

drawing. 

4. Connect as shown in the diagram. Wire 1 of the door phones must 

be connected directly to terminal 1/ ~ of the door unit. 

Each conversation privacy board has four push buttons. 

It can be used also for 2 or 3 push buttons. 

In this case, break the printed circuit in the preshaped area. 

ASSEMBLY IN PANELS WITH TWO ROWS OF 

BUTTONS 

Check that the common contact is positioned as shown in the drawing; 

otherwise, move it. 

Common contact 

ASSEMBLY IN PANELS WITH ONE ROW OF 

BUTTONS 

Check that the common contact is positioned as shown in the drawing; 

otherwise, move it. 

Important: as mentioned above, the device cannot be assembled on 

1 row panels with a capacity of 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons. 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE FOR “4+N” 







Atlantico). 






call. 

The device must be fi tted either to the fl ush-mounting box or to the box 

and hood as shown below. 

∅ 2,9 x 6,5 mm 

h = 1,6 

h = 1,6 


Warning: If the frame does not have the lamp holder fastening holes, 

make a 2.5mm diameter hole in the position indicated. 

∅ 2,2 x 6,5 mm 

∅ 2,2 x 6,5 mm 



+ Do not use 









INSTALLATION 

FLUSH-MOUNTING INSTALLATION 

The recommended height for fl ush-mounting the panel is approximately 

1.5m from the ground (lower edge). 

Make a hole for passing the connection wires through before installing 

the fl ush-mounting box (single or coupled with others) in the wall. 

PANELS 


sec.2d −−−− 7

725 


INSTALLATION 


ASSEMBLY OF FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES 

The fl ush-mounting boxes are joined together using special shimsfairleads 

that also serve as wire conduits. 

Boxes with one or two rows of buttons can be joined. 

All the shims are empty inside to permit feeding of the wires from one 

box to another. 

During the walling phase, apply the proper adhesive stamps on the 

holes for the frame fi xing to protect them from lime. 

The fl ush-mounting box must be levelled with the wall surface and 

must not protrude (max. fi nal protrusion allowed is 8mm). 

The wall surface on which the front plate is fi tted must be fl at. The max. 

tolerance is 1.5mm. 

Remove the button/lamp holder frame before walling the fl ushmounting 

box. 

To release the frame from the 4 support springs placed in the fl ushmounting 

box, insert the tip of a screwdriver into the hole A of the lower 

headre and then turn 90°. 

The springs are push the frame against the front plate, so as to keep 

the distance between the buttons of the front plate and the ones of the 

frame constant. 

A 

max 8 mm 

Insert the frame on the 4 springs during connection phase and then fi x 

the door unit to the frame. 

At the end, tighten the front plate to the frame by means of the supplied 

screws. 

1,5 m 

1,5 m 

FRONT PLATE INSTALLATION 

To screw the front plate on the frame rotate the two doors that hide the 

two fi xing screws. 




DIMENSIONS 

725 

43 

mm 

102 mm 

194 mm 

307 mm 

399 mm 

113 mm 

H1 

H2 

205 mm 

H1 

1 row 2 rows 

3 rows 

4 rows 

512 mm 

H2 

318 mm 

H1 

H2 

604 mm 

410 mm 

H1 

H2 


5 rows 

523 mm 

6 rows 

615 mm 

H2 

H2 

H1 

H1 

1 row 2 rows 3 rows 4 rows 5 rows 6 rows 

4 

6 

1-2 8 

10 

3-4 12 32 

5 14 

Number of buttons on panel 6 16 30 40 

7 18 33 44 70 

8 20 36 48 64 76 

22 

24 

26 60 94 

28 

Dimension Flush 102 194 307 399 512 604 

Width (mm) Front 113 205 318 410 523 615 

Dimension 

Height (mm) 

Flush H1 Front H2 

177 192 

201 216 

225 240 

249 264 

273 288 

297 312 

321 336 

345 360 

369 384 

393 408 

417 432 

441 456 

465 480 

PANELS 


sec.2d −−−− 9

725 




PANELS WITH ANODIZED ALUMINIUM FRONT PLATE - DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

4+n WIRES 

1+1 WIRES 

1* 2* 3* 

4* 

Panels with door unit set-up 

725/101 725/102 725/103 725/104 

Panels without door unit set-up 

- - - - 

Wall mounting box with hood 

725/710 725/710 725/711 725/711 

Door unit 1128/500 1128/500 1128/500 1128/500 

Door unit 

- - - - 

Conversation Privacy Device 

- - - - 

5 6 7 8 


725/105 725/106 725/107 725/108 


- - - - 


725/711 725/711 725/711 725/711 

4+n WIRES Door unit 1128/500 1128/500 1128/500 1128/500 

Door unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

1+1 WIRES 


2 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 

4 6 8 10 


725/204 725/206 725/208 725/210 


- - - - 


725/721 725/721 725/721 725/721 


Door unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

1+1 WIRES 


1 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 3 x 1035/25 

PANELS 

12 14 16 18 


725/212 725/214 725/216 725/218 


- - - - 


725/722 725/722 725/722 725/722 


Door unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

1+1 WIRES 


3 x 1035/25 4 x 1035/25 4 x 1035/25 5 x 1035/25 

(*) This type of panel cannot be used in 1+1 wires system. 





725 

20 22 24 26 


725/220 725/222 725/224 725/226 


- - - - 


725/722 725/722 725/722 - 


Door unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

1+1 WIRES 


5 x 1035/25 6 x 1035/25 6 x 1035/25 7 x 1035/25 

28 30 

32 


725/228 725/106 725/212 


- 725/024 725/020 


- - - 

4+n WIRES Door unit 1128/500 1128/500 1128/500 

Door unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

1+1 WIRES 


7 x 1035/25 8 x 1035/25 8 x 1035/25 


33 36 

40 


725/107 725/108 725/216 


725/026 725/028 725/024 


- - - 


Door unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

1+1 WIRES 


9 x 1035/25 9 x 1035/25 10 x 1035/25 

PANELS 


sec.2d −−−− 11

725 





44 48 

60 


725/218 725/220 725/226 


725/026 725/028 725/034 


- - - 


Door unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

1+1 WIRES 


12 x 1035/25 12 x 1035/25 16 x 1035/25 

64 

70 

76 


725/108 725/218 725/220 


2 x 725/028 2 x 725/026 2 x 725/028 


- - - 


Door unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

1+1 WIRES 


16 x 1035/25 19 x 1035/25 19 x 1035/25 

PANELS 

94 




725/226 

2 x 725/034 

- 

4+n WIRES Door unit 1128/500 

Door unit 

1035/67 

1+1 WIRES 


25 x 1035/25 



CAMERA UNIT 

725 

CAMERA UNIT 


The devices required to make camera units in video door phone 

systems with panel Ref. 725 are illustrated in the second section that 

follows. 

Information on the panel to be combined to the camera unit is provided 

in the fi rst part and will not be repeated here. 

The panel must be fitted with the door unit facing upwards; consequently 

the protective mask must be turned upside-down. 

The panel fl ush-mounting box must be fastened to the camera fl ushmounting 

box with the specifi c clip-on shims-fairleads. 

The camera unit Ref. 725 consists of: 

• Front with fl ush-mounting box and lights. 

• CCD camera and lens. 

FRONT PLATE AND FLUSH-MOUNTING BOX UNIT 

The following versions are available according to the capacity of the 

system: 

Ref. 725/601: with front plate (width 113 mm), that can be coupled to 

panels Mod. 725 with 1 to 8 buttons on 1 row. 

Ref. 725/602: with front plate (width 205 mm), for 4 or more buttons, 

that can be coupled to panels Mod. 725 with 4 to 28 buttons on 2 

rows. 

120 mm 

120 mm 

Ref. 725/601 Ref. 725/602 

32 -32 

0 

0 

50 

HORIZONTAL 


ASSEMBLY 

Fit the camera to the light support as follows: 

V 

23 

0 

-23 

50 

VERTICAL 

U 

V 


CCD TV CAMERA Ref. 725/600 

For use as spare part in installations with Explorer monitor, the TV 

camera must be rotated as shown in the drawing below: 

V 

U 

V 

Easy to insert and to remove from the fl ush-mounting box, it is supplied 

complete of: 

• TV camera with optics and built-in shutter; the focus is fi xed. Other 

lenses cannot be used. 

• Coupling for connection to the front plate. 

For connections of the TV camera units, the position of the terminals 

is as follows: 

CAMERA UNIT ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

Power supply voltage: 

14 - 18Vdc 

TV camera absorption: 

180mA 

Shooting sensor: CCD - 1/2” 

Built-in lens: f = 5.3mm, 1:1.3 

Built-in shutter: 

series mounted 

Focus: 

fixed 

Automatic sensitivity adjustment: 

100 - 4000Lux 

Minimum lighting for an acceptable image: 

0.2 Lux min, 

3Lux recommended 

Video output: 

1Vpp min synchr. neg. 75Ohm 

Operating temperature: -5°- 50°C 





+TC 

R1 

V5/B 

V3/A 

PANELS 


sec.2d −−−− 13

725 


INSTALLATION 


CAMERA ADAPTER Ref. 1742/13A FOR 5 WIRE 


The device is used in 5 wire and Bibus digital video door phone 

systems 

It transforms the composite video signal from the camera into two 

different video signals (A and B). 

ADAPTER INSTALLATION 

1. Remove connector A from the TV camera module (Fig. 1). 

2. Insert connector A in the coupling of the device and connector B in 

the coupling of the TV camera (Fig. 2). 

3. Position the conductors inside the groove of the device. 

A 

Fig. 1 

B 

B 

Fig. 2 

A 

INSTALLATION 

Join the fl ush-mounting box of the TV camera unit with the push 

button panel fl ush-mounting box by means of the white shim-fairleads 

(supplied with the TV camera unit). In case of coupling of 2 or more 

panels, couple the fl ush-mounting boxes by means of the proper black 

shim-fairleads supplied with the panels on 2 rows without door unit setyou 

L.U. (see Fig. 1 and 2). 

WHITE 

Fig. 1 

COLOUR 

1,55 ÷ 1,60 m 

1,55 ÷ 1,60 m 

BLACK 

COLOUR 

WHITE 

COLOUR 

Fig. 2 

BLACK 

COLOUR 

Wall the fl ush-mounting boxes checking that the lower edge of the TV 

camera unit fl ush-mounting box is 1.55 ÷ 1.60m from the ground. 

Check that the connection wires go out from the proper holes. 



INSTALLATION 

725 

The fl ush-mounting box must be walled on the level with the wall 

surface and must not protrude (max. fi nal protrusion allowed is 8mm). 

max 8 mm 

The wall surface on which front plate rests must be as fl at as possible. 

The max. tolerance is 1.5mm. 

During the walling phase apply the proper adhesive stamps on the 

holes from the frame fi xing to protect them from lime. 

Connect the power supply wire to the TV camera. Fix the TV camera to 

the TV camera unit by means of “V”. Mount the TV camera unit frame 

by centering it with the “D” tongues of the “A” bracket, as button holder 

frame of the panel. 

To fi x the TV camera unit, use “V” antitheft 3 hole-screws supplied with 

by means of “U” tool to screw. 

Connect the terminal board of the TV camera unit. 

Once the panel is connected to door unit, lamps, buttons, fi x the front 

panels of the panel and of the TV camera unit. 

D 

A 

D 

V 

V 

U 


2-rows panel 

Once the fl ush-mounting boxes are walled, mount the “A” junction 

bracket by means of the proper screws “B” (see picture). 

Screw and adjust the four “C” screws so that the junction bracket “A” is 

perfectly in line with the wall if the fl ush-mounting boxes are installed 

on irregular walls or panels to ensure perfect level of the installation 

surface. 

D 

V 

U 

A 

C 

C 

A 

D 

A 

V 

C 

D 

B 

B 

Mount the button holder frame of the panel on the fl ush-mounting box, 

by centering it with the “D” tongues. 

Important: The grid must be turned the other way being arranged 

upwards in door unit versions (with the URMET DOMUS logo 

readable): 

• Remove the “M” spring. 

• Remove the “G” grid by means of a screwdriver. 

• Rotate the grid (up-down). 

• Carry out the inverse operations. 

M 

G 

1-row panel 

M 

G 

PANELS 


sec.2d −−−− 15

725 


RAIN HOOD COVER Ref. 725/701-/702 

RAIN HOOD COVER Ref. 725/701-/702 


Two rain hood cover models are available for fl ush-mounted versions 

with 1 and 2 rows of buttons. 

• One row Ref. 725/701 

• Two rows Ref. 725/702 

Hoods cannot be used in panel confi gurations with more than 2 rows. 

One row 

RAIN HOOD COVER INSTALLATION 

Two rows 

Once the fl ush-mounting box is walled, position the rain hood cover 

and fi x it to the housing by means of the two proper screws. Then 

install the frame of the TV camera unit and panel. 

The button frame and the lamp holder should be removed before fl ushmounting 

the panel in the wall. To detach the frame from the four 

supporting springs in the box, insert the tip of a screwdriver in slot A of 

the lower header and rotate by 90°. 

The 4 springs are designed to push the frame against the front panel 

so as to assure a constant gap between the control buttons of the front 

panel and matching tabs of the frame. 

The frame must be re-inserted on the 4 springs during connection; the 

door unit is then fastened to the frame. 

Lastly, the front panel must be fi xed to the frame with the specifi c 

screws provided. 

A 




DIMENSIONS 

725 

53 mm 

102 mm 

194 mm 

307 mm 

399 mm 

43 

mm 

113 mm 

H1 

H2 

205 mm 

H1 

1 row 2 rows 

3 rows 

4 rows 

512 mm 

H2 

318 mm 

H1 

H2 

604 mm 

410 mm 

H1 

H2 


523 mm 

615 mm 

H2 

H2 

H1 

H1 

5 rows 

6 rows 

1 row 2 rows 3 rows 4 rows 5 rows 6 rows 

4 

6 30 

1-2 8 27 53 60 

10 38 66 

3-4 12 

5 14 

Number of buttons on panel 6 16 40 50 74 84 

7 18 

8 20 

22 

24 

26 

28 

Dimension Flush 102 194 307 399 512 604 

Width (mm) Front 113 205 318 410 523 615 

Dimension 

Height (mm) 

Flush H1 Front H2 

297 312 

321 336 

345 360 

369 384 

393 408 

417 432 

441 456 

465 480 

489 504 

513 528 

537 552 

561 576 

585 600 

PANELS 


sec.2d −−−− 17

725 




PANELS WITH ANODIZED ALUMINIUM FRONT PLATE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

1* 2* 3* 4* 

Tv Camera 

725/600 725/600 725/600 725/600 

Front Plate 

725/601 725/601 725/601 725/601 

Panel 

725/101 725/102 725/103 725/104 

Rain Hood Cover 

725/701 725/701 725/701 725/701 

COAX WIRE Door Unit 1128/500 1128/500 1128/500 1128/500 

Door Unit 

- - - - 

5 WIRES Conversation Privacy Device 

- - - - 

Camera Adapter 

- - - - 

5 6 7 8 

Tv Camera 

725/600 725/600 725/600 725/600 

Front Plate 

725/601 725/601 725/601 725/601 

Panel 

725/105 725/106 725/107 725/108 


725/701 725/701 725/701 725/701 


Door Unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 


2 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 


1742/13A 1742/13A 1742/13A 1742/13A 

PANELS 

4 6 8 10 

Tv Camera 

725/600 725/600 725/600 725/600 

Front Plate 

725/602 725/602 725/602 725/602 

Panel 

725/204 725/206 725/208 725/210 


725/702 725/702 725/702 725/702 


Door Unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 


1 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 2 x 1035/25 3 x 1035/25 


1742/13AA 1742/13A 1742/13A 1742/13A 

(*) This type of panel cannot be used in 5 wires system. 





725 

12 14 16 18 

Tv Camera 

725/600 725/600 725/600 725/600 

Front Plate 

725/602 725/602 725/602 725/602 

Panel 

725/212 725/214 725/216 725/218 


725/702 725/702 725/702 725/702 


Door Unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

5 WIRE Conversation Privacy Device 

3 x 1035/25 4 x 1035/25 4 x 1035/25 4 x 1035/25 


1742/13A 1742/13A 1742/13A 1742/13A 

20 22 24 26 

Tv Camera 

725/600 725/600 725/600 725/600 

Front Plate 

725/602 725/602 725/602 725/602 

Panel 

725/220 725/222 725/224 725/226 


725/702 725/702 725/702 725/702 


Door Unit 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 


5 x 1035/25 6 x 1035/25 6 x 1035/25 7 x 1035/25 


1742/13A 1742/13A 1742/13A 1742/13A 


28 27* 30 38 

Tv Camera 

725/600 725/600 725/600 725/600 

Front Plate 

725/602 725/601 725/602 725/602 

Panel 

725/228 1 x 725/101 - 1 x 725/026 1 x 725/206 - 1 x 725/024 1 x 725/210 - 1 x 725/028 


725/702 - - - 


Door Unit 

1035/67 - 1035/67 1035/67 


7 x 1035/25 - 8 x 1035/25 10 x 1035/25 


1742/13A - 1742/13A 1742/13A 

PANELS 


sec.2d −−−− 19

725 





Tv Camera 

Front Plate 

Panel 


COAX WIRE Door Unit 

Door Unit 



Tv Camera 

Front Plate 

Panel 



Door Unit 



40 50 

53* 

725/600 725/600 725/600 

725/601 725/602 725/601 

1 x 725/106 - 1 x 725/034 1 x 725/216 - 1 x 725/034 1 x 725/101 - 2 x 725/026 

- - - 

1128/500 1128/500 1128/500 

1035/67 1035/67 - 

11 x 1035/25 13 x 1035/25 - 

1742/13A 1742/13A - 

60 

66 74 

725/600 725/600 725/600 

725/602 725/602 725/601 

1 x 725/208 - 2 x 725/026 1 x 725/210 - 2 x 725/028 1 x 725/106 - 2 x 725/034 

- - - 

1128/500 1128/500 1128/500 

1035/67 1035/67 1035/67 

16 x 1035/25 17 x 1035/25 20 x 1035/25 

1742/13A 1742/13A 1742/13A 

PANELS 

84 

Tv Camera 

Front Plate 

Panel 



725/600 

725/602 

1 x 725/216 - 2 x 725/034 

- 

1128/500 

Door Unit 

1035/67 



22 x 1035/25 

1742/13A 

(*) This type of panel cannot be used in 5 wires system. 


SECTION 2E 

(REV.E) 

POSTALBOX 

PUSH BUTTON PANEL 


PANEL INSTALLATION IN POSTALBOX........................................2 

SINTHESI PANELS..........................................................................2 


Examples of modular constructions with various capacities.............4 

COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 


5-WIRE VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 





sec.2e −−−− 1

POSTALBOX PUSH BUTTON PANEL Mod. SINTHESI 

PANEL INSTALLATION IN POSTALBOX 

POSTALBOX PUSH BUTTON PANEL 

Mod. SINTHESI 


PANELS POSTALBOX PUSH BUTTON PANEL Mod. SINTHESI 

57 cm 

32 cm 

Ref. 1145/41 

15 cm 

44 cm 

45 cm 

Ref. 1145/42 

15 cm 

The Postalbox Ref. 1145/41 and Ref. 1145/42 mail boxes are ready for 

installation in Sinthesi panels. 

With Postalbox Ref. 1145/41, the panel is arranged horizontally on the 

upper parts and mail can be collected only from the front of the box. 

This accessory is ideal for wall mounting. 

With Postalbox Ref. 1145/42, on the other hand, the panel is arranged 

vertically on the right and the mail can be collected either from the front 

or from the back. This accessory is ideal for gate or pole applications. 

Both Postalbox require the use of two Sinthesi panel modules and can 

be used to install either door phone or video door phone systems. 

Purchase the frame separately to complete panel installation. 

The large mail compartment is separate from the wire area and can 

be accessed only with the keys provided. 

1,60 ÷ 1,65 m 

Ref. 1145/41 

Ref. 1145/42 

• Replace screws A provided with Sinthesi frames (Ref. 1145/62) with 

screws B provided with the postalboxs and fi t the frame to the box. 

A 

B 

OK 

1,65 ÷ 1,70 m 

2 −−−− sec.2e DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual

MAIL BOX INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 



• Close the frame by fastening the screws B and fi t the front frame on 

the frame by means of screw C. 

• Loosen the upper frame screw, turn the frame round and connect 

wires. 

B 

B 

C 

PANELS POSTALBOX PUSH BUTTON PANEL Mod. SINTHESI 


sec.2e −−−− 3




SINTHESI PANELS - DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

Button and repertory modules 


4+n 

Door unit 

Module holders and frames 

Postalbox with horizontal panel (@) 

Postalbox with vertical panel (@) 

(@) in alternatives 

1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/50 

1145/20 

1145/21 

1145/22 

1145/500 

1145/62 

1145/41 

1145/42 


1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 

1 1 1 

1 1 

1 1 

1 1 

1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 


1 1 2 2 3 3 

4 4 5 5 6 

6 



1+1 

Door unit 






BUTTONS N. 

1 2 3 4 5 

1145/12 1 

1145/13 1 

1145/14 

1 1 

1145/50 1 

1145/20 1 1 1 

1145/21 1 1 

1145/67 1 1 1 1 1 

1145/74 1 1 1 

1145/62 1 1 1 1 1 

1145/41 1 1 1 1 1 

1145/42 1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 

BUTTONS N. 

1 1 2 

2 

3 3 

PANELS 

4 4 5 5 



COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 



Camera module and door unit 

B/W Coax 





1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/50 

1745/80 

1745/81 

1745/82 

1145/62 

1145/41 

1145/42 


1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 

1 1 1 

1 1 

1 1 

1 1 

1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 


1 1 2 2 3 3 

4 4 

5 5 6 

6 

SINTHESI PANELS - COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


Camera module 



Colour coax 

Door unit 





1145/12 

1145/13 

1145/14 

1745/40 

1745/41 

1145/21 

1145/22 

1145/500 

1145/62 

1145/41 

1145/42 

BUTTONS N. 

1 2 3 4 5 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 

1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 

BUTTONS N. 

1 1 2 

2 3 3 

4 4 

5 5 

PANELS 


sec.2e −−−− 5


5-WIRE VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 


SINTHESI PANELS - 5-WIRE VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

Camera module 


B/W 5 wires 


Door unit 

Camera adapter 





BUTTONS N. 

1 1 2 

1745/70 1 

1745/21 1 

1745/22 

1 

1145/21 1 

1145/67 1 

1742/13A 1 

1145/62 1 1 1 

1145/41 1 

1145/42 1 1 

1 1 2 

BUTTONS N. 

1 1 2 

colour 5 wires 

Camera module 


Door unit 

Camera adapter 





1745/40 

1145/21 

1145/67 

1742/13A 

1145/62 

1145/41 

1145/42 

BUTTONS N. 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

BUTTONS N. 

1 1 

PANELS 


SECTION 2G 

(REV.E) 

1128 

WALL MOUNTED 

PANEL 

1128 


SMYLE WALL-MOUNTED PANEL 2 



TECHNICAL FEATURES.................................................................2 

DOOR UNITS...................................................................................2 

Door phone door units ..................................................................2 

Video door phone door units ........................................................3 

Description of terminals Ref. 1728/80...........................................3 

Amplifi cation regulation ................................................................3 

PANEL INSTALLATION ...................................................................3 

PANEL INSTALLATION ...................................................................8 

INSTALLING CASINGS SIDE BY SIDE.........................................10 

FLUSH-MOUNTING.......................................................................10 

4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 


COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS - 


WALL-MOUNTED PANEL Mod. 1128 5 

TECHNICAL FEATURES.................................................................5 

CASES WITH FRONT 

FOR OUTDOOR HOUSE PHONE STATION ..................................5 

DOOR PHONE DOOR UNITS .........................................................5 


CASING WITH FRONT ....................................................................6 

CASINGS WITH FRONT 

FOR OUTDOOR VIDEO HOUSE PHONE STATION ......................6 

OUTDOOR VIDEO HOUSE PHONE STATION 

WITH COAXIAL CABLE...................................................................7 

Camera lens direction adjustment ................................................7 


PUSH-BUTTONS .............................................................................7 

Push-button and name tag assembly ...........................................7 



sec.2g −−−− 1

SMYLE WALL-MOUNTED PANEL 





PANELS WALL MOUNTED PANEL Mod. SMYLE 



The Smyle panel, with its particularly innovative design, is designed 

and made for installation in one- and two-family door phone and video 

door phone systems. The following models are available: 

Door phone systems: 

• With 1 call button Ref. 1129/1 

• With 2 call buttons Ref. 1129/2 

Video door phone systems: 

• With 1 call button Ref. 1729/1 

• With 2 call buttons Ref. 1729/2 

The panel can be installed in 503 standard fl ush-mounting boxes or 

wall-mounted with screws and bolts to cut installation times without the 

need for masonry work. Considering the panel’s small width, it is also 

suitable for being fi tted on most gate poles with appropriate fasteners. 

The panels have name tags holders and variable dimensions according 

to the model: 40 x 60mm (one user panel) and 20 x 60mm (two user 

panel). 

In both cases, the name tags are backlit by two LEDS and can be 

accessed by opening the front part of the panel. 




Dimensions: 

185 x 99 x 40mm 

Material: ABS base and hood, anodised aluminium front 

Name tags: with 1 button 35 x 56mm 

with 2 buttons 15 x 56mm 


2mm 


1.2mm before contact closes 


500Veff 




2 LEDs on reflecting base 


12Vac 


max. 30mA 

Working temperature range: from -10 to 50°C 


IP44 

DOOR PHONE DOOR UNITS 

Ref. 1129/1 and Ref. 1129/2 Smyle panels can be installed with 

following door units: 



Before starting installation operations of the outdoor station, remove 

the plastic support as described below: 

1 

The panel is clipped in without needing special tools into the body of 

the door unit in correspondence with the specifi c clips on the sides of 

the base of the panel as shown below. 

Ref. 1128/500 

1128/510 

Complete installation by fi tting the microphone in the housing in the 

base on the bottom right. 

DESCRIPTION OF TERMINALS Ref. 1128/500 









PS Tone generator output for simultaneous call up to two units 




3 

2 

2 −−−− sec.2g DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual


PANEL INSTALLATION 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE DOOR UNITS 


The Smyle Ref. 1729/1 and Ref. 1729/2 panels must be equipped with 

a black and white coax video door phone door unit Ref. 1728/80. 

• Power voltage: 

• Max. draw: 

• Camera sensor: 

• Video output signal: 

• Subject light: 

18Vdc 



PANELS WALL MOUNTED PANEL Mod. SMYLE 

• Insert the door unit and the microphone on the base of the specifi c 

housing as shown in the respective paragraphs. 

• Connect the wires (it is advisable to have the wire protrude from 

the wall by approximately 85 - 90mm for door phone panel and 

approximately 40 - 45mm for video door phone panels). 

NOTE: power terminals ~0 and ~12 of the name tag LED circuit at 

12Vac. 

• Fasten the name tag light circuit making the wires pass underneath 

the support. 

• Adjust the volume and position of the camera (if present). 

• Write the name on the name tags and insert them in the housings. 

Rossi 

Rossi 

Bianchi 

CLICK 

CLICK 

• Insert the front part of the panel on the base and fasten it with the 

socket head screw using the wrench (2mm) provided. 

FLUSH-MOUNTING 

Ref. 1129/50 

115 mm 

NO 

47 mm 

209 mm 




CASES WITH FRONT FOR OUTDOOR HOUSE PHONE STATION - DOOR PHONE DOOR UNITS 

Mod. 1128 


The push-button panels Mod. 1128 are the ideal compromise 

between inexpensiveness, design, straightforward installation and 

communicating effi ciency for making DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS and 


All the push-button panels can be installed rested on the wall with 

screws and plugs keeping a low projection from the wall: just 41mm. 

In consideration of its reduced width, installation of the push-button 

panel is also possible on a gatepost. 

The push-buttons, which also act as transparent cover for the name 

tag, are modular and come in two versions with different sizes. 

The following three models of push-button panels are available: set-up 

for outdoor house phone station, set up for outdoor video house phone 

station, and set-up for push-buttons only. Every model is available in 

two different colours: Anthracite and grey. 

The additional casings with push-buttons only can be fi tted at the side 

of those set up for the outdoor station, thereby making it possible to 

make DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS with a maximum of 16 small pushbuttons 

or VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS with a maximum of 14 

small push-buttons. 

It is possible to make the following types of systems depending on the 

outdoor station installed in the casings: 

• 4+n wire door phone systems – with 6Vdc power voltage 

• 4+n wire door phone systems – with 12Vac power voltage 

• Black and white video door phone system with coaxial cable 

In the case of particular requirements the push-button panel can be 

fl ush-fi tted using the specifi c box Ref. 1128/51, in this case, protrusion 

from the edge of the wall is reduced to a few millimetres. 


Dimensions: 

246 x 99 x 41mm 

Material: 

ABS base and hood 

Anodised aluminium front 

Name tag: small button 20 x 60mm 

big button 

40 x 60mm 


2mm 


1,2mm 

Before contact closes 


500Veff 




green LEDs on reflecting base 


12Vac 


see housing description 

Working temperature range: -10 ÷ 50°C 


IP44 

CASES WITH FRONT FOR OUTDOOR HOUSE 

PHONE STATION 

The casings with front for outdoor house phone station come in two 

versions of different colour: 

• Anthracite Ref. 1128/20 

• Grey Ref. 1128/21 

In both it is possible to install up to 6 small push-buttons (20 x 60mm) 

or up to 3 large push-buttons (40 x 60mm). 

The casings are supplied with three refl ecting bases with the related 

lighting circuit with leds with a maximum uptake of 90mA. 


~0 

} Name tag light power 

~12 

DOOR PHONE DOOR UNITS 

The housing Mod.1128 can be installed whit following door units: 





The panel is clipped in without needing special tools into the body of 

1 

3 

2 

PANELS WALL MOUNTED PANEL Mod. 1128 


sec.2g −−−− 5

Mod. 1128 


CASING WITH FRONT 

CASINGS WITH FRONT FOR OUTDOOR VIDEO HOUSE PHONE STATION 


the door unit in correspondence with the specifi c clips on the sides of 

the base of the panel as shown below. 

Complete installation by fi tting the microphone in the housing in the 

base. 

Ref. 1128/500 

1128/510 














AMPLIFICATION REGULATION 

Amplifi cation in the two directions may be adjusted by means of two 

potentiometers which can be accessed after removing the extractable 

front panel. 







anticlockwise to turn it down EXT. . 



anticlockwise to turn it down INT. . 

CASING WITH FRONT 

The casings with front come in two versions of different colour: 


• Grey Ref. 1128/11 

These casings, which are already set up with the Name tag light power 

circuit, make it possible to increase the number of users that can be 

called. Indeed, it is possible to install up to 10 small push-buttons (20 x 

60mm) or up to 5 large push-buttons (40 x 60mm) on them. 

The casings with front can be installed at the side of any other pushbutton 

panel set up for outdoor station, using the special fairlead shims 

provided and following the instructions given in the “Installing casings 

side by side” paragraph. 

The casings are supplied with fi ve refl ecting bases with the related 



~0 


~12 

CASINGS WITH FRONT FOR OUTDOOR VIDEO 

HOUSE PHONE STATION 

The casings with front for outdoor video house phone station come in 

two versions of different colour: 


• Grey Ref. 1728/21 

In both it is possible to install up to 4 small push-buttons (20 x 60mm) 

or up to 2 large push-buttons (40 x 60mm). 

The casings are supplied with two refl ecting bases with the related 



~0 


~12 



OUTDOOR VIDEO HOUSE PHONE STATION WITH COAXIAL CABLE 

PUSH-BUTTONS 

Mod. 1128 

OUTDOOR VIDEO HOUSE PHONE STATION 

WITH COAXIAL CABLE 

The Ref. 1728/20 and Ref. 1728/21 panels must be equipped with a 

coax video door phone door unit. 

Two versions are available: 

• Colours Ref. 1728/40 

• Black/white Ref. 1728/80 

The main characteristics of this video door phone door unit are: 

• Power voltage: 

18Vdc 

• Max. draw: 

Mod. 1128 





1 

2 

3 

• Fit the support with the transparent cover starting from the top 

downwards. 

NOTE: to remove the supports with transparent cover use a 

screwdriver and lever on the fastening catches. 


Rossi 

3 

NOTE: the fi gures above refer to the installation of a large pushbutton, 

the small push-button Ref. 1128/1 should be installed 

in the same way. 

1 

2 

3 

Rossi 

CLICK 

CLICK 

Ref. 1128/2 


In replacement of the push-buttons the following special modules can 

be installed: 

• Anthracite blank modules 

(dimensions 20 x 60mm): Ref. 1128/30 

• Grey blank modules 


• Transparent module with tag for house number 


NOTE: the installation procedures are the same as those described 

for the push-buttons. 


NOTE: the installation phases of the door phone panel is shown 

below. Proceed in the same way to install the other models. 

• Remove the name tag light circuit. 

• Fasten the casing base on a fl at wall, at the height shown in the 

fi gure, using the screws (A) and wall plugs (B) provided or on a box 

Mod. 503. 

A 

A 

2 

B 

1 

1 

B 

1,55 m ÷ 1,65 m 




Mod. 1128 

A 

• Insert the door unit and the microphone on the base of the specifi c 

housing as shown in the respective paragraphs. 

• Insert the push-buttons on the base of the casing. 

NOTE: push-button Ref. 1128/2 should be positioned so that it is 

under the indication of the name tag pressing point. 

2 

B 

• Connect the wires (it is advisable to have the wire protrude 

from the wall by approximately 100mm for door phone panel and 

approximately 90mm for video door phone panels). 

NOTE: power terminals ~0 and ~12 of the name tag LED circuit at 

12Vac. 

1 

Mod. 503 

• To simplify push-button wiring, a button common joining bar (G/T) is 

provided to be installed between the terminals of the buttons and cut 

according to requirements. 


the support. 

2 

(G/T) 

• Adjust the volume and position of the camera (if present). 

• Fit the support with the transparent cover starting from the top 

downwards as shown in the fi gure below. 


Rossi 

3 

Rossi 

1 

CLICK 

CLICK 



sec.2g −−−− 9

Mod. 1128 


INSTALLING CASINGS SIDE BY SIDE 




HORIZONTAL INSTALLING SIDE BY SIDE 


C 

INSTALLING CASINGS SIDE BY SIDE 

The casings can be joined together using the special fairlead shims 

(provided) either vertically or horizontally. 

The shims are hollow to allow the passage of wires from one pushbutton 

panel to the other. 

VERTICAL INSTALLING 

SIDE BY SIDE 

HORIZONTAL INSTALLING 

SIDE BY SIDE 

To install a casing with buttons only at the side of a casing for 

outdoor station (both house phone and video house phone) proceed 

as follows: 

• Take out the removable plug of the casing on the side for which 

installation is required. 

• Remove the outer wall in correspondence of the holes left by the 

plugs with the help of fl at-nosed pliers. 

• Insert the fairlead shims and join the two casings. 


A long nose pliers is 

suggested. 

VERTICAL INSTALLING SIDE BY SIDE 

A long nose pliers is 

suggested. 

For fl ush-mounting the push-button panel the special box must be 

purchased separately (Ref. 1128/51), then proceed as follows: 

• Make the hole for letting through the connection wires before closing 

the fl ush-mounting box. 

D 

CLICK 

CLICK 




Mod. 1128 

• Embed the box in the wall. 

HORIZONTAL INSTALLING SIDE BY SIDE 

• Fasten the frame provided to the box. 

• Screw the casing base to the frame. 

NO 

• Complete installation as described in the previous paragraphs 

according to the type of casing. 

NOTE: for installing push-button panels side by side, special fairlead 

shims are provided to be placed between the fl ush-fi tting 

boxes. 

VERTICAL INSTALLING SIDE BY SIDE 



sec.2g −−−− 11

Mod. 1128 


4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 



4+n (with large push-buttons) 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

ANTHRACITE 

GRAY 

ACCESSORIES 

Door unit with 6Vdc power voltage (*) 

Door unit with 12Vac power voltage (*) 

Buttons 

Casing with front for door unit 

Casing with front 

Blank module (@) 





1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

1128/500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/510 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

1128/20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/10 

1 1 1 1 1 

1128/30 4 2 8 6 4 2 

1128/21 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/11 

1 1 1 1 1 

1128/31 4 2 8 6 4 2 

1128/51 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

4+n (with small push-buttons) 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

ANTHRACITE 

GRAY 

ACCESSORIES 

Flush mounting box 

(*) alternatives 

(@) as an alternative to two blank modules, it is possible to install 

a house number module Ref. 1128/5 

Door unit with 6Vdc power voltage (*) 

Door unit with 12Vac power voltage (*) 

Buttons 








(*) alternatives 




1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

1128/500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/510 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

1128/20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/10 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/30 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

1128/21 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/11 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1128/31 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

1128/51 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

10 11 12 

13 14 15 

16 





Mod. 1128 

coax (with large push-buttons) 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

ANTHRACITE 

GRAY 

ACCESSORIES 

Video door unit with coax cable 

Buttons 








coax (with small push-buttons) 

COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

ANTHRACITE 

GRAY 

ACCESSORIES 



Video door unit with coax cable 

Buttons 








1728/80 

1128/1 

1728/20 

1128/10 

1128/30 

1728/21 

1128/11 

1128/31 

1128/51 

1728/80 

1128/2 

1728/20 

1128/10 

1128/30 

1128/21 

1128/11 

1128/31 

1128/51 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

2 6 4 2 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

2 6 4 2 

1 1 2 2 2 2 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 


1 2 

3 4 5 6 7 




1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

8 

9 

10 11 12 13 14 



sec.2g −−−− 13

1128 


SECTION 2H 

Exigo 

Exigo 

PANEL 




HOW TO FORM THE PANEL CODE...............................................2 

DOOR UNITS FOR 4+N WIRE SYSTEMS ......................................3 

Door unit Ref. 1128/500 ...............................................................3 

Door unit Ref. 824/500 .................................................................3 

DOOR UNITS FOR “1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS ....................................3 

Door unit Ref. 1035/67 .................................................................3 

Amplifi cation adjustment...............................................................3 

Tv camera unit..............................................................................3 


Camera unit assembly..................................................................4 

Camera lens direction adjustment ................................................5 

CAMERA ADAPTER Ref. 1742/13A FOR 5 WIRE SYSTEMS ........5 

Adapter installation .......................................................................5 

CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICE..............................................6 

“1+1” Wire systems with dedicated 

fl ush-mounting box Ref. 1110/74..................................................6 

“1+1” Wire systems with fl ush-mounting box 

Mod. Sinthesi Ref. 1145/74 ..........................................................6 

“4+N” wire systems Ref. 5330/60 .................................................7 

PANELS FOR SINTHESI FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES ..................7 

Flush-mounting boxes ..................................................................8 

Door unit installation procedure....................................................9 

Name tag back-lighting led fastening procedure ..........................9 

Name tag assembly and front panel fastening procedure ..........10 

PANELS FOR DEDICATED FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES ............11 

Flush-mounting boxes ................................................................11 

Door unit installation procedure..................................................12 

Name tag back-lighting led fastening procedure ........................14 

Name tag assembly and front panel fastening procedure ..........14 


4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES - 


1+1 DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES - 


COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES 


5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

IN SINTHESI BOXES - 


4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES - 


1+1 DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES - 



IN DEDICATED BOXES - 


5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS 

IN DEDICATED BOXES - 


Mod. 625 PANELS RETROFITS....................................................23 

Installation ..................................................................................23 



sec.2h −−−− 1

Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONFIGURATION 

HOW TO FORM THE PANEL CODE 

EXIGO PANEL 

HOW TO FORM THE PANEL CODE 

PANELS EXIGO PANEL 

Exigo is the new, elegant and customisable, brass-plated Urmet 

Domus panel. 

A special space for an engraved plate is provided on the panel. The 

space may be used to fi t plate showing the name of the building, the 

address, the street number and other information, on one or two lines. 

Two types of fonts may be chosen. 

The basic panel is supplied with a brass panel to be engraved. Other 

two options are available upon request: an engraved brass plate or 

an anthracite grey PVC plate. You may choose what information to be 

written on the name tags (name, fl oor/apartment number, etc.) and the 

number of lines (1 or 2). 

The name tags are backlit by a set of high-effi ciency white LEDs. 

This feature may also be customised by purchasing a blue or green 

coloured fi lm. 

Polished brass-plate and matte brass-plate panels are available. The 

system is suitable for use in both door phone and video door phone 

systems (colour or black and white). 

All parts of the front panel are treated by means of a ion plating 

protection process (PVD) to make them corrosion and rustproof. The 

panels are particularly resistant to weather elements. 

The Exigo panels may be installed in Sinthesi fl ush-mounting boxes or 

in specifi c boxes. 




17mm 


>4mm 


>2.4mm 


500Vac 


2Aac 


white LED diodes 

Temporary name tags: 

Plexiglas 

Max. wire cross-section area for button and light terminals: 1.5mm 2 

Corrosion: 



16 hours 


IMPORTANT: Clean with a dry, soft cloth. Do not use brass polish. 

CONFIGURATION 

Exigo artistic panels may be used: 

• To make new 4+n wire (with traditional or electronic call) and 1+1 

wire door phone systems. 

• To make new coax and 5 wire video door phone systems. 

• To retrofi t existing door phone system with panels Mod. 625. 

All versions are complete with: 

• LED name tag lighting unit. 

• Brass-plate name tags to be engraved. 

• Tamperproof screws and screwdriver. 

• Drilling template for fastening the door unit (versions 1143 and 

1743). 

Please provide a code formed as follows for ordering a customised 

part: 

Basic code 

1743 / 102 S / 2 1 1 

Number of engraved lines: 

0 - none 

1 - one line 

2 - two lines 

Front panel finish: 

S - matte 

L - polished 

Number of buttons 

Front panel type: 

1743 - video door phone in Sinthesi box 

1143 - door phone in Sinthesi box 

1721 - video door phone in dedicated box 

1121 - door phone in dedicated box 

EXAMPLE OF ENGRAVED FRONT PANEL 

AERO FONT 

SL43 FONT 

Customisation 

EXAMPLE OF NAME TAG CUSTOMISATION 

PVC PLATE - SL43 FONT 

BRASS PLATE - STENCIL FONT 

Plate type: 

0 - brass, not engraved 

1 - brass, engraved 

2 - anthracite grey PVC 

Engraved font: 

0 - none 

1 - SL43 

2 - Aero 

2 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 

DOOR UNITS FOR 4+N WIRE SYSTEMS - DOOR UNITS FOR “1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS 

TV CAMERA UNIT 

Exigo 

DOOR UNITS FOR 4+N WIRE SYSTEMS 

DOOR UNITS FOR “1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS 


The amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500 is normally used in Exigo panels 

to make “4+n” wire door phone systems or coax video door phone 

systems. 

This door unit cannot be used on front panels Ref. 1143/1-/2 and 

Ref. 1743/1-/2. 







Use terminal “1A” in systems with electronic call door phone and 


Proceed as follows shown for each front panel for assembling the door 

unit. 


INT 

EXT 

1A − + 1 2 

The amplifi ed door unit Ref. 824/500 must be used only for door phone 

panels Ref. 1143/1, Ref. 1143/2 and for video door phone panels 

Ref. 1743/1 and Ref. 1743/2, both polished and matte versions. 

This characteristics of this device are similar to those of the 

Ref. 1128/500 ; this device is more compact and suitable for application 

in smaller spaces. 







Use terminal “1A” in systems with electronic call door phone and 


Proceed as follows shown for each front unit for assembling the door 

panel. 



“1+1” wire door phone systems and 5 wire video door phone systems. 



4 Voice (conversation privacy device power) 

PS Tone generator output 




SN Video power on for video door phone systems 

3 Call buzzer (for 1130 door phones) 

Proceed as follows shown for each front unit for assembling the door 

panel. 

This door unit cannot be used on front panels Ref. 1143/1-/2 and 

Ref. 1743/1-/2. 

AMPLIFICATION ADJUSTMENT 

All loudspeaking units use two separate integrated circuits for 

amplifi cation towards the outside and towards the inside and an 

electret microphone as transmitter unit. 

Amplifi cation in the two directions can be adjusted by means of two 

potentiometers accessible when the panel is open. 





In order to adjust the external volume: 

• Turn the potentiometer clockwise to increase volume, 


In order to adjust the internal volume: 

• Turn the potentiometer clockwise to increase volume, 



2 4 PS 5 1/˜ ˜ SN 3 

Sch. 1035/67 

Easy to insert and extract from the front of the panel, two models of the 

camera unit are available: 

• Colours Ref. 1810/40 

• Black/white Ref. 1810/70 

The camera units are provided with: 

• Fixed focus camera with built-in optics and shutter. 

• Possibility of adjusting camera lens vertically and horizontally. 

• Set of infrared LEDs for illuminating the subject. 

• Extractable connection terminal board. 



sec.2h −−−− 3

Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 




Common features: 

Lens: 

standard 

Shutter: 

standard 

Focus: 

fixed 

Minimum light for acceptable pictures: 

0,2 Lux min 



Frequency: 

CCIR 50Hz 

Operating temperature range: -5 ÷ 50°C 

Features Ref. 1810/40 


13 ÷ 26Vcc 


120 Max 

Image sensor: CCD 1/4” 

Features Ref. 1810/70 


18Vcc 


300mA Max 

Image sensor: CCD 1/3” 

CAMERA UNIT ASSEMBLY 

Proceed as follows for fi xing the camera unit to the front panel: 

1 

2 

3 

4 

A 

B 

C 

5 

6 

8 

A 

7 

DESCRIPTION OF TERMINAL 

T Camera on control in digital systems 

R2 Camera power positive in digital systems 

+TC Camera power positive in analogic systems 




B 

4 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 

CAMERA ADAPTER Ref. 1742/13A FOR 5 WIRE SYSTEMS 

Exigo 

CAMERA LENS DIRECTION ADJUSTMENT 

With this TV camera unit, it is possible to adjust the direction of the TV 

camera lens inside it using the specifi c adjustment screws A and B in 

order to overcome any installation fl aws. 

The adjustment along the vertical axis in relation to the position set is 

10° up and 20° down. 

Adjustment along the horizontal axis in relation the position set is 10° 

in both directions (left-right). 


Turning screw A: 

• In a clockwise direction (to the right) moves the pick-up fi eld towards 

the top of the screen. 

• In a counterclockwise direction (to the left) moves the pick-up fi eld 

towards the bottom of the screen. 

Orientation along the horizontal axis 

Turning screw B: 

• In a clockwise direction (to the right) moves the pick-up fi eld towards 

the left the screen. 

• In a counterclockwise direction (to the left) moves the pick-up fi eld 

towards the right of the screen. 


A 

B 

50 


0 

22,5 -48,5 

34 -34 

48,5 -22,5 

50 

+10° 

0 

HORIZONTAL 

+10° 

2 

0 

-20° 

-10° 

VERTICAL 

-50 

21 

-24 

33 

-14 

CAMERA ADAPTER Ref. 1742/13A FOR 5 WIRE 


The device is used in 5 wire and Bibus digital video door phone 

systems and to retrofi t Kombi systems (825). 

It transforms the composite video signal from the camera into two 

different video signals (A and B). 

ADAPTER INSTALLATION 

1. Insert the adapter device to the side of the TV camera unit and 

secure it with the screw provided. 

2. Remove connector A from the TV camera module. 

3. Insert connector A in the coupling of the device and connector B 

in the coupling of the TV camera. 

4. Position the conductors inside the groove of the device. 

1 

2 

A 

B 



sec.2h −−−− 5

Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 


2b 


3 


“1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS WITH DEDICATED FLUSH- 

MOUNTING BOX Ref. 1110/74 

41 41 

Insert conversation privacy plates Ref. 1110/74 when using Exigo 

panels in fl ush-mounting boxes Mod. 1121 and Mod. 1721 or fl ushmounting 

boxes Mod. 625 for making 1+1 wire door phone systems or 

5-wire video door phone systems. 

These boards separate the call and voice circuits employing the same 

wire. 

Each conversation privacy board is provided for 4 buttons. 

It can also be used for 2 and 3 button confi gurations: break the printed 

circuit in the pre-cut area in this case. 

Proceed as follows to install: 

1. Remove the name tag lighting circuits after removing the screws 

fastening them to the plastic supports. 

2. Fasten the device terminals to the buttons terminals on the fl ushmounting 

box. 

3. Connect the wires to the terminals boards. 

4. Re-arrange the name tag lighting circuits on the supports and 

complete system connections. 

1 

B 

A 

4 

2a 

3 

41 41 

“1+1” WIRE SYSTEMS WITH FLUSH-MOUNTING BOX 

Mod. SINTHESI Ref. 1145/74 

The conversation privacy boards Ref. 1145/74 must be inserted inside 

in Exigo panels in fl ush-mounting boxes Mod. 1145 for using 1+1 door 

phone systems and 5-wire video door phone systems. 

Each device is provided with 4 buttons and must be mounted in the 

box with the two screws provided. 

For connections to the panel, connect the C1 - C4 wires to the 

terminals of the buttons; for connections to the system, use terminals 

C1 - C4 present on the device itself instead. 

If 1, 2 or 3 button key modules are used, the device is used only 

partially. 

Install the device without using the shims provided. 


3 





1 Power earth 

4 Audio input 

41 41 

4 

41 41 

6 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 

PANELS FOR SINTHESI FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES 

Exigo 

“4+n” WIRE SYSTEMS Ref. 5330/60 

PANELS FOR SINTHESI FLUSH-MOUNTING 

BOXES 



Fit device Ref. 1134/5 in each (only Utopia Mod. 1134) door phone 

for the function; fi t the video door phones on the specifi c conversation 

privacy bracket Ref. 1202/95 for Atlantico. 






call. 

The device must be fastened to the fl ush-mounting box with the strip 

of two-sided adhesive tape provided. 


Two-side adhesive 

tape provided 

Ref. 5330/60 


+ Do not use 









This range of panels is suitable for installation in systems from 1 to 10 

users. Sinthesi fl ush-mounting boxes adapted by means of a spacer 

are used. 

The front panels are arranged for door unit installation. The following 

models are available: 

Door phone panels 

with 1 calling button (*) .......................................................Ref. 1143/1 

with 2 calling buttons (*) .....................................................Ref. 1143/2 

with 1 calling button........................................................Ref. 1143/101 

with 2 calling buttons ......................................................Ref. 1143/102 








with 10 calling buttons ....................................................Ref. 1143/110 

Video door phone panels 

with 1 calling button (*) .......................................................Ref. 1743/1 

with 2 calling buttons (*) .....................................................Ref. 1743/2 

with 1 calling button........................................................Ref. 1743/101 










(*) confi guration allowed only with door unit Ref. 824/500 for 4+n wire 

door phone systems or coax video door phone systems. 

Fill in the order form and specify the required customisations by using 

the complete code formed as explained in the “How to form the panel 

code” paragraph. 



sec.2h −−−− 7

Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 



FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES JOINING PROCEDURE 


A different box than shown in the following table must be used 

according to the panel model to be installed: 

Front panel code 

Ref. 1143/1 

Ref. 1143/2 

Ref. 1143/101 

Ref. 1143/102 

Ref. 1143/103 

Ref. 1143/104 

Ref. 1143/105 

Ref. 1143/106 

Ref. 1143/107 

Ref. 1143/108 

Ref. 1143/109 

Ref. 1143/110 

Ref. 1743/1 

Ref. 1743/2 

Ref. 1743/101 

Ref. 1743/102 

Ref. 1743/103 

Ref. 1743/104 

Ref. 1743/105 

Ref. 1743/106 

Ref. 1743/107 

Ref. 1743/108 

Ref. 1743/109 

Ref. 1743/110 

Flush-mounting box code 

Ref. 1145/51 

Ref. 1145/52 

Ref. 1145/53 

2 x Ref. 1145/52 

2 x Ref. 1145/53 

Ref. 1145/52 

Ref. 1145/53 

Ref. 1145/54 

2 x Ref. 1145/53 

System wires lead into the boxes through the openings on the sides 

and bottom of the box. 


Two fairlead spacers for joining the boxes are provided with fl ushmounting 

boxes Ref. 1145/52-/53-/54 modules. 

All the spacers are hollow to allow the passage of wires from one box 

to the other. 

FLUSH-MOUNTING BOX INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 

The spacer Ref. 1143/60 on each of the fl ush-mounting boxes (except 

for the front panels Ref. 1143/1 and Ref. 1143/2). 

A standard sized spacer is provided. For fl ush-mounting boxes 

Ref. 1145/52 or Ref. 1145/53, break the spacer along the pre-cutting 

for correct assembly. 

A 

Screws A (3.5 x 16mm) are provided with the spacer. 

The box and spacer must be installed fl ush with the wall without 

protruding at a height of approximately 1.55 ÷ 1.60m from the fl oor. 

The fl ush-mounting depth of all boxes is equal to 60mm (45mm for the 

box + 15mm for the spacer). 

Flush-mounting box 

Ref. 1143/60 

Ref. 1143/60 

60 mm 

8 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 


Exigo 

DOOR UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 

Fix the adapter and fasten the microphone support to the front panel. 


This door unit may be installed on the following front panels only: 

Ref. 1143/1-/2 and Ref. 1743/1-/2. 




A 

Fix the door unit onto the adapter provided with the front panel. 

C 

B 

2,2 x 6,5mm 


3 x 16mm 

Screws are included 

with the front panel 

and NOT 

with the door unit. 

Do not fi t the seal on the microphone provided with the door 

unit. 

NAME TAG BACK-LIGHTING LED FASTENING 

PROCEDURE 

Use the template provided with the front panel to fasten the name tag 

lighting LEDs. Cut all the fl ush-mounting box columns shown by , 

and then drill at the points indicated by . 

TEMPLATE 



sec.2h −−−− 9

Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 



Fix the spacers to the fl ush-mounting box and fi x the LED circuit to the 

spacers. 

SINGLE LED CIRCUIT 

2,9 x 6,5mm 

MULTIPLE LED CIRCUIT 

2,9 x 6,5mm 

2,9 x 9,5mm 

2,9 x 6,5mm 

2,9 x 9,5mm 

2,9 x 9,5mm 

NAME TAG ASSEMBLY AND FRONT PANEL 

FASTENING PROCEDURE 

Exigo panels are provided with a brass name tag (not engraved) which 

may be replaced by an engraved brass name tag or an anthracite grey 

PVC name tag. 

Coloured fi lm (each box contains 5 pieces in two colours) may be used 

to customise the colour of the backlighting: 

• Blue Ref. 1143/51 

• Green Ref. 1143/52 

Proceed as shown in the following drawings for fi tting the coloured fi lm 

and the name tags. 

Brass plate 

Glass 

Possible coloured film (not included) 

Possible coloured film 

(not included) 

Opalescent plate 

Fastening nuts 

Temporarily transparent 

(or grey PVC) name tag 



Close the panel front using the tamperproof screws provided at the 

end of the operations: 

10 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 

PANELS FOR DEDICATED FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES 

Exigo 

PANELS FOR DEDICATED FLUSH-MOUNTING 

BOXES 

This panel range is designed for use in systems from 3 to 20 users. 

Dedicated fl ush-mounting boxes are used. 

The front panels are arranged for door unit installation. The following 

models are available: 

Door phone panels with 1 row of buttons 





Door phone panels with 2 rows of buttons 










Video door phone panels with 1 row of buttons 





Video door phone panels with 2 rows of buttons 










Fill in the order form and specify the required customisations by using 

the complete code formed as explained in the “How to form the panel 

code” paragraph. 


A different box than shown in the following table must be used 

according to the panel model to be installed: 

Front panel code Flush-mounting Dimensions of 

box code flush-mounting box 

Ref. 1121/103 Ref. 1121/53 110 x 256 mm 

Ref. 1121/104 Ref. 1121/54 110 x 284 mm 

Ref. 1121/105 Ref. 1121/55 110 x 312 mm 

Ref. 1121/106 Ref. 1121/56 110 x 340 mm 

Ref. 1121/204 

Ref. 1121/206 

Ref. 1121/60 186 x 228 mm 

Ref. 1121/208 

Ref. 1121/210 

Ref. 1121/62 186 x 284 mm 

Ref. 1121/212 Ref. 1121/64 186 x 312 mm 

Ref. 1121/214 Ref. 1121/65 186 x 340 mm 

Ref. 1121/216 Ref. 1121/66 186 x 368 mm 

Ref. 1121/218 Ref. 1121/67 186 x 396 mm 

Ref. 1121/220 Ref. 1121/68 186 x 424 mm 

Ref. 1721/103 Ref. 1721/53 110 x 340 mm 

Ref. 1721/104 Ref. 1721/54 110 x 368 mm 

Ref. 1721/105 Ref. 1721/55 110 x 396 mm 

Ref. 1721/106 Ref. 1721/56 110 x 424 mm 

Ref. 1721/204 Ref. 1721/60 186 x 312 mm 

Ref. 1721/206 Ref. 1721/61 186 x 312 mm 

Ref. 1721/208 Ref. 1721/62 186 x 340 mm 

Ref. 1721/210 Ref. 1721/63 186 x 368 mm 

Ref. 1721/212 Ref. 1721/64 186 x 396 mm 

Ref. 1721/214 Ref. 1721/65 186 x 424 mm 

Ref. 1721/216 Ref. 1721/66 186 x 452 mm 

Ref. 1721/218 Ref. 1721/67 186 x 480 mm 

Ref. 1721/220 Ref. 1721/68 186 x 508 mm 

The fl ushing depth for all boxes is 55mm. 

System wires lead into the boxes through the openings on the bottom 

of the box. 




sec.2h −−−− 11

Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 


FLUSH-MOUNTING BOX INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 

Fix the door unit onto the adapter provided with the front panel: 


Apply adhesive labels to protect the front panel fastening holes during 

the embedding operation. 

The box must be installed fl ush with the wall without protruding at a 

height of approximately 1.55 ÷ 1.60m from the fl oor. 

The wall surface must be fl at. Maximum permitted tolerance= 1.5 mm. 

DOOR UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 




A 

1,55 ÷ 1,60m 

max 

3 mm. 

C 

B 

Move the spacer as shown in the following fi gures to fi t the door units: 

2 ROWS OF BUTTONS 

1 ROW OF BUTTON 

12 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 


Exigo 

Insert the door unit in the box and fi x it by means of the screws 2.9 x 

38mm and 3.5 x 8mm included. 


2,9 x 38mm 


2,9 x 38mm 

3,5 x 8mm 

3,5 x 8mm 



3,5 x 8mm 

Screws are 

provided with 

the door unit. 


3,5 x 8mm 

Screws are 

provided with 

the door unit. 

3,5 x 8mm 

Screws are 

provided with 

Fit the seals provided with the door unit. 



sec.2h −−−− 13

Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 


NAME TAG BACK-LIGHTING LED FASTENING 

PROCEDURE 


Proceed as follows to fasten the name tag lighting LEDs: 

Fix the spacers to the fl ush-mounting box and fi x the LED circuit to the 

spacers. 

3 x 6mm 

Fasten screw on 

the flush-mounting box 

2,9 x 6,5mm 

NAME TAG ASSEMBLY AND FRONT PANEL 

FASTENING PROCEDURE 

Exigo panels are provided with a brass name tag (not engraved) which 

may be replaced by an engraved brass name tag or an anthracite grey 

PVC name tag. 

Coloured fi lm (each box contains 5 pieces in two colours) may be used 

to customise the colour of the backlighting: 

• Blue Ref. 1143/51 

• Green Ref. 1143/52 

Proceed as shown in the following drawings for fi tting the coloured fi lm 

and the name tags. 

Brass plate 

3 x 6mm Fasten screw on 

the flush-mounting box 

Possible coloured film 

(not included) 



Glass 

Possible coloured film (not included) 

Temporarily transparent 

(or grey PVC) name tag 



Close the panel front using the tamperproof screws provided at the 

end of the operations: 

14 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 

4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES 


Exigo 

FRONT 

DOOR 

UNIT 

FLUSH- 

MOUNTING 

SPACER 

4+n 

1143/1 

1143/2 

1143/103 

1143/104 

1143/105 

1143/106 

1143/107 

1143/108 

1143/109 

1143/110 

824/500 

1128/500 

1145/51 

1145/52 

1145/53 

1143/60 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 

2 2 

1 1 1 1 2 2 

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 


1 2 3 4 5 6 

EXIGO PANEL - 4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES 

7 8 

9 

10 

PANELS 

DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual sec.2h −−−− 15

Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 

1+1 DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES 


EXIGO PANEL - 1+1 DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES 

FRONT 

1+1 

DOOR UNIT 

CONVERSATION 

PRIVACY DEVICE 

FLUSH- 

MOUNTING 

SPACER 

1143/101 

1143/102 

1143/103 

1143/104 

1143/105 

1143/106 

1143/107 

1143/108 

1143/109 

1143/110 

1035/67 

1145/74 

1145/52 

1145/53 

1143/60 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 

1 1 

2 2 

1 1 1 1 2 2 

1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 


1 2 3 4 5 6 

PANELS 

7 8 

9 

10 

16 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 

COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES 


Exigo 

1 

FRONT 


coax 


UNIT 


COLOURS (#) 


B/W (#) 

FLUSH- 

MOUNTING 

SPACER 

2 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

1743/1 1 

1743/2 1 

1743/103 1 

1743/104 

1 

1743/105 

1 

1743/106 

1 

1743/107 

1 

1743/108 

1 

1743/109 

1 

1743/110 

1 

824/500 1 1 

1128/500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1810/40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1810/70 

1145/52 

1145/53 

1145/54 

1143/60 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 

2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 


3 4 5 6 

EXIGO PANEL - COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES 

7 8 9 

10 

PANELS 


Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 

5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES 


EXIGO PANEL - 5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN SINTHESI BOXES 

5 wires 

FRONT 


CONVERSATION 



COLOURS (#) 


B/W (#) 

CAMERA ADAPTER 

FLUSH- 

MOUNTING 

SPACER 


1 

2 

1743/101 

1743/102 

1743/103 

1743/104 

1743/105 

1743/106 

1743/107 

1743/108 

1743/109 

1743/110 

1035/67 

1145/74 

1810/40 

1810/70 

1742/13A 

1145/53 

1145/54 

1143/60 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 

2 2 2 2 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 


3 4 5 6 

PANELS 

7 8 9 

10 

18 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 

4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES 


Exigo 

FRONT 


FLUSH- 

MOUNTING 

4+n 


1 row 2 rows 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 

1121/103 1 

1121/104 1 

1121/105 1 

1121/106 

1 

1121/204 

1 

1121/206 

1 

1121/208 

1 

1121/210 

1 

1121/212 

1 

1121/214 

1 

1121/216 

1 

1121/218 

1 

1121/220 

1 

1128/500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1121/53 1 

1121/54 1 

1121/55 

1 

1121/56 

1 

1121/60 

1 1 

1121/62 

1 1 

1121/64 

1 

1121/65 

1 

1121/66 

1 

1121/67 

1 

1121/68 

1 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 

1 row 2 rows 


EXIGO PANEL - 4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 

10 

12 14 

16 

18 

20 

PANELS 


Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 

1+1 DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES 


EXIGO PANEL - 1+1 DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES 

FRONT 

1+1 


CONVERSATION 


FLUSH- 

MOUNTING 

1121/103 

1121/104 

1121/105 

1121/106 

1121/204 

1121/206 

1121/208 

1121/210 

1121/212 

1121/214 

1121/216 

1121/218 

1121/220 

1035/67 

1110/74 

1121/53 

1121/54 

1121/55 

1121/56 

1121/60 

1121/62 

1121/64 

1121/65 

1121/66 

1121/67 

1121/68 


1 row 2 rows 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 

1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 

1 row 2 rows 


3 4 5 6 4 6 8 

10 

12 14 

16 

18 

20 

PANELS 

20 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 

COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES 


Exigo 

FRONT 


coax 



COLOURS (#) 


B/W (#) 

FLUSH- 

MOUNTING 

1721/103 

1721/104 

1721/105 

1721/106 

1721/204 

1721/206 

1721/208 

1721/210 

1721/212 

1721/214 

1721/216 

1721/218 

1721/220 

1128/500 

1810/40 

1810/70 

1721/53 

1721/54 

1721/55 

1721/56 

1721/60 

1721/61 

1721/62 

1721/63 

1721/64 

1721/65 

1721/66 

1721/67 

1721/68 


1 row 2 rows 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 

1 row 2 rows 

1 


1 

1 

1 

EXIGO PANEL - COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 

10 12 

14 

16 

18 

20 

PANELS 


Exigo 

EXIGO PANEL 

5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES 


EXIGO PANEL - 5 WIRES VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS IN DEDICATED BOXES 

5 wires 

FRONT 


CONVERSATION 



COLOURS (#) 


B/W (#) 

CAMERA ADAPTER 

FLUSH- 

MOUNTING 


1721/103 

1721/104 

1721/105 

1721/106 

1721/204 

1721/206 

1721/208 

1721/210 

1721/212 

1721/214 

1721/216 

1721/218 

1721/220 

1035/67 

1110/74 

1810/40 

1810/70 

1742/13A 

1721/53 

1721/54 

1721/55 

1721/56 

1721/60 

1721/61 

1721/62 

1721/63 

1721/64 

1721/65 

1721/66 

1721/67 

1721/68 


1 row 2 rows 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 

1 row 2 rows 


1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 4 5 6 4 6 8 

PANELS 

10 12 

14 

16 

18 

20 

22 −−−− sec.2h 


EXIGO PANEL 

Mod. 625 PANELS RETROFITS 

Exigo 

Mod. 625 PANELS RETROFITS 

The Exigo panels fronts may be used for replacing panels Mod. 625 

using the same products present in the system. 

The table shows the correspondence between the codes of the various 

panels given the same number of buttons: 

N° buttons Mod. 625 Mod. 625A Mod. Exigo 

3 7701/3 7881/3 1121/103 

4 7701/4 7881/4 1121/104 

5 7701/5 7881/5 1121/105 

6 7701/6 7881/6 1121/106 

4 7702/4 7882/4 1121/204 

4 7702/6 7882/6 1121/206 

8 7702/8 7882/8 1121/208 

10 7702/10 7882/10 1121/210 

12 7702/12 7882/12 1121/212 

14 7702/14 7882/14 1121/214 

16 7702/16 7882/16 1121/216 

18 7702/18 7882/18 1121/218 

20 7702/20 7882/20 1121/220 

INSTALLATION 

For the correct installation of the Exigo fronts in case of panel retrofi ts 

with 4+n wire door unit, proceed as follows: 

1. Remote the old door unit by loosening the screws fastening it to 

the spacers. 

1 ROW 

2 ROWS 

2. Use the template provided and drill at the points shown with 

. 

3. Eliminate the spacer after drilling. 

1 ROW 

TEMPLATE 

2 ROWS 

4. Insert the spacer included in the new hole and fi x the door unit. 

2,9 x 38mm 

3,5 x 8mm 

1 ROW 

2,9 x 38mm 

TEMPLATE 

3,5 x 8mm 

2 ROWS 

When retrofi tting 1+1 wire panels, instead, simply replace the 

parts with those of the new Exigo panel. 



sec.2h −−−− 23

Exigo 


24 −−−− sec.2h 


SECTION 3A 

(REV.E) 

APARTMENT 

DOOR PHONE STATIONS 


ATLANTICO DOOR PHONES 2 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................2 

“4+N” WIRE SYSTEM DOOR PHONES ..........................................2 

Door phone with only one door release key Ref. 1133.................2 

Door phone with 1 extra key (plus 2 additional keys) 

Ref. 1133/1 ...................................................................................2 

Door phone with insertion key on the handset Ref. 1133/10........3 

Door phone with 2 leds, 1 switch Ref. 1133/20...............................3 

Door phone with 12 additional buttons + 

1 service button Ref. 1133/12.......................................................3 

Door phone with 3 additional buttons ...........................................4 

“1+1” WIRE SYSTEM DOOR PHONES...........................................4 

Ref. 1133/35A door phone with 1 additional button......................4 

Door phone with adjustable call volume and mute 

function Ref. 1133/351 .................................................................5 

INSTALLATION................................................................................5 

Wall version ..................................................................................5 

Tabletop version ...........................................................................5 

ATLANTICO DOOR PHONE ACCESSORIES.................................6 

Box of additional buttons Ref. 1133/55.........................................6 

Mute kit + led Ref. 1133/56...........................................................6 

Additional speaker Ref. 9854/54 ..................................................7 

ACCESSORY BOARD .....................................................................7 

UTOPIA DOOR PHONE 8 

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................8 

“4+N” WIRE SYSTEM DOOR PHONES ..........................................8 

Door phone with 1 extra key 

(plus 2 additional keys) Ref. 1134/1 ............................................8 

“1+1” WIRE SYSTEM DOOR PHONES...........................................8 

Door phone with 1 extra key 

(plus 2 additional keys) Ref. 1134/35 ...........................................8 


INSTALLATION................................................................................9 

Wall version ..................................................................................9 

Wall-mounted version on fl ush-mounting box Mod. 503...............9 

Tabletop version .........................................................................10 

UTOPIA DOOR PHONE ACCESSORIES......................................10 

Box of additional buttons ............................................................10 

Conversation privacy devices Ref. 1134/5 .................................10 

ACCESSORY BOARD ...................................................................11 

DOOR PHONE Mod. 1130 12 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................12 

UNIFIED DOOR PHONES 

(IVORY Ref. 1130 and WHITE Ref. 1130/50) ................................12 

UNIFIED IVORY DOOR PHONES WITH 1 ADDITIONAL 

BUTTON (PLUS 3 ADDITIONAL BUTTONS) Ref. 1130/1.............12 

WHITE DOOR PHONE WITH BUTTON 

ON HANDSET Ref. 1130/55 ..........................................................13 

INSTALLATION..............................................................................13 

Wall version ................................................................................13 

Table version door phone...........................................................14 

Mod. 1130 DOOR PHONE ACCESSORIES..................................14 

Single key for door phone Ref. 1130/100 ...................................14 

Call repeater relay Ref. 9330/12.................................................14 

Socket kit for table versions Ref. 1130/12 and 1130/19 .............15 

Table mounting kit Ref. 1130/120...............................................15 


DOOR PHONE APARTMENT STATION ACCESSORIES 16 

KIT FOR ADJUSTABLE CALL SOUND Ref. 1132/53....................16 

TRADITIONAL DOOR PHONE SYSTEM 

ADAPTER CIRCUIT Ref. 1131/7 ...................................................16 



sec.3a −−−− 1

ATLANTICO DOOR PHONES 


“4+N” WIRE SYSTEM DOOR PHONES 



Electronic call Atlantico door phones are suitable for use in “4+n” and 

“1+1” system types. 

Characteristics of Atlantico door phones are: 

• Innovative, simple, essential design by Michele De Lucchi. 

• Telephone-like handset wires and connectors. 

• Telephone-like handset hook switch arranged in the lower part of 

the top. 

• Electronic call to speaker which doubles as the voice signal and call 

signal transducer. 

• Condenser (electret) microphone. 

Atlantico door phones can be either wall or tabletop mounted (order 

the specifi c tabletop transformation kit with socket for this purpose). 



• Door phone with door opener button only Ref. 1133 



• Door phone with button on handset Ref. 1133/10 

• Door phone with 2 LEDs, 1 switch and 1 button Ref. 1133/20 

• Door phone with 12 additional buttons + 

1 service button Ref. 1133/12 

• Door phone with 3 buttons colour anthracite Ref. 1133/41 

• Door phone with 3 buttons colour grey high tech Ref. 1133/42 


• Door phone with 1 additional button Ref. 1133/35A 

• Door phone with adjustable call volume Ref. 1133/351 

Note: Atlantico door phones can be fi tted in parallel in video door 

phone systems. In this case, “4+n” wire system door phones 

should be used in coax systems and “1+1” wire door phones 

should be used in 5 wire video door phone systems. 

The basic door phone Ref. 1133 is supplied pre-engineered for 

connection with the outdoor station and is equipped with a single door 

release key: it is not possible to add other keys. 

1 Door phone speaker signal 

CA Door phone call signal 

2 Door phone microphone signal 

6 

} Power ground 

10 


DOOR PHONE WITH 1 EXTRA KEY (PLUS 2 

ADDITIONAL KEYS) Ref. 1133/1 

236 mm 


100 mm 64 mm 


Characteristics of Atlantico door phones are: 

• Plastic fi nishing (ABS): glossy button, embossed other parts. 






• Handset hook system with tong in upper part of top and housing in 

lower part. 


DOOR PHONE WITH ONLY ONE DOOR RELEASE 

KEY Ref. 1133 

236 mm 

100 mm 64 mm 

The Ref. 1133/1 door phones have the same characteristics as the 

basic phone. They differ from this in that an extra key (in addition 

obviously to the lock release key) is standard on this door phone. 

The door phone is pre-engineered for addition of up to 2 additional 

keys. (Ref. 1133/55 set of 10 additional buttons). 

The keys are independent and can be used for various auxiliary 

services (for example: switching on of the stair lights, opening of the 

secondary entrance electric lock, opening of the main entrance electric 

lock) or as call keys in intercom systems. 

In alternative to the 3 keys you can install the mute kit + led 

(Ref. 1133/56). 

T1 

G/T 

Additional button (standard) 

Button common 




6 


10 





DOOR PHONE WITH INSERTION KEY ON THE 

HANDSET Ref. 1133/10 

236 mm 

100 mm 64 mm 


CA Call signal to door phone speaker (without on switch) 


6 


10 



The door phone Ref. 1133/10 has the same features as Ref. 1133. 

The only difference is the key on the handset. This key connects the 

speech wires and must be held pressed for the entire duration of the 

conversation. 

In the systems where these door phones are installed, the handset can 

remain unhooked without affecting the other door phones. 

A door phone left off hook cannot receive call signals. This problem 

can be solved by inserting an additional speaker Ref. 9854/54 or 

additional ringer. 

The 1133/10 door phone may be used only in door phone systems. 

Rz Call signal from panel 

Door opener direct from call button (only with switch 

R at off and presence of relay Ref. 788/52: see diagram 

SC101-0289) 

+ LEDs power positive 

AP Door open control 

DOOR PHONE WITH 12 ADDITIONAL BUTTONS + 1 

SERVICE BUTTON Ref. 1133/12 

1 Door phone speaker signal with on button 


2 Door phone microphone signal with on button 

6 


10 


236 mm 

DOOR PHONE WITH 2 LEDS, 1 SWITCH 

Ref. 1133/20 

100 mm 64 mm 

236 mm 

100 mm 64 mm 

The door phones Ref. 1133/20 with 2 leds and 1 switch are used to 

provide the following services: 

• Possibility of cutting off the call sound (“privacy” condition); 

• Checking that the main door is open (with warning light); 

• Simultaneous door opening just pressing the call button (helpful, for 

example, for doctors’ offi ces during visiting hours). 

The Ref. 1133/12 door phone has the same electrical and dimensional 

features as the basic door phone. It is equipped with: 

• 12 intercom service buttons. 

• 1 supplementary button already fi tted on the device (in addition to 

the door opener button). 

• 1 buzzer for differentiating door unit calls and intercom calls. 

• 1 diode type 1N4007 for intercom system (provided in separately 

bag). 

The door phone is set up for installing up to 2 additional buttons 

(1133/55 ten additional buttons kit). A 1133/56 mute + LED kit can be 

installed instead of the supplementary buttons. 

Note: call buttons from 1 to 12 can operate a load with maximum 

consumption of 500mA. 

Important: Up to 13 intercommunicating door phones can be 

connected to the table-top version door phone (using 1133/50 tabletop 

transformation kit). 



sec.3a −−−− 3


“1+1” WIRE SYSTEM DOOR PHONES 


Mod. Atlantico and are fi tted with 3 extra buttons (naturally in addition 

to the door opener button) already fi tted on the device. 

The buttons are reciprocally independent and may be used to 

implement auxiliary services, e.g.: staircase lights, secondary electrical 

lock opener, etc.; or as call buttons in intercom systems. 

These devices may be used only in 4+n systems with electronic call 

option: 

T1 

G/T 


Button common 




6 

} Power ground (jumper P1) 

10 


G/T Button common 

U1 Button 1 

U2 Button 2 

U3 Button 3 

U4 Button 4 

U5 Button 5 

U12 Button 12 

U11 Button 11 

U10 Button 10 

U9 Button 9 

U8 Button 8 

U7 Button 7 

U6 Button 6 

-/~ Power ground (jumper with terminal 10) 

+/~ Buzzer power 

T3 

G/T 

T2 

G/T 

T1 

G/T 

Additional button 

Button common 


Button common 


Button common 




6 


10 



Ref. 1133/35A DOOR PHONE WITH 1 ADDITIONAL 

BUTTON 


Note: the door phone Ref. 1133/12 is already equipped with a buzzer 

for differentiated calls (terminals +/~ and -/~). No additional 

resistor needs to be connected to the terminals for installation 

in systems with relay devices Ref. 788/51 and Ref. 788/54. The 

resistor (270Ω 1/2W) is built into the buzzer circuit in this case. 

DOOR PHONE WITH 3 ADDITIONAL BUTTONS 

236 mm 

100 mm 64 mm 

The door phones Ref. 1133/41 (anthracite) or Ref. 1133/42 (high 

tech greay) possess the same features as the base door phones 

236 mm 

100 mm 64 mm 

“1+1” wire system door phones Ref. 1133/35A offer conversation 

privacy, call and door opener functions in normal door phone systems 

with only 2 wires in the riser column: 

1 common + 1 single for each device. 

Ref. 1133/35A door phones are equipped with one additional button 

(in addition to the door opener button) already fi tted and set-up for 

installation of up to 2 additional buttons (Ref. 1133/55 set of 10 

additional buttons). 


implement auxiliary services, e.g.: staircase lights, secondary electrical 

lock opener, etc. 

Specifi c conversation privacy circuits must be fi tted in the panel for 

ensuring conversation privacy for all door phones in the system. 




INSTALLATION 

All door phones are normally deactivated (no sound is heard when the 



The voice circuit of the called door phone remains activate until the 


The door opening function is connected to conversation privacy; this 

means that a user must be called to be able to open the electrical 

lock. 

T1 

G/T 


Button common 

CA1 Terminal for fl oor call button 

1 Ground 

2 Call, voice and door opener signal 

The door phone can be fi tted on the wall using the different holes on 

the base and the special plugs and screws provided with each set. 

Note: fasten the door phone to the wall with the bolts provided for 

fl ush-mounting in Mod. 503 boxes. 


DOOR PHONE WITH ADJUSTABLE CALL VOLUME 

AND MUTE FUNCTION Ref. 1133/351 

The Ref. 1133/351 door phone is similar to the 1133/35A door phone. 

It does not have a supplementary button and is equipped with a call 

volume selector. Maximum, minimum or mute volume can be selected. 

A red tab will appear on the right-hand side of the door phone to 

indicate that the call tone has been muted. 

Refi t the door phone top after installation. 

Mod. 503 

MAX 

MIN 

MUTE 

MUTE 

INSTALLATION 

WALL VERSION 

1,55 m about 

To remove the cover of the door phone, insert the tip of a screwdriver 

in the area indicated and apply pressure. Extract the cover rotating this 

on the upper tabs. 

TABLETOP VERSION 

The Mod. Atlantico door phone may be tabletop mounted. For 

this purpose, purchase a specifi c white tabletop transformation kit 

Ref. 1133/50 with socket. 

Assembly operations: 

• Remove the door phone hood. 

• Insert the wire through the tabletop stand and the door phone. 



sec.3a −−−− 5


ATLANTICO DOOR PHONE ACCESSORIES 



BOX OF ADDITIONAL BUTTONS Ref. 1133/55 

The keys are supplied in packing of 10. 

To fi t the additional key on standard door phones Ref. 1133/1, proceed 

as follows: 

1. Remove the imitation key cover on the door phone cover at the 

position where the additional key is required to be fi tted. This is 

done by pressing the two holding tabs on the cover and pushing 

outwards. 

2. Press the key on the door phone base. 

3. Fit the new key cover on the door phone cover. 

1 

• Insert the adhesive rubbers provided under the tabletop stand under 

the door phone base in the specifi c housings. 

• Apply the tabletop stand to the base of the door phone and arrange 

the wires in the specifi c housing. 

• Connect the wires to the door phone terminal board. 

• Close the door phone hood. 

• Connect the system wires to the corresponding socket terminals. 

2 

1 

2 

3 


MUTE KIT + LED Ref. 1133/56 

The Ref. 1133/56 accessory makes it possible to provide the following 

services: 

• Possibility of bypassing the call tone (privacy condition) with 

indication of de-activation with green light. 

• Checking that the main door is open with red light. 

The accessory is inserted inside the door phone with 1 key 

Ref. 1133/1, occupying the space of 3 keys. 

For assembly proceed follows: 

1. Remove the door phone hood. 

2. Remove the additional button body. 

3. Screw the printed circuit to the base in the position selected. 

4. Remove the three covers of the dummy keys corresponding to 

those on the cover. 

5. Position the key and the two covers for the lights provided with the 

kit in the order indicated. 

6. Make the connections according to the instructions of the 

installation diagrams. 




ACCESSORY BOARD 

1 

3 

2 


4 

For electrical connections, proceed differently according to the type of 

door phone: 

“4+n” wire system 

door phones 

“1+1” system 

door phones 

5 6 

6 CA 1 2 

Provided with the product 


ADDITIONAL SPEAKER Ref. 9854/54 

This device may be used in Atlantico electronic call door phones both 

as the main call speaker (in parallel to that fi tted in the handset if the 

volume is too low) and as dedicated speaker for fl oor calls. 

This accessory can be fi tted in all Atlantico door phone versions also 

in the presence of other call devices, such as electronic buzzers 

Ref. 9854/52, three-tone gong kit Ref. 1132/54 or additional fl oor call 

circuit Ref. 9854/53. 

Important note: When several door phones are installed in parallel, 

consider than each door phone with additional speaker connected 

between terminals CA and 6 counts as a double load for the tone 

generator (two speakers in parallel). 

For door phone assembly, fi rstly fasten the base with the two screws 

provided and then apply the speaker as shown in the fi gure. 

Atlantico 1133 door phones, in addition to the accessories listed in 

the previous section, can be equipped with the following devices 

(described in the “Apartment station accessories” section). 

• Traditional call system adapter Ref. 1131/7 

• Call adjustment kit Ref. 1132/53 

• Three-tone gong kit Ref. 1132/54 

• Additional outdoor ringer Ref. 9854/40 

• Additional electronic call ringer Ref. 9854/41 

• Three-tone additional ringer Ref. 9854/42 

• 12 Vac door phone electronic buzzer Ref. 9854/52 

• Additional fl oor call device Ref. 9854/53 



sec.3a −−−− 7



“4+N” WIRE SYSTEM DOOR PHONES - “1+1” WIRE SYSTEM DOOR PHONES 



The Utopia door phone model is extremely compact with low projection 

from the wall, which simplifi es its installation in any point of an 

environment. 

It has been developed for any type of system, either with 4+n or 1+1 

wires and can be installed either rested on the wall using screws and 

plugs with no masonry works, or table-mounted buying the specifi c 

stand Ref. 1134/50. 








NOTE: Utopia door phones can be fi tted in parallel in video door 

phone systems. In this case, “4+n” wire system door phones 

should be used in coax systems and “1+1” wire door phones 

should be used in 5 wire video door phone systems. 


lock) or as call keys in intercom systems. 

T1 

G/T 


Button common 




6 


10 



Characteristics of Utopia door phones are: 

• Adjustable and mutable call volume as standard feature. A red tab 

will appear at the top when the volume is muted. 


• Additional push-button for operating electrical loads (stair lights, 

secondary door opening) or for standard intercom calls on all 

models. 

• Possibility of adding two extra push-buttons on all models. 


• Dedicated call speaker for a stronger and clearer sound. 

• Telephone-like handset hook switch. 




225 mm 

3 

2 

1 

90 mm 48,5 mm 




“1+1” wire system door phones Ref. 1134/35 offer conversation 

privacy, call and door opener functions in normal door phone systems 

with only 2 wires in the riser column: 

1 common + 1 single for each device. 

Ref. 1134/35A door phones are equipped with one additional button 

(in addition to the door opener button) already fi tted and set-up 

for installation of up to 2 additional buttons (Ref. 1134/55 set of 8 

additional buttons). 




lock) . 

Specifi c conversation privacy circuits must be fi tted in the panel for 

ensuring conversation privacy for all door phones in the system. 




The voice circuit of the called door phone remains activate until the 


The door opening function is connected to conversation privacy; this 

means that a user must be called to be able to open the electrical 

lock. 





The door phone Ref. 1134/1 is set up for connection with the door 

unit and is fi tted with an extra button (naturally in addition to the door 

opener button) already fi tted on the device. 

The door phone is pre-engineered for addition of up to 2 additional 

keys. (Ref. 1134/55 set of 8 additional buttons). 



T1 

G/T 


Button common 

CA1 Terminal for fl oor call button 

1 Ground 

2 Call, voice and door opener signal 



INSTALLATION 

INSTALLATION 

WALL VERSION 

3 

2 

1 

1,55 m about 

WALL-MOUNTED VERSION ON FLUSH-MOUNTING 

BOX Mod. 503 

For installation on fl ush-mounting box Mod. 503 proceed as follows: 

• Remove the speaker. 

• Fasten the door phone on the fl ush-mounting box 503. For correct 

fastening on box 503, use the holes shown in the following drawing: 







For correct fastening to the wall, use the holes shown in the following 

drawing: 

Mod. 503 

NOTE: for this type of installation, besides fastening the door phone 

to the fl ush-mounting box, it must be fastened to the wall with 

the screws and plugs provided. 

• Refi t the door phone top after installation. 



sec.3a −−−− 9


UTOPIA DOOR PHONE ACCESSORIES 



The Mod. Utopia door phone may be tabletop mounted. For this 

purpose, purchase a specifi c tabletop transformation kit Ref. 1134/50 

with socket. 

Proceed as follows to assemble the door phone on the support: 

• Remove the door phone hood. 

• Insert the wire through the tabletop stand and the door phone. 

• Screw the base to the support. 

• Connect the wires to the door phone terminal board. 

• Close the door phone hood. 


CONVERSATION PRIVACY DEVICES Ref. 1134/5 

This is a device that allows the conversation secrecy function in door 

phone systems with 4+n wires with door phones Mod. Utopia. 

Therefore, to ensure conversation secrecy, it is necessary to install 

Ref. 1134/5 inside all the door phones in the system and a 

disconnection device inside the push-button panel (for the sheet 

concerning this product, see the sections about each push-button 

panel). 




Door phones remain enabled for communication until the next call; 

each door phone is therefore released from communication with the 

door unit if the following call is directed to another door phone. 

There are two options for opening the door with conversation privacy 

device: 

• FREE OPENING (solution A): 

door is opened whenever the handset hook is fully pressed on any 

door phone. 

• PRIVATE OPENING (solution B): 

the electrical lock may be operated only following a call by the called 

door phone only. 

NOTE: to obtain opening under privacy, remove the bridge P1 on the 

door phone printed circuit. 

UTOPIA DOOR PHONE ACCESSORIES 

BOX OF ADDITIONAL BUTTONS 

The keys are supplied in packing of 8. 

To fi t the additional key on standard door phones, proceed as follows: 

1. On the top of the door phone remove the cover of the dummy 

push-button (press the cover stop catch and push it outwards). 

2. Insert the snap-on button on the base of the door phone. 

3. Insert the new button control cover on the top. 

P1 


Two versions are available: 

• Grey button Ref. 1134/55 

• White button Ref. 1134/54 

1 

2 3 

2 

1 

1 

INSTALLATION 

1. Remove the door phone speaker. 




2. Slacken the screws of the door phone terminal board. 

3. Insert the privacy terminals in the terminals. 


Utopia door phones, in addition to the accessories listed in the previous 

section, can be equipped with the following devices (described in the 

“Apartment station accessories” section). 

• Traditional call system adapter Ref. 1131/7 

• Three-tone gong kit Ref. 1132/54 




• 12 Vac door phone electronic buzzer Ref. 9854/52 



4. Block the device with the screw provided and tightening the door 

phone terminal board screws. 

5. Put the speaker back in place. 

TERMINAL BOARD DESCRIPTION 





6 Power ground 



sec.3a −−−− 11

Mod. 1130 

DOOR PHONE Mod. 1130 


UNIFIED DOOR PHONES (IVORY Ref. 1130 AND WHITE Ref. 1130/50) 

UNIFIED IVORY DOOR PHONES WITH 1 ADDITIONAL BUTTON (PLUS 3 ADDITIONAL BUTTONS) Ref. 1130/1 



The fundamental characteristic of 1130 TRADITIONAL CALL SYSTEM 

door phones is that the call is sent to the buzzer. 

1130 door phones are ivory coloured and have a spiral cord; they 

can either be mounted on walls or tabletops. Order the corresponding 

socket and cord for tabletop arrangement. 

Some versions are white. 


• Standard door phone without buttons Ivory Ref. 1130 

White Ref. 1130/50 

• Ivory door phone with 1 button 


• White door phone with button on handset Ref. 1130/55 

UNIFIED DOOR PHONES (IVORY Ref. 1130 and 

WHITE Ref. 1130/50) 

77 mm 56 mm 

218 mm 

An intercom add-on may be applied to the base door phone in systems 

where more than 4 buttons are required. The add-on is provided with 8 

buttons and with a plate for stable coupling with the door phone base. 


Characteristics of 1130 door phones are: 

• Plastic fi nishing (ABS): smooth handset and hood, matte base, top 

lead-in and button covers. 

• Colour solutions: light ivory handset and hood, cement grey base, 

top lead-in and button covers; alternatively white (all components 

made of white plastic). 

• Cement grey spiral cord with rubber sleeve on handset inlet (white 

versions have white cord). 


• Wall mounted on spring sockets. 

• Handset rest on hood consists of: hook with two rigid side hooks in 

the upper part; lower container to avoid accidentally release. 

• Handset made of two parts without fastening screws, equipped with 

a carbon transmitter capsule and receiver speaker. 

• The terminal board is very reliable and forms a single body with 

springs and buzzer. The telephone type contact springs are parallel 

to the base and are suffi ciently protected from tampering and 

accidental incorrect settings during assembly. 

Fully press the handset hook to operate the door opener. 

The door phone is equipped with an adjustable standard buzzer. 

Move the anchor (indicated by the arrow) towards or away from the 

core to adjust. 

The buzzer is rigidly fastened to the base with a screw. 

The unifi ed door phones Ref. 1130 or Ref. 1130/50 are set up for 

connection to door phone systems. 

The door phones can be adapted for use in the following systems 

simply by moving the bolts on the terminal board: 

• Intercom connection of 2 devices (pair). 

• Connection to door phone switchboard offering concierge service 

only or switching to door unit. 

1130 door phones are equipped with door opener button only; no other 

buttons can be added. 

1 Voice signal from door unit 

2 Door unit voice in 

6 

} 11 Power ground 

10 


7 Call signal on buzzer 

8 Call signal common (for door phone switchboards) 


UNIFIED IVORY DOOR PHONES WITH 1 

ADDITIONAL BUTTON (PLUS 3 ADDITIONAL 

BUTTONS) Ref. 1130/1 

77 mm 56 mm 

218 mm 

The characteristics of Ref. 1130/1 door phones are the same as basic 

door phones. 


The difference is that these models are equipped with a standard 

additional button (in addition to the door opener button). 

The door phone are set up for the addition of 1, 2 or 3 buttons 

Ref. 1130/100 during assembly. 


implement auxiliary services, e.g.: staircase lights, secondary lock 

opening, main lock opening (when buttons are preferred for the 

function instead of fully pressing the handset hook, etc.) and call 

buttons in intercom systems (up to 5 devices). 


WHITE DOOR PHONE WITH BUTTON ON HANDSET Ref. 1130/55 

INSTALLATION 



6 


11 


8 Call signal return (for door phone switchboards) 


INSTALLATION 

WALL VERSION 


A Additional button (standard) 

G/T Button common 

1 Voice signal from door unit 

2 Door unit voice in 

6 

} 11 Power ground 

10 



8 Call signal return (for door phone switchboards) 

1,5 m about 

WHITE DOOR PHONE WITH BUTTON ON 

HANDSET Ref. 1130/55 




77 mm 56 mm 

218 mm 



The characteristics of Ref. 1130/55 door phones are the same as 

basic 1130 door phones. 

The difference concerns the button equipping the handset. This button 

switches the voice circuit on and must be pressed for the entire 

conversation. 

A door phone left off hook in systems of this kind will not lower the 

volume of the other devices. 

1130/55 door phones are set up for connection to a door phone 

systems; they can be set up for connection to a door phone switchboard 

by moving the jumpers. 

The holes marked “B” are used for wall mounting using rectangular 

embed-ding boxes of the 503 or American type. Holes “D” are for 

60mm diam. box. 



sec.3a −−−− 13

Mod. 1130 


Mod. 1130 DOOR PHONE ACCESSORIES 

E = 4 A1 = 13 


E = 103 

C2 = 97 

D2 = 86 

A3 = 9 

B = 86 

A2 = 160 

A 

C 

B 

C = 50 

D = 60 


D 

Mod. 1130 DOOR PHONE ACCESSORIES 

SINGLE KEY FOR DOOR PHONE Ref. 1130/100 

TABLE VERSION DOOR PHONE 

The Mod. 1130 door phone can also be used as table version. 

In this case, the specifi c socket kit Ref. 1130/12 with 12 conductors 

for the Ref. 1130 and Ref. 1130/1 door phones (and 3 related extra 

keys) must be ordered separately and assembled according to the 

instructions. 

The keys are supplied in packing of 10 and may be installed in the door 

phone Ref. 1130/1. 

To fi t the additional key on standard door phones Mod. 1130, proceed 

as follows: 

• Remove the imitation key cover on the door phone cover at the 

position where the additional key is required to be fi tted. This is 

done by pressing the two holding tabs on the cover and pushing 

outwards. 

• Press the key on the door phone base. 

• Fit the new key cover on the door phone cover. 


The sockets are white (plastic parts and PVC-coated wire sheath); 

consequently, door phones 1130/50 are recommended for tabletop 

versions due to the matching colours. 

Note: instead of the socket Ref.1130/12 can be used the the table 

mounting kit Ref.1130/120. 

Proceed as follows: 

• Set the jumpers on the terminal board according to the installation 

required. 

• Break portion A o n the top right-hand side of the base to pass the 

socket cable through. 

• Fix the weight plate under the base using the special screws. 

• Insert the two self-adhesive rubbers sup-plied with the socket in 

points C and D. 

• Insert the socket cord fi xing it to hook B and connect the wires 

needed, cutting the exceeding ones off. Then connect the installation 

wires to the corresponding socket terminals. 

CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 9330/12 

The call repeater relay Ref. 9330/12 may be fi tted when an additional 

power ringer is required in parallel to the door phone buzzer. 

The relay is fi tted on a plate which can be clipped onto the base of the 

door phone and two wires which connect in parallel to the buzzer on 

terminals 11 and 7 of the door phone. 

The contact can control a load of 1A max. 24V. 


SOCKET KIT FOR TABLE VERSIONS Ref. 1130/12 

AND 1130/19 

28 mm 

76 mm 

120 mm 




Mod. 1130 door phones, in addition to the accessories listed in 

the previous section, can be equipped with the following devices 




• 12Vac door phone electronic buzzer Ref. 9854/52 



The socket kit is needed to adapt door phones into table versions and it 

comes complete with: cord, accessories (weight plate, screws, rubber) 

and the instructions for installation. Two types of socket are available: 

with 12 cables Ref. 1130/12, for door phones without intercom add-on 

unit and with 19 cables Ref. 1130/19, for door phones with intercom 

add-on unit. 

TABLE MOUNTING KIT Ref. 1130/120 

The table kit Ref. 1130/120 is supplied with bracket, socket and 

12-wire cord, and is available for the white version only. It can be 

used instead of the socket Ref. 1130/12, and fi ts only the door phones 

Mod. 1130 without add-on unit. 



sec.3a −−−− 15

DOOR PHONE APARTMENT STATION ACCESSORIES 

KIT FOR ADJUSTABLE CALL SOUND Ref. 1132/53 

TRADITIONAL DOOR PHONE SYSTEM ADAPTER CIRCUIT Ref. 1131/7 

DOOR PHONE APARTMENT STATION ACCESSORIES 

DOOR PHONE APARTMENT STATION 

ACCESSORIES 

KIT FOR ADJUSTABLE CALL SOUND 

Ref. 1132/53 

Scaitel 

min 

med 

max 

Atlantico 

Ref. 1132/53 allows to adjust the call sound which has been sent on 

the loudspeaker by the door phone Mod. Scaitel and Mod. Atlantico in 

4+n door phone system and coax video door phone system. 

For assembly, fasten the printed circuit of the device in the lower area 

of the door phone base with the specifi c screw. 

A lever for adjusting the volume will project from the base: minimum - 

medium - maximum volume. 

Once inserted the kit, make a jumper between terminal U of the 

device and CA of the door phone. The conductor of the call shall be 

connected to terminal I of the kit,instead that on the terminal CA of the 

door phone. 

TRADITIONAL DOOR PHONE SYSTEM 

ADAPTER CIRCUIT Ref. 1131/7 

The door phone adapter circuit Ref. 1131/7 is used in 1131 and 1132 

door phones with electronic call to speaker and in traditional call 

systems with 12Vac to buzzer. 

The device can be used in basic systems and system with several 

doors; it cannot be used in intercom systems, 1+1 systems and 

systems with conversation privacy, etc. 

The adapter circuit must be inserted in door phones in the position 

shown in the following fi gures according to the door phone model; 

obviously no other devices can be fi tted in this position. 

The door phone connection diagram consequently changes as shown 

below. 

Intake max: 

350mA @ 12Vac 

Mod. Scaitel Mod. Atlantico Mod. Utopia 

1 CA 2 6 10 9 

Ref.1132/53 


2 6 9 7 1 

RISER 

1 RZ 1 10 


R 

R 

R 

SECTION 3B 

(REV.E) 

APARTMENT 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE STATIONS 



FREE-HANDS COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE 2 

SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................2 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................2 

BRACKET.........................................................................................3 

Bracket terminal board for coax systems Ref. 1703/91................3 

WALL-MOUNTED VERSION INSTALLATION.................................3 

FLUSH-MOUNTED VERSION INSTALLATION...............................5 

INSTALLATION ON PLASTERBOARD WALLS ..............................7 

VOLUME ADJUSTMENT .................................................................8 

ACCESSORIES FOR UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR PHONES ................8 

COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE 9 

SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................9 

TECHNICAL FEAUTURES ..............................................................9 

BRACKET.......................................................................................10 

Bracket terminal board for 5-wire systems Ref. 1703/955..........10 

Bracket terminal board for coax systems Ref. 1703/90..............10 

INSTALLATION..............................................................................10 

Wall-mounted version.................................................................10 

ACCESSORIES FOR UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR PHONES ..............11 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE 12 

SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................12 

TECNICAL FEATURES..................................................................12 

BRACKET.......................................................................................12 



RETROFIT......................................................................................13 

INSTALLATION..............................................................................13 

FRONT GLASS REPLACEMENT ..................................................13 

ACCESSORIES..............................................................................13 

BLACK AND WHITE 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE Ref. 1702/1 14 

SPECIFICATIONS - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................14 

COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE 15 

SPECIFICATIONS - TECHNICAL FEAUTURES ...........................15 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE 16 

ATLANTICO BRACKETS...............................................................16 


Bracket terminal board for coax systems Ref. 1202/90 

and Ref. 1202/95 ........................................................................16 

RETROFITS ...................................................................................16 

INSTALLATION..............................................................................16 



ACCESSORIES FOR ATLANTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONE ..........17 

Add-on Ref. 1702/86 ..................................................................17 

Coloured mask kit Ref. 1702/50 .................................................19 


BLACK AND WHITE VIDEO MODULE 20 


COLOUR VIDEO MODULE Ref. 1732/41 21 


VIDEO MODULE 22 

VIDEO MODULE BRACKET..........................................................22 



INSTALLATION..............................................................................22 



SCAITEL VIDEO MODULE ACCESSORIES.................................24 

Picture memory module Ref. 1750/32 ........................................24 

Confi gurations ............................................................................25 



sec.3b −−−− 1

UTOPIA FREE-HANDS COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE 


TECNICAL FEATURES 

UTOPIA FREE-HANDS COLOUR VIDEO DOOR 

PHONE 

142 mm 

49 mm 


The Utopia video door phone is a colour device with an elegant, 

revolutionary style and a particularly slim profi le designed by Studio De 

Lucchi. 

The most outstanding feature of this video door phone is that it is a 

free-hands model without handset. 

Communication is established by pressing the button and closed 

when the button is released. 

Utopia free-hands was designed to be installed in two different ways: 

wall-mounted without the need for masonry work, or fl ush-mounted to 

reduce the protrusion from the wall to only 16mm. 

Utopia has two sets of auxiliary buttons in addition to colour, brightness 

and contrast. 

Three indicator LEDs are provided for more simple and immediate use. 

These indicate open door, mute function and audio on conditions. 

The video door phone can be used in all coax video door phone 

systems using the specifi c brackets. 

The vide door phone is available in the following versions: 

• CCIR version (50Hz) grey colour Ref. 1703/2 

• CCIR version (50Hz) white colour Ref. 1703/3 

• EIA version (60Hz) grey colour Ref. 1703/29 

1 

2 

3 

4 

1) Audio button 

2) Auxiliary buttons 

3) Brightness adjustment control 

4) Colour adjustment control 

5) Contrast adjustment control 

6) Call volume control 

7) Open door button 

8) Green audio on LED 

9) Green mute LED 

10) Red door open LED 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

225 mm 

NOTE: a suitable camera must be fi tted in the door unit according to 

the transmission standard employed. 




The main features of the video door phone are: 

• Flat 4” TFT backlit colour module. 

• Call speaker separate from conversation speaker. 

• Adjustable call volume: when the call volume selector is in “MUTE” 

( ) position, the corresponding LED lights up to indicate that the 

call tone has been inhibited. The LED is visible also when the front 

panel is closed (an additional wire is needed in the column for this 

function). 

• Adjustable colour and brightness of the picture by means of a 

slider. 

• Adjustable contrast by means of a trimmer positioned under the 

sliding front panel. 

• Two additional buttons ( , ) for activating, for example, secondary 

door locks, staircase lights, switching the monitor on, etc. 

• Door opener button: simply press the button to operate the door lock 

( ); the button will remain lit as long as the picture appears on 

the video door phone. 

• Audio button: the green light in the button will stay as long as the 

display is on; when the button is pressed, the green indicator LED 

will light up and audio conversation is established. 

• Open door indicator: a red LED lights up when the door is open if the 

system is set up for this function (sensor installed). 


16 ÷ 18,5Vdc 

Consumption: Working: 

0,36A max 

Stand-by: 

0A 

Working power: max 6,5W 

CCIR Version Vertical frequency: 

50Hz ± 2Hz 

Horizontal frequency: 

15625 ± 300Hz 

EIA Version Vertical frequency: 60Hz ± 2Hz 


15734 ± 300Hz 

Video signal: 

1Vpp 75Ω nominal 

1Vpp -6dB minimum 

LCD: 

4” backlit 

Screen size: 

81 x 59mm 

Resolution: 

480H x 234V pixel 

Colour system: 

PAL 

Switch-on delay: 

4 sec. max 

Transmitting capsule: 

electret microphone 

Receiving capsule: 

speaker 45Ω 

Button break current ( , ): 0,5A @ 30Vdc 

Operating temperature range: 

-5° ÷ +45°C 

Max. humidity: 

90% UR 



BRACKET 

WALL-MOUNTED VERSION INSTALLATION 

BRACKET 

The Utopia video door phone is provided without fastening bracket. 

The bracket must be purchased separately: 

• Grey Ref. 1703/91 

• White Ref. 1703/93 

BRACKET TERMINAL BOARD FOR COAX SYSTEMS 

Ref. 1703/91 

R3 Silent video on (video only) 

CA Call signal 

2 Microphone signal 

1 Speaker signal 

6 

10 } Power earth 


X2 

X1 } Service button terminals 

Y2 

Y1 } Service button terminals 

+ Indicator LED power positive 

AP ‘Door open’ LED control input 

RD 

R2 

V3 

V5 

V4 

R1 

R1 

Secondary video door phone power positive 

Video power positive 

Composite video signal 


Composite video signal for second monitor in-out 

{ 

connection (connect a 75Ω resistor between V4 and V5 if 

not present) 

} Video power negative 


• Remove bracket protection. 

• Arrange bracket on wall considering height from ground and side 

clearance. 

6 cm 

10 cm 

155 cm 


NOTE: terminals 6 and 10 are short-circuited together and cannot be 

separated. 

• Fasten the bracket to the wall using the bolts provided. 

• Alternatively fasten the bracket to a fl ush-mounting box using the 

specifi c holes. 


7 cm 

8 cm 


sec.3b −−−− 3




• Arrange wiring and refi t the clip-on cover on the bracket. Remove 

the cover only before fi tting the Utopia video door phone on the 

bracket. 

NOTE: 

• To exclude the ‘free-hands’ function: move jumper J1 from 

position 2 to position 1. 

Hold the button 

pressed to establish the audio connection. 

1 2 

2 

FREE HANDS 

(default) 

1 

AUDIO WITH 

BUTTON PRESSED 

• Remove the lower sliding protective covers. 

• Check that the switch on the lower part is in position B. 

POSITION B 

ANALOGICAL 

1 2 A 

• Remove the protective cover from the bracket. 

• Remove the fi lm (A) protecting the terminals. 

IMPORTANT: THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE WILL NOT WORK IF 

THE FILM IS NOT REMOVED. 

B 

• Fit the Utopia video door phone on the bracket as follows: 

1. Fasten the video door phone to the hooks B on the upper side 

of the bracket. 

2. Turn the video door phone downwards. 

3. Shut the video door phone on the bracket and ensure that 

fastening lever C is blocked. 

NOTE: press lever C and reverse the sequence to remove the video 

door phone. 

B 


NOTE: do not change the trimmer default setting. 

B 

C 



FLUSH-MOUNTED VERSION INSTALLATION 


• Fit the Ref.1703/60 fl ush-mounting box at the recommended height 

from the fl oor. 

2 cm 

TOP 

2 cm 

Ref. 1703/60 

• Fit the frame inside the box and adjust correct perpendicularity. 

165 cm 


• Remove the three fastening teeth from the bracket. 


• Fasten the bracket to the frame. 

TOP 

TOP 

C 

TOP 

D 



sec.3b −−−− 5



• Arrange wiring. 

• Remove the sliding protective covers. 


NOTE: 

• To exclude the ‘free-hands’ function: move jumper J1 from 

position 2 to position 1. 

Hold the button 

TOP 

pressed to establish the audio connection. 

1 2 

2 

FREE HANDS 

(default) 

• Check that the switch on the lower part is in position B. 

POSITION B 

ANALOGICAL 

1 2 

1 

AUDIO WITH 


• Fasten the video door phone to the frame. 



IMPORTANT: THE MONITOR WILL NOT WORK IF THE FILM IS 

NOT REMOVED. 

A 

NOTE: do not change the trimmer default setting. 

TOP 

E 



INSTALLATION ON PLASTERBOARD WALLS 

• Refi t the sliding protective covers. 

• Fasten the adapter brackets of the box with the 3.5 x 9.5mm 

screws. 

• Break into the plasterboard wall as shown the drawing below. 

243 mm 


INSTALLATION ON PLASTERBOARD WALLS 

The specifi c 1703/61 kit is required to install Utopia free-hands video 

door phone on plasterboard walls. 

The kit consists of a set of backing fasteners for 12 mm and 24 mm 

thick walls, adapted brackets and screws needed for installation. 


• Drill box Ref. 1703/60 with a Ø 2.2mm bit to form the through holes 

shown in the figure below. 

165 cm 

160 mm 

• Fit the backing fasteners in the hole. 

Sch. 1703/60 

Sett/fab. 25.01.2006 



sec.3b −−−− 7


VOLUME ADJUSTMENT 

ACCESSORIES FOR UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR PHONES 

• Drill the wall at the holes on the backing fasteners with a Ø 2.2mm 

bit. 

VOLUME ADJUSTMENT 


• Fix the box to the wall using 2.9 x 32mm screws. 

Sch. 1703/60 

Se t/fab. 25.01.2006 

• Follow the instructions shown in the paragraph “Flush-mounting 

installation” to complete the installation. 

NOTE: volume is calibrated to optimal values during production. 

Change the settings when needed only. 

ACCESSORIES FOR UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR 

PHONES 

The video door phone can be customised by replacing the front fl aps 

with the following models: 

• Yellow Ref. 1703/51 

• Green Ref. 1703/52 

• Anthracite black Ref. 1703/53 

Replace by removing the sliding protection fl aps. 

Refi t the protective fl aps. 


Sch. 1703/60 

Se t/fab. 25.01.2006 

TOP 


UTOPIA COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE 


TECHNICAL FEAUTURES 


180 mm 

55 mm 

The Utopia video door phone is a colour device with an elegant, 

revolutionary style and a particularly slim profi le (protruding only 55 

millimetres from the wall) designed by Studio De Lucchi. 

Some settings are arranged under the front sliding cover to make the 

design more streamline and convenient. 

Standard controls of Utopia, in addition to colour, brightness and 

contrast, include three auxiliary buttons, door open LED and mute on 

LED. 

The video door phone is easy to install because no masonry work 

is needed and all connections are made to the bracket on which the 

video door phone will eventually be fastened. The video door phone 

can be used both in coax or 5-wire systems using the specifi c brackets. 

The handset is connected simply by means of a telephone plug. 

The following versions available: 

• CCIR version (50Hz) Ref. 1703/1 

• EIA version (60Hz) Ref. 1703/19 



1 

2 

3 

4 

1) Auxiliary buttons 

2) Contrast adjustment trimmer 

3) Brightness adjustment trimmer 

4) Colour adjustment trimmer 

5) Call tone adjustment trimmer 

6) Door opener button 

7) Mute function led 

8) Open door led 

8 

7 

6 

5 

225 mm 


The video door phone Ref. 1703/17 is set up to a speaker 

capable interfacing with hearing aids by means of the “T” 

function. 



The main features of the video door phone are: 

• Flat 4” TFT backlit colour module 

• Call speaker separate from handset 

• Adjustable call volume: when the call volume selector is in “MUTE” 

( ) position, the corresponding LED lights up to indicate that the 

call tone has been inhibited. The LED is visible also when the front 

panel is closed (an additional wire is needed in the column for this 

function). 

• Adjustable colour and brightness of the picture by means of a 

slider. 

• Adjustable contrast by means of a trimmer positioned under the 

sliding front panel. 

• Three additional buttons ( , and ) for activating, for example, 

secondary door locks, staircase lights, switching the monitor on, 

etc. 

• Door opener button: simply press the button to operate the door lock 

( ); the button will remain lit as long as the picture appears on 

the video door phone. 

• Open door indicator: a red LED lights up when the door is open if the 

system is set up for this function. 


16 ÷ 18,5Vdc 


0,36A max 

Stand-by: 

0A 

Working power: 

6,5W max 


50Hz ± 2Hz 


15625 ± 300Hz 

EIA Version Vertical frequency: 60Hz ± 2Hz 


15734 ± 300Hz 

Video signal: 



LCD: 

4” backlit 

Screen size: 

81 x 59mm 

Resolution: 



PAL 


4 sec. max 




speaker 45Ω 

Button break current ( , ): 0,5A @ 30Vdc 

(Electronic call to max. 2 loudspeaker) 


-5° ÷ +50°C 


90% UR 



sec.3b −−−− 9


BRACKET 

INSTALLATION 


BRACKET 

The Utopia video door phone is provided without fastening bracket. 

The bracket must be purchased separately according to the type of 

system being installed: 

• Bracket for 5-wire system Ref. 1703/955 

• Bracket for coax system Ref. 1703/90 

NOTE: the derivation of video door phone can not be in/out. 

BRACKET TERMINAL BOARD FOR 5-WIRE 

SYSTEMS Ref. 1703/955 

Y1 


X2 


CA1 Floor call signal 

2 Voice for door phone intercom 


G Monitor silence auto-on (video only) 

B Differential video signal positive 

A Differential video signal negative 

Z1 

} Service button terminals 

Z2 



R1 

R1 

R2 

RD 

} Video door phone power negative 

Video door phone power positive 


INSTALLATION 



• Arrange the conduit so that it ends in correspondence with the wire 

opening of the bracket, considering the height from the fl oor and the 

side clearance requirements shown in the fi gure. 


Ref. 1703/90 

6 cm 


R3 Silent video on (video only) 




6 

10 } Power earth 


X2 


Y2 


Z1 

Z2 } Service button terminals 



RD 

R2 

V3 

V5 

V4 

R1 

R1 






{ 


not present) 

} Video power negative 

NOTE: cut the P1 jumper to use this bracket in intercom systems. In 

intercom system the diode is not necessary. 

7 cm 

10 cm 

10 cm 

• Fasten the bracket to the wall using the screws and bolts provided 

or alternatively using a fl ush mounting box 503 and specifi c holes. 

155 cm 

Mod. 503 



ACCESSORIES FOR UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR PHONES 

• Arrange wiring. 

NOTE: it is advisable to refi t the protective cover if the video door 

phone is not immediately installed on the bracket. 


B 

A 

B 

ACCESSORIES FOR UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR 

PHONES 

The video door phone can be customised by replacing the front fl aps 

with the following models: 

• Yellow Ref. 1703/51 

• Green Ref. 1703/52 

• Anthracite black Ref. 1703/53 

• Replace by removing the sliding protection fl aps. 


• Fasten the monitor to the hooks B on the upper side of the bracket 

and turn the monitor downwards. 

• Shut the monitor on the bracket and ensure that fastening lever C is 

blocked. 

• Refi t the protective fl aps. 

B 

C 

• Press lever C and reverse the sequence to remove the monitor. 



sec.3b −−−− 11

ARTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONE 


TECNICAL FEATURES - BRACKET 



Artico offers the most modern technology applied to picture display and 

the best quality/price ratio. These features make the video door phone 

suitable for normal communication needs and security applications in 


Thanks to the use of a functional fl at 4” screen which reduces the 

protrusion from the wall, Artico can be installed on the wall without the 

need for masonry work. 

Connection of this video door phone are also simple and rapid, thanks 

to the terminal board arranged on the dedicated bracket. 

The following version are available: 







function. 

A Door opener button. 

B1 Auxiliary button: used for special functions. 


C Contrast/colour adjustment control. 

D Brightness adjustment control. 

E Call volume control and adjustment: turn the knob as far as it 

will go (red part visible) to mute the call tone (“MUTE” function). 



16 ÷ 18,5Vdc 


0,6A max 

Stand-by: 

0A (coax) 

5mA (5 wire) 


10W max 


50Hz ± 2Hz 


15625 ± 300Hz 

EIA version Vertical frequency: 60Hz ± 2Hz 


15734 ± 300Hz 

Video signal: 



Kinescope: 

4” FLAT 20mm neck 

Phosphorous: 

P45 

Geometric distorsion: 

vertical 5% max 

horizontal 5% max 

barrel 10% max 

Brightness: 

>100cd/m 2 max. setting 

X-rays: 

none 


7 sec. max 




speaker 45Ω 

Button voltage: 

24Veff. max 

Button current: 

1,2Aeff 


-5° ÷ +50°C 


90% UR 


The main characteristics of the video door phone are: 

• Flat 4” LCD black and withe video module 

• Adjustable and mutable call volume. The adjustment wheel appears 

red when the volume is muted. 

BRACKET 

Artico video door phone is provided without fastening bracket which 

must be purchased separately according to the system being installed: 

• Bracket for 5-wire systems (without coax) Ref. 1705/955 

• Bracket for coax systems Ref. 1705/90 

BRACKET TERMINAL BOARD FOR 5-WIRE SYSTEMS 

Ref. 1705/955 


• Door opener button dedicated and service buttons ( and ) for 

activating, for example, supplementary electrical locks, staircase 

lights, video door phone auto-on function, etc. 

• Adjustable brightness and contrast. 

241 mm 

MAX 

200 mm 

MED 

C D E 

A 

B1 

B2 

MUTE 

83 mm 

2 Voice for door phone intercom 

1 Earth for door phone intercom 

R3 Silent video on 



R5 -- 


CA Segnale di chiamata 

R2 Video door phone power positive 

R1 

R1 } Video door phone power negative 

Y2 


X2 


RT Secondary monitor power positive 

R4 -- 



RETROFIT - INSTALLATION 

FRONT GLASS REPLACEMENT - ACCESSORIES 


Ref. 1705/90 




R2 Video power positive 

V3 Composite video signal 

V4 


{ 


not present) 



6 

10 } Power ground 

R1 Video power negative 

Y2 


X2 



RT Secondary monitor power positive 

FRONT GLASS REPLACEMENT 

The video door phone can be customised by replacing the front glass. 

The following colours are available: 

• Smoky grey Ref. 1705/101 

(pre-fitted on the video door phone) 

• Blue Ref. 1705/102 

A 

B 


RETROFIT 

In a coaxial and 5 wire video door phone system, it is possible to 

replace video door phone Mod. Sentry+ with video door phones Mod. 

Artico. To simplify this replacement and reduce its cost, it is possible to 

buy the bracket alone without the electronic circuit Ref. 1705/100. 

Also when needing to replace only the bracket of a Sentry+ video door 

phone it is possible to buy the bracket of the Artico video door phone 

and fi t it with plastic support Ref. 1704/102. 

The replacement operations are described in chapter 1F “Instructions 

for interchangeability of Urmet Domus devices” of the Door phone – 

Video door phone section. 

C 

D 

INSTALLATION 

1) Prepare the conduit so that it terminates at the infeed hole 

provided. 

2) Use 4 plugs to fasten the bracket to the wall at the height from the 

fl oor indicated. 

3) Connect the wires to the specifi c terminals. 

4) Extract the fastening hook A. 

5) Insert the video door phone in the bracket. 

6) Fasten the video door phone in place pushing hook A inwards. 

A 

1,55 m 

ACCESSORIES 

Artico video door phones, can be equipped with the following devices 


• Three-tone gong Ref. 1132/54 



• Additional three-tone ringer Ref. 9854/42 

• 12Vac door phone electronic buzzer Ref. 9854/52 

• Floor call add-on device Ref. 9854/53 



sec.3b −−−− 13

ARTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONE Ref. 1702/1 


ATLANTICO BLACK AND WHITE VIDEO DOOR 

PHONE Ref. 1702/1 

The Atlantico electronic call system video door phone can be used 

either in coax systems and 5-wire systems. 

The call volume (to dedicated speaker) can be adjusted in linear 

fashion and muted. 



video door phone will eventually be fastened. The handset connection 

is particularly ergonomic. A simple telephone plug is used. 

The door opener button by the side of the handset is lit up and green 

when the monitor is on. 

The Atlantico video door phone has innovative simple, essential 

designed fashioned by Michele De Lucchi. The front mask colour can 

be changed with the kit Ref. 1702/50 to suit the video door phone for 

all architectural contexts. 


• CCIR version (50Hz) white colour Ref. 1702/1 

• EIA version (60Hz) white colour Ref. 1702/18 

• CCIR version (50Hz) anthracite colour Ref. 1702/41 

• CCIR version (50Hz) high tech grey colour Ref. 1702/42 





function. 


ATLANTICO BLACK AND WHITE VIDEO DOOR PHONE 


• Flat 4” black and white video module. 



NOTE: when volume is set to “MUTE” the video door phone will not 

ring but the video module will light up. 

• Door opener button is lit up and green when video module is on. 

• Service buttons ( and ) for activating, for example, 

supplementary electrical locks, staircase lights, monitor auto-on 

function, etc. 




220 mm 

Contrast adjustment 

Brightness adjustment 

Auxiliary buttons 

218 mm 80 mm 


Door opener button 

Call volume control and adjustment/ 

Mute function 


16 ÷ 18,5Vdc 


0,35A max 

Stand-by: 

0A 


6,5W max 

CCIR version Vertical frequency: 50Hz ± 2Hz 


15625 ± 300Hz 

EIA version Vertical frequency: 60Hz ± 2Hz 


15734 ± 300Hz 

Video signal: 

1Vpp 75 Ω nominal 


Kinescope: 

4” flat 13mm neck 

Phosphorous: 

P45 

Screen size: 

81 x 59mm 

Geometric distorsion: 

vertical 5% max 

horizontal 5% max 

barrel 10% max 

Brightness: 

170cd/m 2 max. setting 

X-rays: 

none 


4 sec. max 




45 Ω speaker 


24Veff. max 


1,2Aeff 


-5° ÷ +50°C 


90% RH 


ATLANTICO COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE 




The Atlantico video door phone is a colour apartment station which can 

be used either in coax systems and 5-wire systems. 

As the black and white version, also this model has adjustable call tone 

volume and muting functions. 



video door phone will eventually be fastened. The handset connection 

is particularly ergonomic. A simple telephone plug is used. 

The video door phone is only white but the front part can be customised 

by replacing the standard frame (blue) with one of the fi ve frames from 

the Ref. 1702/50 kit. 


• CCIR Version (50Hz) Ref. 1702/40 

• EIA Version (60Hz) Ref. 1702/49 


the trasmission standard enployed. 



function. 



16 ÷ 18.5Vdc 


0.35A max 

Stand-by: 

0A 


6.5W max 

CCIR version: Vertical frequency: 

50Hz ± 2Hz 


15625 ± 300Hz 

EIA version: Vertical frequency: 60Hz ± 2Hz 


15734 ± 300Hz 

Video signal: 

1Vpp 75 Ω nominal 

1Vpp. -6 dB minimum 

LCD: 

4” back-lit 

Screen size: 

81 x 59mm 

Resolution: 



PAL 


4 sec. max. 




45Ω speaker 


24 Veff. max. 


1.2A eff 


-5° ÷ +50°C 


90% RH 




• Flat 4” LCD colour module 






• Service buttons ( and ) for activating, for example, supplementary 

electrical locks, staircase lights, video door phone auto-on function, 

etc. 

• Adjustable brightness and colour. 

220 mm 

Colour adjustment 



218 mm 80 mm 



Mute function 



sec.3b −−−− 15

ATLANTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONE 

ATLANTICO BRACKETS - RETROFITS 

INSTALLATION 


ATLANTICO BRACKETS 

The Atlantico video door phone is provided without fastening bracket; 

the bracket must be purchased separately according to the type of 

system being installed: 

• Bracket for 5-wire systems Ref. 1202/955 


• Bracket for coax systems with conversation 

privacy function Ref. 1202/95 

• Bracket for replacing Ranger monitor 

in coax systems Ref. 1202/590 

• Bracket for replacing monitor in Ranger 

5-wire systems Ref. 1202/591 

NOTE: the bracket can be used either with colour and black and white 

video door phone. 



R1 Video door phone power negative 





G Monitor silence auto-on (video only) 

X1 


X2 

Y1 


Y2 

RD Secondary monitor power positive 

2 Voice for door phone intercom (*) 

R5 -- 

(*) If the system is set-up for the function 

RETROFITS 

Ranger video door phone Ref. 1201/1 (and respective bracket 

Ref. 1201/90) can be replaced in traditional call coax video door phone 

system with Atlantico video door phone Ref. 1702/1 and specifi c 

bracket Ref. 1202/590. 

The terminals on Ref. 1202/590 brackets have the same numbers as 

the Ref. 1201/90 brackets to replace simply by connecting the wires in 

the same way. 

Replacements are only possible in systems fi tting Ranger basic video 

door phones Ref. 1201/1 with bracket Ref. 1201/90; replacement is not 

possible in systems with switchboards, special systems and intercom 

systems. 

Ranger video door phone Ref. 955/5 with bracket Ref. 955/74 can 

be replaced in 5-wire systems using Atlantico monitor Ref. 1702/1 

with adapter bracket Ref. 1202/591. The Winfl at+ bracket terminals 

have the same numbers as the Ranger brackets to replace simply by 

connecting the wires as they were in the old system. Replacement is 

only possible in basic systems. 

The Atlantico 1702/1 video door phone can be installed instead of the 

Winfl at 1202/1 or Winfl at+ 1202/1A video door phone without needing 

to replace the bracket. 

As the black and white versions, the Atlantico 1702/40 colour video 

door phone can be installed instead of the Winspot+ 1855/11A video 

door phone on the existing bracket. 

INSTALLATION 

The device can be wall-mounted (on a bracket) or rested on a 

horizontal surface by using the specifi c tabletop stand in addition to the 

bracket. 



Ref. 1202/90 AND Ref. 1202/95 




6 


10 


X1 


X2 

Y1 


Y2 






V4 connection (connect a 75Ω resistor between V4 and V5 if 

not present) 



Note: the conversation secrecy device in bracket Ref. 1202/95 offers 

two electrical lock operating options: 

• normal opening, whenever the door opening button is pressed 

(solution A); 

• enabled opening: cut-off jumper P1 on the bracket printed 

circuit; the electrical lock may be operated only by the called 

video door phone (solution B). 

P1 


1) Arrange the duct so that it ends in correspondence with one of the 

input holes. 

2) Fasten the bracket to the wall at the height from the fl oor shown by 

means of the four screws. 


4) Check that switch on back of video door phone is in the A 

position. 

5) Extract the retainer hook A by inserting the tip of a screwdriver and 

pulling the hook downwards. 

6) Fasten the monitor to the bracket as shown in the fi gure. 

7) Fasten the monitor by pushing the retainer hook A upwards. 

A 

A 

B 

Bracket 

1,55 m 



ACCESSORIES FOR ATLANTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONE 


Atlantico video door phone can be table-mounted using the specifi c 

kit Ref. 1702/92 containing: one tabletop stand, one socket and one 

cord. 


1) Insert the junction box wire in the rear hole of the support and 

fasten it with the U-bolt and the screw provided. 

2) Connect the junction box wires to the specifi c terminals on the 

bracket. 


position. 

4) Extract the stop hook A from the monitor. 

5) Fit the monitor on the bracket and fasten it by pushing the hook A 

up. 

6) Connect the system wires to the corresponding junction box 

terminals. 

A 

B 

ACCESSORIES FOR ATLANTICO VIDEO DOOR 

PHONE 

ADD-ON Ref. 1702/86 

The additional module with bracket may be purchased separately and 

combined to the basic video door phone unit in system with coax 

cable. 

A switch may be used to mute the call tone and a green LED will light 

up to indicate this. A second LED may be used to check whether the 

door is open (if this function is available in the system). Six buttons 

may be used for intercom calls to other devices in the building. 

INSTALLATION 

1) Arrange the duct so that it ends near the input hole and fasten the 

bracket to the wall at the height from the ground shown with the 

four screws. 

25 cm 


B 

155 cm 

A 

Note: consider the following correspondence between terminals for 

using the table-top kit with 1702/92 brackets in 5-wire systems. 

2) Separate the bracket terminal board wires from the add-on wires 

and arrange as shown in the fi gure. 

Table mountig kit 

Bracket 

Ref. 1702/92 Ref. 1202/955 

R1........................... → ........................ R1 

R2........................... → ........................ R2 

V3 ........................... → ......................... A 

V5 ........................... → ......................... B 

7/CA ......................... → ........................CA 

R3........................... → ......................... G 

X1 ........................... → ........................ X1 

X2 ........................... → ........................ X2 

Y1 ........................... → ........................ Y1 

Y2 ........................... → ........................ Y2 

2 ............................ → ......................... 2 

Important: Two table-top Atlantico video door phones cannot be 

connected in parallel. 



sec.3b −−−− 17




The following terminals are available on the bracket with add-on: 




6 

10 } Power ground 


X1 


Y1 






V4 


{ 


not present) 



R 

Door opener direct from call button (only with switch at off 

{ and presence of relay 788/52): 

+ LED power positive (12Vdc) 

AP Door open control 

4) Close the add-on top. 

5) Remove the clear plastic cover to access the name tags. 

6) If you need remove the add-on top proceed as follows. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

T1 

T2 

T3 

G/T 

G/T2 

T4 

T5 

T6 

P2 

TABLE TOP VERSION INSTALLATION 

NOTE: cut jumper P2 on the bracket to separate references G/T and 

G/T2. 

G/T refers to T1, T2 and T3 

G/T2 refers to T4, T5 and T6 

3) Fasten the monitor to the bracket after connecting. 

Extract fastening hook A to fasten the monitor. Fasten it to the 

bracket and block it by pushing the hook A inwards. 

Purchase the specifi c adapter Ref. 1702/93 for installing the video 

door phone with additional buttons. 

Ref. 1702/92 

Ref. 1702/93 

Junction box 

included in 

Ref. 1702/93 


A 

Fasten both 

socket wires. 

B 

Junction box 

included in 

Ref. 1702/92 

1. Insert the junction box wires through the rear hole and fasten it 

with the U-bolt and long screw (B) included to the tabletop stand. 

2. Fasten the adapter plate to the tabletop stand with the 4 screws 

included with the plate. 

3. Fasten the bracket to the adapter using the remaining 4 screws 

included with the tabletop stand. 

4. Connect the junction box wires to the specifi c terminals on the 

bracket. 

5. Extract the retainer hook A on the video door phone. 





6. Insert the video door phone in the bracket and lock it by pushing 

retainer hook A inwards. 

7. Close the top of the button add-on. 

8. Connect the system wires to the corresponding junction box 

terminals. 

A 

COLOURED MASK KIT Ref. 1702/50 

The video door phone can be customised by replacing the front mask 

and add-on name tag with those contained in the 1702/50 kit. 

The kit contains masks and cards of the following colours: 

• Yellow 

• Pink 

• Grey 

• Green 

• Blue 

E 

1 

2 

F 

D 


Besides the coloured frames the kit contains a protective smoke grey 

cover. 

NOTE: the video door phone grey and blue frames are combined with 

name tags for add-on with a white background and coloured 

lines. 

A 

Remove the clear plastic cover to access the name tags. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

B 

4mm slot screw driver 

rotary movement 

C 

Other media, such as photographs or wall paper, can be used to 

customise the video door phone instead of the 1702/50 kit. In this 

case, use one of the frames provided as a template to trace the exact 

installation profi le. 


Atlantico video door phones, in addition to the accessories listed 

in the previous section, can be equipped with the following devices 


• Three-tone gong Ref. 1132/54 



• Additional three-tone ringer Ref. 9854/42 

• 12Vca door phone electronic buzzer Ref. 9854/52 

• Floor call add-on device Ref. 9854/53 



sec.3b −−−− 19

SCAITEL BLACK AND WHITE VIDEO MODULE 





Mod. 1732 video module is a monitor whose most important 

characteristic is that of being used in combination with other Scaitel 

devices which present the same design. 

The device can be used in combination with other Scaitel devices 

(e.g. door phone or picture memory module) to create a basic video 

door phone (video module with door phone) or complex device (video 

module with door phone and picture memory). 

The video module implements both CCIR and EIA transmission 

standards: 



Note: suitable cameras must be fi tted in the door unit according to the 

transmission standard of the monitor. 


Available in matte white plastic (ABS) only, the device is equipped with 

two potentiometers for adjusting picture brightness ( ) and contrast 

( ). 

167 mm 56 mm 


Power: 

16 ÷ 18.5Vdc 


0.35A max 

Stand-by: 

0mA 


6.5W max 


50Hz ± 2Hz 


15625 ± 400Hz 

EIA version: Vertical frequency: 60Hz ± 2Hz 


15734 ± 400Hz 

Resolution: 

400 lines in middle of screen 

Video input: 

1Vpp-75Ohm nominal 1Vpp -6dB min 

Kinescope: 

4” flat 

Phosphorous: 

P45 

Screen size: 

81 x 59mm 

Geometric distortion: vertical 8% max - horizontal 12% max 

Brightness: 

170cd/m 2 max. setting 

Working temperature range: - 5 + 45°C 

Storage temperature range: -20 + 60°C 

Humidity: 

90% RH max 

220 mm 

Contrast adjustment 



The video module can be installed next to other Scaitel modules by 

means of brackets provided and fastened to the wall by means of a 

bracket with connector and terminal board. 

The monitor (basic or with add-on modules) can be table-mounted 

using a specifi c transformation kit. 


SCAITEL COLOUR VIDEO MODULE Ref. 1732/41 



Ref. 1732/41 

SCAITEL COLOUR VIDEO MODULE 

Ref. 1732/41 

Like the black/white module, the most important feature of this video 

module is that of being used in combination with other SCAITEL 

devices which present the same design. 

The device can be used in combination with other Scaitel devices 

(e.g. door phone or picture memory module) to create a basic video 

door phone (video module with door phone) or complex device (video 

module with door phone and picture memory). 


Available in matte white plastic (ABS) only, the device is equipped with 

two potentiometers for adjusting picture brightness ( ) and contrast 

( ). 

167 mm 

56 mm 



16 ÷ 18.5Vdc 


0.35A max 

Stand-by: 

0mA 


6.5W max 


50Hz ± 2Hz 


15625 ± 400Hz 

Resolution: 

480H x 234V 

Video signal: 

1Vpp-75Ohm nominal 

1Vpp -6dB min 

Kinescope: 

4” TFT 


PAL 

Screen size: 

81 x 59mm 

Working temperature range: - 5 + 45°C 

Storage temperature range: -20 + 60°C 

Humidity: 

90% RH max 

220 mm 


Colour adjustment 


The video module can be installed next to other Scaitel modules by 

means of brackets provided and fastened to the wall by means of a 

bracket with connector and terminal board. 

NOTE: the brackets can be used indifferently on all black and white 

and colour videos. 

The monitor (basic or with add-on modules) can be table-mounted 

using a specifi c transformation kit. 

Refer to the “Indoor video door phone units” section for the respective 

product sheets and installation methods. 



sec.3b −−−− 21

SCAITEL VIDEO MODULE 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE BRACKET 

INSTALLATION 

VIDEO MODULE BRACKET 



The bracket for installing the video module must be purchased 

separately. 

There are two types of brackets according to the system where they 

will be installed: 


• Bracket for 5-wire systems Ref. 1732/955 



VIDEO MODULE 

Proceed as follows to fasten the video module only: 

• Arrange the duct so that it ends in correspondence with the input 

hole. 

• Fasten the bracket to the wall at the height from the fl oor shown by 

means of bolts. 

• Connect the wires to the specifi c terminals. 

• Extract the stop bolt A. 

• Fasten the monitor to the bracket and lock the device by pushing the 

bolt “A” inwards. 

A 

Video 

module 

Ref. 1732/91 

1732/955 

1,55 m 


1 Earth for door phone (*) 

2 Voice for door phone (*) 


R5 -- 



R1 Video door phone power negative 




(*) To install the video door phone in 5-wire systems, connect the 

Ref. 1132/35 door phone to these terminals. 


Ref. 1732/91 

CA 

R3 

R1 

R2 

V4 

V5 

V3 

RD 

Call signal 

Silent video on 

Video power negative 




not present) 



Secondary monitor power positive 

INSTALLATION 

The video module, as shown, can be used separately or in combination 

with Scaitel door phone model or 1332 door telephone model. 

The door telephone can either be installed separately or in combination 

with telephone interface and PABX 1/5 and 2/8 switchboards. 

In all confi gurations, the video module must be arranged on the left 

and the door telephone on the right (the telephone interface and 

the PABX telephone switchboards, where relevant, must also be 

positioned immediately to the left of the door telephone). 

Refer to “Telefony technical manual” for details. 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE (VIDEO + DOOR PHONE MODULE) 

Two installation arrangements are possible: 

with or without fl ush-mounting box. In any case, plate kit Ref. 1032/59 

will be needed to join the devices. 

INSTALLATION WITH FLUSH-MOUNTING BOX 


• Install the box in line with the wall at a height of 1.40 m from the fl oor 

considering that the monitor will be arranged approximately 10 cm 

to the left of the fl ush-mounting box. 

• Lead all the wires out of the fl ush-mounting box and prepare to 

direct them to the respective connections of the monitor and the 

door phone through the corresponding holes in the bracket and the 

door phone base. 

The box dimension are indicative. 

1,40 m 

130 mm 

• Fit the two L-brackets for fi tting the base of the door phone before 

fastening the monitor bracket to the wall. 

Fasten the monitor bracket so that the upper part of the wire input is 

in line with the inner wall of the box and the left part is 12mm away. 

70 mm 

12 mm 

31 

mm 



INSTALLATION 

• Fasten the bracket by means of the bolts, position the door phone 

base on the two tabs and fasten to the wall. 

• Connect the wires to the specifi c terminals and then fasten the video 

module and the door phone top. 

Note: the tabletop conversion kit can only be used with bracket 

Ref. 1730/91 for coaxial cable systems. 


• Insert the four adhesive rubbers provided in the housings under the 

base of the table mounting stand. 

• Fasten the bracket by means of the specifi c screws. 

• Connect the junction box wires to the specifi c terminals on the 

bracket. 

• Extract the stop bolt A from the monitor. 

• Fasten the monitor to the bracket and lock it by pushing the bolt A 

inwards. 


140 mm 


147 mm 

147 mm 

INSTALLATION WITHOUT FLUSH-MOUNTING BOX 

Fit the two L-brackets for fi tting the base of the door phone before 

fastening the monitor bracket to the wall. 

• Fasten the bracket by means of the bolts, position the door phone 

base on the two tabs and fasten to the wall. 

• Arrange the wire output in correspondence with the output hole. 

• Follow the indications in the fi gure for interconnections between 

video module and door phone after cutting the areas in the top 

sides. 

• Connect the wires to the specifi c terminals and then fasten the video 

module and the door phone top. 

A 

VIDEO DOOR PHONES (VIDEO + DOOR PHONE MODULE) 


VIDEO MODULE 

Use the tabletop transformation kit Ref. 1732/56. 

Use the tabletop transformation kit Ref. 1732/56 (for video module) 

and Ref. 1132/50 (for door phone). 


• Insert the adhesive rubbers provided in the housings of the tabletop 

mounting stand. 

• Join the two table mounting stands putting the monitor stand on the 

left. 

Assemble by fastening the two fl at plates G, H (Ref. 1032/55) on 

the front and positioning and fastening the shim L provided on the 

back. 

Cut the corresponding areas a, b, c, d on the corresponding walls; 

cut walls a, b to position shim L. 

• Fasten the monitor bracket and the base of the door phone to the 

corresponding stands by means of the specifi c screws as shown. 

• Connect the socket wires to the specifi c terminals. 

• Follow the indications in the fi gure for interconnections between 

video module and door phone after cutting the areas e, f, in the table 

stand sides. 

• Extract the stop bolt A from the monitor. 

• Fasten the monitor to the bracket and lock it by pushing the bolt A 

upwards. 

• Fasten the door phone to the base. 




sec.3b −−−− 23


SCAITEL VIDEO MODULE ACCESSORIES 

STRUCTURE 


G 

H 

a 

c 

b 

d 

L a 

b 

The module is equipped with 6 control buttons and 2 LEDs for the 

following functions: 

8 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

e f 


PICTURE MEMORY MODULE Ref. 1750/32 

42 mm 

90 mm 

220 mm 

• Button (1) Automatic storage 

• Button (2) Manual storage 

• Button (3) View pictures 

• Button (4) Select date/time 

• Button (5) Set date/time 

• Button (6) Clear memory 

• Red LED (7) 

off: stand-by 

on: ready to store 

blinking: stored 

• Green LED (8) 

off: power off 

on: power on 

blinking: confi rmation 

An extractable terminal board B is provided inside the module to 

connect to the system. 

Engage the terminal board as shown in the drawing. 

A 

B 


The picture memory module used in combination with a video module 

can store up to 32 black and white pictures. 

PERFORMANCE 

Note: this device may be installed only in coax systems with video 

module CCIR version (50Hz) Ref. 1732/1. 

The 32 pictures may be stored either automatically or manually with 

indications of date and time. 

The stored pictures can be recalled and cancelled at any time. 

A battery arranged inside the module permits storage of pictures 

and date/time settings in the event of blackout for approximately four 

hours. 

The monitor will be switched off at the end of each operation after 

approximately 2 minutes from the last command. 

Storage occurs after a programmed time of approximately 3 seconds 

from the call and is blocked for the following 30 seconds. 

If the device has stored the 32 pictures, the fi rst picture will be deleted 

and the new picture will be stored. 

The video module to which the picture module is combined must be 

powered locally by a power unit Ref. 789/2. 


The outer surfaces of the picture memory module are matte; the 

buttons are shiny. 

The connections are made using screw-on terminal boards and 

clamps. 

The maximum cross-section area of the wires to be connected to the 

terminal boards is 1.5mm 2 . 

The casing is made of self-extinguishing ABS plastic. 

Power: 

21 +/- 2Vdc 

Consumption: 

300 mA max 

Back-up: 

4 hours with charged buffer battery 

Memories: 

32 complete pictures 

Resolution: 

256 x 256 pixels 

Temperature: 

-10 / +50°C 

Humidity 90% RH at 30°C 




OPERATION 

AUTOMATIC STORAGE 

Press button (1) Automatic storage to set the device to store pictures 

automatically: 

• The corresponding red LED will light up immediately. 

• The picture from the camera will be stored approximately 3 seconds 

after each call. 

• The red LED will start blinking to indicate that a picture has been 

stored. 

Press button (1) Automatic storage again to deactivate the function. 

The red LED (on or blinking) will go out. 

All functions are deactivated to avoid repeated storage and incorrect 

operation for 30 seconds after automatic storage. 

Important: No other commands are accepted when the device is in 

automatic storage mode. 

MANUAL STORAGE 

Press the Manual storage (2) button after a call (or during auto-on, 

where relevant) to instantly store the picture. 

Note: • Up to 32 pictures can be stored. 

Additional storage of pictures is managed on a fi rst-in-fi rst-out 

basis. 

• The green LED associated to the Clear memory button (6) 

indicates that the device is powered. This LED also goes out 

for an instant whenever the following buttons are pressed: 

Manual storage (2), View pictures (3) and Select date/time (4) 

in sign of confi rmation. 

VIEW PICTURES 

Press the View pictures (3) button to view the pictures in the order they 

were stored. 

The following indications appear: 

CONFIGURATIONS 

A possible confi guration is: 

• Video module + memory module + door phone. 

VIDEO MODULE + PICTURE MEMORY MODULE + DOOR PHONE 

INSTALLATION 

One large fl ush-mounting box (for the monitor) and two small boxes 

(for the picture memory and the door phone) are required. 

• Join the fl ush-mounting box by means of the fairlead shims 

provided. 

• Install the fl ush-mounting boxes at a height of 1.35 metres from the 

fl oor. 

• Lead the video system wires from the central fl ush-mounting box 

and the door phone wires from the right-hand side. 

Proceed as follows for fastening to the wall: 

• Fit the two L-brackets for fi tting the base of the memory module 

before fastening the monitor bracket to the wall. 

• Fasten the monitor bracket, position and fasten the two lower 

sockets of the large fl ush-mounting box and fasten the top by means 

of the two bolts. 

• Arrange the memory base on the two tabs and mark the positions of 

the two bolts for fastening to the wall. 

• Before fastening the memory module, arrange the two U-brackets 

for fi tting by the side of the door phone base. 

• Mark the positions of the bolts for fastening the door phone base, 

• Connect the various wires to the specifi c terminals; then fasten the 

video module, the memory module top and the door phone top. 


*08 17:23 APR 12 95 

Time 

Memory number 

Symbol >: Picture stored 

Symbol *: Live picture 

Year 

Day 

Month 

A grey screen with * symbol will appear after viewing all the stored 

pictures. 

It is advisable to end stored picture viewing in this way. 

ADJUSTING DATE AND TIME 

The date and time will need to be adjusted during installation and if the 

buffer battery is completely fl at. 

Proceed as follows for this operation: 

1) Press Select date/time (4). 

The monitor will light up and two dashes will appear instead of the 

time. 

2) Press Set date/time (5) to set the correct value; press Select date/ 

time (4) again to go to the next indications. 

The operation will end automatically after setting the year. 

CLEAR MEMORY 

Hold Clear memory (6) for longer than 3 seconds to clear the stored 

pictures. 

1,35 m 

The box dimension are indicative. 

310 mm 

130 mm 20 mm 70 mm 20 mm 70 mm 

70 mm 

31 mm 



sec.3b −−−− 25






SECTION 3C 

(REV.E) 

APARTMENT STATION 

ACCESSORIES 


OUTDOOR CHIME FOR ADDITIONAL 

CALL SOUND Ref. 9854/40 2 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.........................................................2 

WIRING DIAGRAM ..........................................................................2 


MISTRAL 230Vac RADIO RINGER WITH FLASH Ref. 4311/3 .......9 


Installation ....................................................................................9 

Programming ................................................................................9 

Mute function ..............................................................................10 

Alarm function.............................................................................10 

ELECTRONIC CHIME FOR ELECTRONIC CALL Ref. 9854/41 3 


THREE-TONE ELECTRONIC CHIME Ref. 9854/42 4 

INSTALLATION................................................................................4 


ADDITIONAL ELECTRONIC BUZZER Ref. 9854/52 5 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.........................................................5 

INSTALLATION................................................................................5 

Description of terminal..................................................................5 

ADD-ON DEVICE FOR CALL AT FLOOR Ref. 9854/53 6 

INSTALLATION................................................................................6 

WIRELESS RINGERS Mod. MISTRAL 8 

MISTRAL TRANSMITTER PUSH-BUTTON Ref. 4311/11.............10 

Technical specifi cations..............................................................10 

Installation ..................................................................................10 


MISTRAL 12Vdc/ac RADIO RINGER KIT WITHOUT FLASH........11 


Ringer installation.......................................................................11 

Push-button installation ..............................................................12 

Call repeater installation .............................................................12 

Programming ..............................................................................12 

Mute function ..............................................................................12 


MISTRAL 12Vdc/ac RADIO RINGER KIT 

WITH FLASH + PUSH-BUTTON Ref. 4311/703 ............................12 

WIRELESS CALL REPEATER Ref. 4311/13.................................12 


Installation ..................................................................................12 

THREE-TONE GONG Ref. 1132/54 14 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.......................................................14 

ELEMENTS INFLUENCING RANGE...............................................8 

MISTRAL 12Vdc/ac RADIO RINGER WITH FLASH Ref. 4311/2 ....8 


Installation ....................................................................................8 

Programming ................................................................................9 

Mute function ................................................................................9 

Alarm function...............................................................................9 



sec.3c −−−− 1

OUTDOOR CHIME FOR ADDITIONAL CALL SOUND Ref. 9854/40 

OUTDOOR CHIME FOR ADDITIONAL CALL 

SOUND Ref. 9854/40 

The Ref. 9854/40 electronic ringer can be used as a supplementary 

ringer: the call forwarded from the door unit activates the Ref. 9854/40 

supplementary ringer, in addition to the apartment station ringer. 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 

Intake: 

Operating voltage: 

Call sound: 

80 mm 

WIRING DIAGRAM 

1+1 DOOR PHONE SYSTEM 


OUTDOOR CHIME FOR ADDITIONAL CALL SOUND Ref. 9854/40 

32 mm 

35mA with feeding at 12Vac 

12Vac nominal 

tolerance between 10V and 18Vac 

bitonal on loudspeaker 

1200 and 1800Hz frequency 



80 mm 

SC101-1298A 

4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC CALLING AND 

COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE 

VIDEO 

DOOR PHONE DOOR PHONE 

~ 

12 

~ 

Ref.9854/40 

RINGER 

CA 

10 

S3 6 

CA 

S1 

~ ~ 

0 12 

~ ~ ~ ~ 

0 12 

5-WIRE VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM 



MAINS~ 

CA 

A 

B 

R2 

R1 

Ref.788/52 

CALL REPEATER 

RELAY 

TRANSFORMER 

Ref.9000/230 

CA1 

2 1 

~ 

12 

~ 

Ref.9854/40 

RINGER 

S3 

S1 

~ ~ 

0 12 

6 

C 

Ref.788/52 

CALL REPEATER 

RELAY 

~ 

12 

~ 

Ref.9854/40 

RINGER 

S3 C 

6 

S1 

~ ~ 

0 12 

MAINS~ 

Ref.788/52 

CALL REPEATER 

RELAY 

MAINS~ 

~ ~ ~ ~ 

0 12 

TRANSFORMER 

Ref.9000/230 


~ ~ ~ ~ 

0 12 

TRANSFORMER 

Ref.9000/230 

DOOR PHONE SYSTEM WITH TRADITIONAL CALLING 


7 

1 

2 

6 

9 

10 

11 

~ 

12 

~ 

Ref.9854/40 

RINGER 

2 −−−− sec.3c DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM: Product Technical Manual

80 mm 

ELECTRONIC CHIME FOR ELECTRONIC CALL Ref. 9854/41 

ELECTRONIC CHIME FOR ELECTRONIC CALL 

Ref. 9854/41 

32 mm 

The electronic chime Ref. 9854/41 can be used in electronic call door 

phone/video door phone systems. 

The chime can be connected directly in parallel to the indoor set call 

and needs neither a repetear relay nor feeding. 

The maximum number of ringers which can be connected in 

parallel depends on the PS signal. Consider that each Ref. 9854/41 

supplementary ringer draws as much as a door phone or video door 

phone speaker. 


80 mm 


COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE WITH ELECTRONIC CALLING 

SV102-1761B 


RINGER 

Ref.9854/41 

Common 

Calls 

RISING 

COLUMN 

ELECTRONIC CHIME FOR ELECTRONIC CALL Ref. 9854/41 

4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC CALLING 

SC101-0795B 



SV102-1762C 

RINGER 

Ref.9854/41 



R1 

R2 

A 

B 

CA 

R1 

R2 

A 

B 

A B 

I 

Output 

R1R2 

II 


DISTRIBUTOR 

Ref.955/40 

R1 

R2 

A 

B 



RINGER 

Ref.9854/41 

SC101-0796C 

K 

Z 

RINGER 

Ref.9854/41 

Calls 

R1 

R2 

A 

B 

IV 

A B 

RISING 

COLUMN 

III 

Input 

Common 

R1R2 

R1 

R2 

B 



sec.3c −−−− 3

THREE-TONE ELECTRONIC CHIME Ref. 9854/40 

THREE-TONE ELECTRONIC CHIME 

Ref. 9854/42 

80 mm 

THREE-TONE ELECTRONIC CHIME Ref. 9854/42 

32 mm 

The three-tone electronic chime Ref. 9854/42 can be used in door 

phone/video door phone systems either with electronic or with 

traditional call. It can be used also in 1+1-wire door phone systems as 

well as in 5-wire video systems. 

It does not need to be fed since it is supplied with a 9V nonrechargeable 

battery. During the call a three-tone note is generated in 

sequence; this note can be turned into one-tone or two-tone note by 

means of internal jumpers. 

80 mm 

INSTALLATION 




RINGER 

Ref.9854/42 

DOOR PHONE SYSTEM WITH TRADITIONAL CALLING 


The maximum number of ringers which can be connected in parallel 

depends on the PS signal. Consider that two Ref. 9854/42 three-tone 

supplementary ringers draw as much as a door phone or video door 

phone speaker. 

INSTALLATION 

Fit a 9V (MN1604/6LR61) battery in the ringer. The ringer is equipped 

with two jumpers indicated by W1 and W2. Remove one of the two 

jumpers for two-tone or one-tone operation as shown in the following 

table: 

SOUND TYPE 

JUMPERS 

W1 W2 

THREE-TONE X X Both jumpers inserted 

TWO-TONE X 

Jumper W1 only: remove W2 

ONE-TONE 

X Jumper W2 only: remove W1 

RINGER 

Ref.9854/42 

4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC CALLING AND 

COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE 




SC101-0989D 


4+n DOOR PHONE SYSTEM WITH ELECTRONIC CALLING 


RINGER 

Ref.9854/42 

RINGER 

Ref.9854/42 




RINGER 

Ref.9854/42 


ADDITIONAL ELECTRONIC BUZZER 

Ref. 9854/52 

Device Ref. 9854/52 can be used as an additional call device in the 

“4+n” wire systems and coax wire systems shown in the fi gure. 


The electronic buzzer employs a self-oscillating piezoceramic 

membrane with the following characteristics: 

• Frequency 1800-2000Hz modulated on a frequency network halfwave. 

• Call voltage 12Vac or 12Vdc 

• Intake 15mA @ 12Vdc 

60mA @ 12Vac 

• The device also works at 6-12Vdc: in this case, connect + polarity to 

the corresponding terminal. 

INSTALLATION 

Follow the instructions below to install the buzzer Ref. 9854/52: 

• Fasten the printed circuit onto the base in the area shown using the 

two screws provided. 

• Make the connections as shown in the wiring diagrams in the box. 


Mod. 1130 

ADDITIONAL ELECTRONIC BUZZER Ref. 9854/52 


ATLANTICO 


INSTALLATION 


SENTRY+/ARTICO 

Important: Fit a 47Ω3W resistor (provided) for relay switching in 

parallel to relay powered devices Ref. 788/51 and Ref. 788/58. 

Use ringer Ref. 9854/40 instead of buzzer Ref. 9854/52 if the 

installation position is used by other devices. 


+/~ Power (positive) 

-/~ Power (negative) 


ATLANTICO 

ADDITIONAL ELECTRONIC BUZZER Ref. 9854/52 


UTOPIA 


SCAITEL 



sec.3c −−−− 5

ADD-ON DEVICE FOR CALL AT FLOOR Ref. 9854/53 

ADD-ON DEVICE FOR CALL AT FLOOR 

Ref. 9854/53 

The call at fl oor function can be obtained powering the Ref. 9854/53 

device with an ac or dc voltage. 

NOTE: the AC power supply may cause buzzing on the conversation 

channel in particular in the case of systems over high distances. 

In this case, replace the AC power supply with a DC 

power supply. 

INSTALLATION 


Mod. 1130 

(∗) 

ADD-ON DEVICE FOR CALL AT FLOOR Ref. 9854/53 


ATLANTICO 

(∗) 

INSTALLATION 

Connect to terminal 

Door phones 4+n systems 6 

1+1 systems 1 

Video door phones Coax cable systems 6 

5 wire systems R1 

TYPE OF NOTE 

SETTING (‘JP1’): 

JP1 

JP1 

NOTE 

"A" 

NOTE 

"B" 

JP2 

JP2 

JP2 

JP2 

SOUND LEVEL 

SETTING (‘JP2’) 

LEVEL 

1 

LEVEL 

2 

LEVEL 

3 

LEVEL 

4 

MAX 

MIN 


UTOPIA 


SCAITEL 

(∗) 

(∗) 




ATLANTICO 


(∗) 

Connect the terminals as follows after fastening the device with the 

screws provided as shown in the fi gures above: 

CH Power positive from the door phone system 

CP+ 

} Floor call button 

CP- 

(∗) Additional fl oor call devices Ref. 9854/53 are provided with a 

connection wire which must be connected as shown in the table: 

(∗) 


WIRELESS RINGERS Mod. MISTRAL 


The main features of the Mistral wireless ringer system are the 

following: 

• No connection cables between the devices (simple installation with 

no masonry works). 

• Maximum call signal range up to 200m. 

• Possibility of interfacing with a max. of 20 call buttons. 

• Possibility of repeating the call of a door phone or video door phone 

system. 

• Sound and sight (fl ash) call indicator for the deaf. 

• Possibility of cutting off the call tone – MUTE function (only on 

models with call indicator light). 

• Choice of the call tone to differentiate the point from which it has 

been received. 

• Alarm function at the maximum volume for emergency call (pressing 

the call button for three seconds). 

• Power supply from batteries, from power supply unit or from the 

electricity mains according to the models. 

• Automatic programming. 

• Transmitter push-button with large-sized name tag. 

• Possibility of always having the transmitter button within reach 

thanks to the clip for hooking to the belt or lapel. 

• Button called indicator light. 

• Call to matrix. 

Ref. 4311/2-/3 Ref. 4311/2-/3 

1 

• Range multiplier. 

2 

Ref. 4311/2-/3 

3 

Ref. 4311/2-/3 

Ref. 4311/11 Ref. 4311/11 

Ref. 4311/11 

Ref. 4311/2 

Sch. 4311/11 Ref. 4311/2 

Ref. 4311/11 

4 


The line of Mistral devices makes it possible to obtain different 

confi gurations and performance levels depending on the various 

devices that are used: 

Ref. 4311/2 Ringer with a range of up to 200m, fl ash and powering 

by batteries or power supply unit 

Ref. 4311/3 Ringer with a range of up to 150m, fl ash and 230Vac 

powering from the electricity mains 

Ref. 4311/11 Transmitter button 

Ref. 4311/13 Wireless call repeater 

Ref. 4311/701 Kit formed of call repeater Ref. 4311/13 and ringer 

with a range of up to 100m with batteries 

Ref. 4311/702 Kit formed of push-button Ref. 4311/11 and ringer 

with a range of up to 100m with batteries 

Ref. 4311/703 Kit formed of push-button Ref. 4311/11 and ringer 

Ref. 4311/2 

200m 

1 

Ref. 4311/11 

2 

200m 

3 

200m 

Ref. 4311/2 

The most frequent applications that can be obtained with the devices 

of the Mistral series are the following: 

• Call from radio push-button Ref. 4311/11 on one or more ringers. 

Ref. 4311/2-/3 

Ref. 4311/2-/3 

Ref. 4311/2-/3 

• Call repetition of a door phone or video door phone system. 

Video door phone 

Ref. 4311/2-/3 

Ref. 4311/13 

1 

1 

2 

3 

Door phone 

Ref. 4311/2-/3 

Ref. 4311/11 

• Call from several push-buttons Ref. 4311/11 with one ringer. 

Ref. 4311/2-/3 

1 

Ref. 4311/11 

2 

Ref. 4311/11 

3 

Ref. 4311/11 

Ref. 4311/13 

Push button 

with outdoor phone 

2 



sec.3c −−−− 7


ELEMENTS INFLUENCING RANGE 

MISTRAL 12Vdc/ac RADIO RINGER WITH FLASH Ref. 4311/2 



The maximum ranges stated for the various devices refer to free air, 

any obstacles, depending on the material with which they are made, 

may cause the percentage reductions given in the following diagram: 


WALL 

100% 

c.a. 80% 

c.a. 60 - 70% 

c.a. 50 - 70% 

c.a. 30 - 50% 

c.a. 20 

< 10% 

1 2 

50% x 80%= 40% 

1 

2 

FREE FIELD 

WOOD, GLASS 

METAL + PLASTER WALL 

STONE 

CONCRETE STRUCTURE 

CONCRETE COVERING 

METALLIC FABRIC 

Wall 1= STONE 

Wall 2= GLASS 

MISTRAL 12VDC/AC RADIO RINGER WITH 

FLASH Ref. 4311/2 

The main characteristics of this ringer are: 

• Range up to 200m in free air with possibility of extension. 

• Sound and light indicator following a call from a remote device. 

• 6 different call tones and different transmitter and receiver 

confi guration possibilities. 


• Possibility of interfacing with a maximum of 20 transmitters. 

• Alarm function. 

• Power supply with four, 1.5V LR14/C batteries or with an external 

power supply unit. 


WALL 

WALL 

Total range= 50% x 80%= 40% 

Supply voltage: 

8 ÷ 12Vdc/ac 

Working uptake: 0,5A 

Transmission frequency: 

868,35MHz 

Dimensions (L x H x P): 

115 x 150 x 40mm 

Max. volume: 

86dB (A) 

Working temperature range: +5 ÷ 40°C 

INSTALLATION 

Hang the product using hole A or fasten it on a fl at wall with screws 

and plugs in holes B. 

A 

82,5mm 


B 

60mm 

Install the batteries (not provided) or connect the device to the 

electricity mains with an 8 to 12Vdc/ac 0.5A power supply unit; for the 

second solution it is possible to use the =/~ and 8/12V terminals or the 

side socket. 

The device must not be exposed to splashes of water. 

B 


Volume 


MISTRAL 230Vac RADIO RINGER WITH FLASH Ref. 4311/3 

Flash 

Volume 

regulation 

MISTRAL 230VAC RADIO RINGER WITH FLASH 

Ref. 4311/3 


=/~ Power voltage input 

8/12V Power voltage input 

V (*) Supply voltage positive for transmitter Ref. 4311/11 

C (*) Call signal for transmitter Ref. 4311/11 

0 (*) Supply voltage negative for transmitter Ref. 4311/11 

(*) Connect only to obtain the call multiplier function. 

PROGRAMMING 

PRESS T1 

> 3sec: 

LEARN 

> 10 sec: 

CLEAR 

T1 

PRESS T2 

< 1sec: 

MELODY 

< 3sec: 

MUTE 

T2 

To allow conversation between the transmitter and the ringer, the 

following programming procedure is necessary: 

• Press button T1 for three seconds until the green led lights up. 

• Press the transmitter call button. 

• The ringer plays a melody to confi rm that the call has been made 

and the green led turns off. 

• If no transmitter has been identifi ed within 1 minute the green led 

starts to fl ash. In this case, the procedure needs to be repeated. 

NOTE: to cancel all the ringer programmings keep button T1 pressed 

for over 10 seconds. 

T1 T2 

T1 

T2 

Terminal 

Batteries 

space 

The main characteristics of this ringer are: 

• Range up to 150m in free air. 

• Sound and light indicator following a call from a remote device. 





• Alarm function. 

• Call disabling simply pressing a button. 

• Ease of installation directly on Schuko socket. 



230Vac 50Hz 


868,35MHz 


127 x 61 x 45mm 

Max. volume: 

86dB (A) 


INSTALLATION 


CALLING TONES 

NOTE: the required melody is assigned to the transmitter that made 

the last call. 

To change the call melody, proceed as follows: 

• Open the receiver. 

• Send a call from a remote device. 

• Press button T2. 

• At every press a different melody is proposed (the same melody can 

be selected without fl ash or with fl ash). 

• Adjust the volume turning the red wheel (the ALARM signal is heard 

at maximum volume regardless of volume adjustment). 

• Close the device. 

MUTE FUNCTION 

To cut off the ringer and the fl ash, press button T2 for over three 

seconds. 

Switch on again by pressing button T1 or T2 briefl y. 

ALARM FUNCTION 

If the transmitter button is pressed for more than 3 seconds, the 

ALARM tone is emitted from the receiver. 

NOTE: the alarm signal will not be generated in a connection with call 

multiplier function; in this case the melody set will be heard. 

The alarm function can be inhibited removing the specifi c bridge on 

transmitter Ref. 4311/11. 

Install the device on a Euro-Schuko socket. 

NOTE: installation of the ringer on vertical sockets might reduce the 

reception range. 


PROGRAMMING 



• Press the left-hand side of the rocker button on the front for three 

seconds until the green led lights up. 






NOTE: to cancel all the ringer programmings press the left-hand side 

of the rocker button on the front for over 10 seconds. 

CALLING TONES 





• Press the right-hand side of the rocker button on the front. 

• At every press a different melody is proposed (the same melody can 

be selected without fl ash or with fl ash). 



sec.3c −−−− 9


MISTRAL TRANSMITTER PUSH-BUTTON Ref. 4311/11 


MUTE FUNCTION 

To cut off the ringer and the fl ash, press the right-hand side of the 

rocker button on the front for over three seconds. 

To re-enable normal operation of the ringer and fl ash, briefl y press the 

button again. 




La funzione di allarme può essere inibita rimuovendo l’apposito 

ponticello presente sul trasmettitore Ref. 4311/11. 

MISTRAL TRANSMITTER PUSH-BUTTON 

Ref. 4311/11 

The transmitter push-button Ref. 4311/11 can send a radio call signal 

to all ringers of the Mistral series. 

The main characteristics of this device are: 


• Possibility of interfacing with an unlimited number of ringers of the 

Mistral series. 


• Power supply with one, 12V A23 battery or with an external power 

supply unit. 

• Call indicator light. 

• Alarm activation function. 

• Possibility of installing a clip for hooking to the belt or lapel. 



6 ÷ 12Vdc 

Working uptake: 

35mA 


868,35MHz 


97 x 36 x 18mm 

Working temperature range: 15 ÷ 50°C 

INSTALLATION 

• Slacken the screw on the side face next to the button. 

• Fasten the button base using screws and plugs drilling the plastic 

base. 

• Take out the name tag through the slit in the seal. 


• Write the name on the tag. 

• Put the tag back in place. 

• Close the button tightening the screw. 


0 Power negative 

C Call signal input from other devices 

V Power positive 

NOTE: if the push-button is powered by an external power supply unit 

or connected to a ringer, the battery needs to be removed. 


Volume 


MISTRAL 12Vdc/ac RADIO RINGER KIT WITHOUT FLASH 

FITTING THE ADDITIONAL CLIP 

• After opening the push-button, remove the seal in the rear part of 

the transmitter. 

• Fit the clip on the rear part and fasten it using the screw provided. 

• Fit the cover. 

EXAMPLES OF CONNECTION 

Connection in parallel with a ringer Ref. 9854/40 

Ref.4311/11 

BUTTON 

RADIO 

~ 

12 

~ 

Ref.9854/40 

RINGER 

0 

C 

V 

button NA 

Connection to a call button with no potential 

Ref.4311/11 

BUTTON 

RADIO 

0 

C 

V 

Connection as transmission distance multiplier 

Ref.4311/2 

RINGER RADIO 

SC101-1320 

MAINS~ 

~ ~ ~ ~ 

0 12 

TRANSFORMER 

Ref.9000/230 

button NA 

MISTRAL 12Vdc/ac RADIO RINGER KIT 

WITHOUT FLASH 

The following kits are available: 

• With 12Vdc/ac wireless ringer and push-button Ref. 4311/702 

• With 12Vdc/ac wireless ringer with call repeater Ref. 4311/701 

The main characteristics of this kit are: 


• Sound indicator following a call from a remote device. 





• Power supply with four, 1.5V LR14/C batteries. 



868,35MHz 


115 x 150 x 40mm 

Max. volume: 

86dB (A) 


RINGER INSTALLATION 

Hang the product using hole A or fasten it on a fl at wall with screws 

and plugs in holes B. 

A 


=/~ 

8/12V 

V 

C 

0 

82,5mm 

B 

B 

60mm 


Ref.4311/11 

BUTTON 

RADIO 



The alarm function can be inhibited removing the specifi c bridge on 

transmitter Ref. 4311/11. 

0 

C 

V 

Alarm 

cut-off 

bridge 

Install the batteries (not provided). 


PRESS T1 

> 3sec: 

LEARN 

> 10 sec: 

CLEAR 

T1 

PRESS T2 

< 1sec: 

MELODY 

< 3sec: 

MUTE 

T2 

T1 

T2 

Volume 

regulation 

T1 

T2 

Batteries 

space 



sec.3c −−−− 11

WIRELESS CALL REPEATER Ref. 4311/13 

PUSH-BUTTON INSTALLATION 

Only for kit Ref. 4311/702. 

• For push-button connection and installation refer to the paragraph 

concerning the Mistral Transmitter Push-button Ref. 4311/11. 

CALL REPEATER INSTALLATION 

Only for kit Ref. 4311/701. 

• For call repeater connection and installation refer to the paragraph 

concerning the call repeater Ref. 4311/13. 

PROGRAMMING 



• Press button T1 for three seconds until the green led lights up. 






NOTE: to cancel all the ringer programmings keep button T1 pressed 

for over 10 seconds. 

CALLING TONES 




MISTRAL 12Vdc/ac RADIO RINGER KIT WITH FLASH + PUSH-BUTTON Ref. 4311/703 



The Ref. 4311/13 can be used to radio transmit the call signal from a 

door phone or video door phone system to a Mistral 4311 receiver. 

The Ref. 4311/13 call repeater can be used in combination with the 

following ringers: 

• Ringer with a range of up to 200m, 

fl ash and powering by batteries or power supply unit Ref. 4311/2 

• Ringer with a range of up to 150m, 

fl ash and 230Vac powering from the electricity mains Ref. 4311/3 

The product can be connected in parallel or in alternative to the door 

phone or video door phone in all Urmet Domus system. 

The device is ready to be powered by a 9V battery (not included) which 

ensures system operation also in unfavorable conditions. The battery 

must be replaced approximately every two years or when the device 

performance degrades. 


• Open the receiver. 


• Press button T2. 

• At every press a different melody is proposed. 

• Adjust the volume turning the red wheel (the ALARM signal is heard 

at maximum volume regardless of volume adjustment). 

• Close the device. 


Power: 

alkaline 6LR61 9V battery 


868,35MHz 


85 x 85 x 30mm 



MUTE FUNCTION 

To cut off the ringer and the fl ash, press button T2 for over three 

seconds. 

To re-enable normal operation of the ringer and fl ash, briefl y press 

button T2 or T1. 




The alarm function can be inhibited removing the specifi c bridge on the 

transmitter push-button. 

MISTRAL 12Vdc/ac RADIO RINGER KIT WITH 

FLASH + PUSH-BUTTON Ref. 4311/703 

Kit Ref. 4311/703 comprises a ringer Ref. 4311/2 and a push-button 

Ref. 4311/11. Therefore, please refer to the corresponding paragraphs 

for the instructions. 

INSTALLATION 

Install the device away from sources of heat and in a place protected 

from humidity and water sprays. 

Be very careful when handling printed circuit components and 

particularly the metallic antenna during installation and programming. 

The metallic antenna must not be moved from its original position. 

Before fi nal installation of the device, make a test call to check that the 

radio signal is correctly picked up by the receiver. 

• Open the product using a screwdriver as a lever in the points shown 

(A). 

• Using the bolts and holes provided (B), fasten the product near the 

door phone/video door phone or in a position where the connection 

wires of the device it can be intercepted. 

A 


B 

D 

C 



WITH TRADITIONAL CALL SYSTEM 

KIT WITH 2 WIRES 

7 

11 

Cm 

C+ 

C- 

S+ 

FROM RISING COLUMN 

Ref.4311/13 


B 

S+ 

S- 

• Connection to the terminal board should be made as shown below 

depending on the various types of system. Do not disconnect the 

2-way battery cable from the terminal board. 

• Connect the battery (D). 

• The signal can be sent to the receiver during programming by 

pressing the button (C) on the printed circuit. The indicator LED will 

start blinking. 

• For programming the receiver, refer to the wireless ringer instruction 

paragraph. 

EXAMPLES OF DOOR PHONE SYSTEM CONNECTION 

WITH 4+N ELECTRONIC CALL SYSTEM 

CA 

6 

SC101-1317A 

EXAMPLES OF VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM CONNECTION 

WITH COAXIAL CABLE 

CA 

R1 

Cm 

C+ 

C- 

S+ 


Ref.4311/13 

SV102-3280 

Ref.4311/13 

Cm 

C+ 

C- 

S+ 

Ref.4311/13 

Cm 

C+ 

C- 

S+ 

WITH 1+1 ELECTRONIC CALL SYSTEM 

1 

2 


Ref.4311/13 

Cm 

C+ 

C- 

S+ 


WITH 5 WIRES 

CA 

R1 


Ref.4311/13 

Cm 

C+ 

C- 

S+ 




sec.3c −−−− 13

THREE-TONE GONG Ref. 1132/54 


The Ref. 1132/54 device makes it possible to convert the normal call 

signal into a three-tone Gong to be sent to the loudspeaker of the door 

phone. 

This device requires a power supply of 12Vdc that can be provided by 

the extra power supply Ref. 1090/850. An extra wire must therefore be 

provided in the installation. 

For insertion inside door phone proceed as follows: 

• Screw the printed circuit to the base in the area indicated using the 

two screws a and b provided. 

• Make the connections following the instructions given in the 

installation diagrams. 




a 


ATLANTICO 

b 



a 

b 

No-load absoption: 5µA 

During call: 

170mA @ 15Vcc 

140mA @ 12Vcc 


SCAITEL 


ATLANTICO 

NOTE: the three-tone gong may be installed only in door phones and 

video door phones for “4+n” wire and coax wire installations 

shown in the fi gures above. 

Obviously, it cannot be installed if other devices occupy the 

installation position. 

a 

a 

b 

b 


UTOPIA 


a 

b 


SECTION 4 

(REV.D) 

POWER UNITS 

RELAY DEVICES 

VARIOUS DEVICES 


INTRODUCTION POWER UNITS FOR DIN BAR ASSEMBLY 2 

Ref. 786/11 - 786/12 DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT 

WITH CALL TO FOUR SPEAKERS 3 

DOOR PHONE POWER SUPPLY WITH 

DOUBLE CALL TONE GENERATOR AND 

TIMED RELAY FOR DOOR OPENING Ref. 786/13 4 


MONOSTABLE RELAY BOX WITH 

2 COMMUTATION Ref. 788/52 14 

AUTOMATIC SWITCHING DEVICE 

ON 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR SETS Ref. 788/54 15 

DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC SWITCHING 

ON 2 PUSH BUTTON PANELS Ref. 788/51 16 

DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT WITH 

2 NOTE GENERATOR AND RELAY Ref. 786/15 5 

POWER UNIT FOR 1-WIRE SWITCHBOARD Ref. 786/3A 6 

POWER UNIT WITH BOOSTED NOTE GENERATOR Ref. 786/4 6 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY Ref. 789/5B 7 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY 110/230Vac Ref. 789/6B 8 

DEVICE WITH IMPEDANCEFOR INTERCOM Ref. 789/51 9 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY 

FOR ADDITIONAL MONITOR Ref. 789/2 9 


FOR 3 ADDITIONAL MONITORS Ref. 789/3 10 


FOR 3 ADDITIONAL MONITORS Ref. 789/4 10 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY 50VA Ref. 789/1 11 

DISTRIBUTOR POWER UNIT Ref. 1090/850 12 

SAFETY TRANSFORMER Ref. 9000/230 12 

DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC SWITCHING 

ON 4 PUSH BUTTON PANELS Ref. 788/58 16 

SWITCHING RELAY DEVICE Ref. 788/30 17 

MINIATURE CALL REPEATER 

AUXILIARY RELAY Ref. 788/22 17 

VIDEO SWITCH 4 IN -1 OUT Ref. 1038/69 18 

4-OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION BOX Ref. 955/40 19 

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR Ref. 1794/4A 20 

LOCK RELEASE TIMER Ref. 1032/81 21 

12Vdc VOLTAGE ADAPTER FOR 

SECONDARY CAMERA Ref. 1840/44 22 

POWER LINE PROTECTION 

DEVICE 230Vac 4000VA Ref. 1332/85 22 

POWER LINE FILTER 230Vac 4000VA Ref. 1332/86 23 

POWER LINE PROTECTION DEVICE Ref. 1332/80 23 

MULTICORE CABLES 24 

SAFETY TRANSFORMER Ref. 9000/110 12 

“4+N” DOOR PHONE TONE GENERATOR Ref. 787/1 13 

“1+1” DOOR PHONE TONE GENERATOR Ref. 787/2 13 



sec.4 −−−− 1

INTRODUCTION POWER UNITS FOR DIN BAR ASSEMBLY 

INSTALLATION 

INTRODUCTION: POWER UNITS FOR DIN BAR ASSEMBLY 

POWER UNITS - RELAY DEVICES - VARIOUS DEVICES 

INTRODUCTION POWER UNITS FOR DIN BAR 

ASSEMBLY 

1 

18 

4 

Sch. 786/1A 

Urmet Domus power units are designed and constructed in compliance 

with CEI EN 60065:1994 (EN 60065: 1993) standards and with the 

essential requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/CEE, 93/68/ 

CEE and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336, for electronic 

devices connected to a network for domestic and general use. 

Dual class 2 isolation protection is employed. The device all carry IMQ 

marking. 

These power supplies have been constructed according to market 

requirements that tend towards centralization of electrical equipment 

in specifi c cabinets. 

The power units can be used to power door phone and video door 

phone systems with traditional door phones, i.e. with call to buzzer, 

and electronic call door phones. 

The protections against overloads and short circuits are not made with 

traditional fi lament fuses but with self-reset electronic fuses (PTC). 

NOTE: in case of short circuits or overloads, the protection circuit 

(PTC) is activated and the power supply is protected also 

during pemanent short circuits. 

To reset the power supply, resolve the reason of the short 

circuit and disconnect the feeding from the mains for at least 

one minute. 

The power units are designed and constructed to work in the following 

environmental conditions: 

Working ambient temperature range: - 5°C + 45°C 

Maximum humidity: 90% RH at 30°C 

Electrical connections are made using screw-on terminal board. 

The maximum cross-section area of the wires to be connected to the 


INSTALLATION 

Urmet Domus power units, relays and transformers listed in the table 

below must be fi tted on DIN 46277 compliant bars of the following 

dimensions (in mm): 

27 

35 

Products for DIN bar assembly are measured in terms of “modules”; 

one module corresponds to 18 mm in accordance with DIN 43880 

standards. 

4 

7 

DEVICE Ref. Nr. DIN 

modules 

Door phone system power units 

28VA power unit 

with call to 4 speakers (230Vac)............................... 786/11.............. 3 

28VA power unit 

with call to 4 speakers (110Vac)............................... 786/12.............. 3 

Power unit with double call tone generator 

and timed relay......................................................... 786/13.............. 6 

Power unit with 2 note generator and relay.............. 786/15.............. 6 

Power unit for 1-wire switchboard ........................... 786/3A ............. 7 

28VA door phone power unit with 

boosted note generator ........................................... 786/4................ 7 

Video door phone system power units 

38VA video power unit.............................................. 789/5B ........... 10 

38VA 110-230Vca video power unit ......................... 789/6B ........... 10 

Video power unit for 1 additional monitor ................. 789/2................ 7 

Video power unit for 3 additional monitors ............... 789/3................ 7 

110-230Vca video power unit for 

3 additional monitors ................................................ 789/4................ 7 

50VA video power unit.............................................. 789/1A ... 10 + 10 

Video distributor power unit ..................................... 1090/850.......... 4 

Transformers 

230V safety transformer ........................................... 9000/230.......... 3 

110V safety transformer ........................................... 9000/110.......... 3 

Tone generator 

Tone generator for door phones 

in 4+n wire systems.................................................. 787/1................ 4 

Tone generator for door phones 

in 1+1 wire systems.................................................. 787/2................ 4 

Relay devices 

Monostable relay box with 2 commutation ............... 788/52.............. 3 

Switching relay device.............................................. 788/30.............. 4 

Device for automatic switching 

on 2 push button panels ........................................... 788/51.............. 6 


on 4 video door unit.................................................. 788/54............ 12 


on 4 door unit............................................................ 788/58.............. 6 

Miscellaneous 

Device with impedance for intercom systems .......... 789/51.............. 2 

Electrical lock timer................................................... 1032/81............ 4 

Secondary camera voltage adapter.......................... 1840/44............ 2 

Power line protection device..................................... 1332/85............ 2 

Power line fi lter ........................................................ 1332/86............ 2 

Power line protection device..................................... 1332/80............ 2 

Note that the devices can be wall-mounted using two bolts (not 

provided). 

Side protections of the terminal board may be used for wall-mounted 

assembly; they can be eliminated for bar-mounted installations (in 

distribution panels). 


V 

D E 

~12 

~0 

-J 


V 

D E 

WITH CALL TO FOUR SPEAKERS 

61 mm 

54 mm 

(3 DIN modules) 

PRIM: 

230V~ 

(28VA) 

50/60HZ 

~230 0 

SEC: 

6V 0,20A 

12V~ 0,40A 

(12V~2Aint.) 

The 786/11 and 786/12 power units are used to power door phone 

systems with door unit and/or intercom systems. 

The “PS” output of this power unit is used to control up to 4 speakers 

in parallel and is protected from overloads. 

The voltage output by terminals ~0 and ~12, in addition to energising 

the electrical lock, can power the name tag circuits. 


Power supply: 230Vac 50-60Hz for Ref. 786/11 

110Vac 50-60Hz for Ref. 786/12 

Power: 

35W max 

Intake: 

max 150mA 

Output tone generator: 

8.0Vpp min 

(max four 45 Ω speakers in parallel) 

Call tone (PS): 

two-tone 

F1: 960 ÷ 1440Hz 

F2: 600 ÷ 900Hz 

Sweep: 

9,6 ÷ 14,4Hz 

Audio circuit power (+6, -6): 

0,12A @ 6Vdc 

Intercom connection power (+6, -J): 

0,12A @ 3,5 ÷ 6,5Vdc 

Name tag light power 

(~0, ~12): (up to ten Sinthesi 4 buttons modules, 

or 

up to two K-Steel 4 buttons modules, 

or 

up to two 3W bulbs) 

Electrical lock power (~0, ~12): 2,0A @ 12Vac intermittent 

Protection: 

Dissipated power after 1 working hour: 


WITH CALL TO FOUR SPEAKERS 

PS ~12 ~0 -J -6 +6 

Sch. 789/11 

90 mm 


INSTALLATION 

PTC 

4,2W (15 kJ) 

INSTALLATION 

This power unit can be fi tted on DIN bar or wall-mounted with screws 

and bolts with the specifi c 786/50 kit. 

PS -6 


0 Power supply input 

~230 Power supply input (230Vac) 786/11 only 

~110 Power supply input (110Vac) 786/12 only 

PS Output call tone generator 

~12 

~0 } Name tag light and electrical power output 

-J Output with impedance for intercom connection 

+6 Audio circuit power 

-6 Audio circuit reference earth 

Ref. 786/11-/12 

DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT WITH CALL TO FOUR SPEAKERS 



sec.4 −−−− 3

Ref. 786/13 

DOOR PHONE POWER SUPPLY WITH DOUBLE CALL TONE GENERATOR 

AND TIMED RELAY FOR DOOR OPENING 


INSTALLATION 

DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT WITH CALL TO FOUR SPEAKERS 


DOOR PHONE POWER SUPPLY WITH DOUBLE 

CALL TONE GENERATOR AND TIMED RELAY 

FOR DOOR OPENING Ref. 786/13 

61 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

The Ref. 786/13 power unit, characterised by slim mechanics and 

compact size, can be used to power 4+n wire door phone systems. 

This power unit provides the following performance: 

• Differentiated call tones from different panels thanks to a double 

tone generator with different call tone. 

• Operation of electrical lock or other electrical loads in times or pulse 

mode. 

• Electrical lock power. 

• Panel name tag light circuit power. 


108 mm 


Power supply: 

230Vac 50/60Hz 

Power: 

28VA 

Maw intake: 

150mA 

Out tone generator: 

8,0Vpp min. 

(max four 45Ω speaker in parallel) 

PS call tone: 

two tone 

F1: 960÷1140Hz 

F2: 600÷900Hz 

Sweep: 9,6÷14,4Hz 

PS2 call tone: 

two tone 

F1: 480÷600Hz 

F2: 300÷450Hz 

Sweep: 14,6÷19,4Hz 


0,12A @ 6Vcc 

Intercom connection power (+6, -J): 

0,12A @ 3,5÷6,5Vcc 


(~0, ~12): up to ten Sinthesi 4 buttons modules 

or 

up to two K-Steel 4 buttons modules 

or 

up to two 3W bulbs 

Electrical lock power (~0, ~12): 

2,4A @ 12Vac 

intermittent 

Max. relay contact power (SE1, SE2, SE3): 

5A @ 12Vac 

Relay timer: 

pulse or 2÷25 sec 

Protection: 

PTC 

Dissipated power after 1 working hour: 4,2W 

INSTALLATION 

The power unit must be installed inside a closed electrical panel and 

can be fastened to DIN bar (six 18 mm modules). 

Set the jumper to the “ON” position to enable the electrical lock timer 

function. 

TIMER AP 

Adjust the timer by means of the trimmer (Timer AP): minimum 2 sec. 

maximum 25 sec. 

The timer will be off when the jumper is in the off position and the 

electrical lock will be operated by the “AP” command as long as the 

respective door opener button is pressed. 


0 

} Primary power 230Vac 

~230 

ON 

PS Call tone generator output (standard) 

PS2 Call tone generator output (medium-deep) 

~0 


SE3 Timed relay NC contact 

SE1 Timed relay NA contact 

SE2 Timed relay common 

AP Door opener command 


+6 Audio circuit power 

-6 Audio circuit reference earth 

NOTE: the indications NO and NC refer to the device not powered. 


DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT WITH 2 NOTE GENERATOR 

AND RELAY Ref. 786/15 


INSTALLATION 

Ref. 786/15 

DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT WITH 2 NOTE 

GENERATOR AND RELAY Ref. 786/15 

61 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

The Ref. 786/15 power unit can be used to make automatic switching 

systems according to the call source: 

• Intercom with door unit. 

• Intercom with video door unit. 

• Two door units on door phone column. 

Furthermore, this power unit provides the following performance: 

• Differentiated call tones from different panels thanks to a double 

tone generator with different call tone. 

• Panel name tag light circuit power. 

• Electrical lock power. 


108 mm 


Power supply: 

230Vac 50/60Hz 

Power: 

28VA 

Maw intake: 

150mA 

Out tone generator: 

8,0Vpp min. 

(max four 45Ω speaker in parallel) 

PS call tone: 

two tone 

F1: 960 ÷ 1140Hz 

F2: 600 ÷ 900Hz 

Sweep: 9,6 ÷ 14,4Hz 

PS2 call tone: 

two tone 

F1: 480 ÷ 600Hz 

F2: 300 ÷ 450Hz 

Sweep: 14,6 ÷ 19,4Hz 

Audio circuit power (+, -): 

0,12A @ 6Vcc 

Intercom connection power (+, -J): 

0,12A @ 3,5÷6,5Vcc 



or 

up to two K-Steel 4 buttons modules 

or 

up to two 3W bulbs 

Electrical lock power (~0, ~12): 

2,4A @ 12Vac 

intermittent 

Max. relay contact power (1, 2, 3 or 4, 5, 6): 

2A @ 12Vac 

Max. relay contact power (7, 8, 9): 

5A @ 12Vac 

Protection: 

PTC 


INSTALLATION 

The power unit must be installed inside a closed electrical panel and 

can be fastened to DIN bar (six 18 mm modules). 


0 

} Primary power 230Vac 

~230 

~0 


PS Call tone generator output (standard) 

PS2 Call tone generator output (medium-deep) 

C2 

SN2 } Timed relay NC contact 

C1 

SN1 } Timed relay NA contact 

+ Audio circuit power 

– Audio circuit reference earth 


NOTE: the position of the contacts corresponds to non-energised 

relay state or energised state via sensor C2-SN2. 

DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT WITH 2 NOTE GENERATOR AND RELAY 



sec.4 −−−− 5

Ref. 786/3A 

Ref. 786/4 

POWER UNIT FOR 1-WIRE SWITCHBOARD Ref. 786/3A 

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER UNIT WITH BOOSTED NOTE GENERATOR Ref. 786/4 


POWER UNIT FOR 1-WIRE SWITCHBOARD 

POWER UNIT WITH BOOSTED NOTE GENERATOR 

POWER UNIT FOR 1-WIRE SWITCHBOARD 

Ref. 786/3A 

AVAILABLE 

TO END 

OF STOCK 

The Ref. 786/3A power supply unit is used only to power 

installations with electromechanical door phone switchboard of the 

Mod. 604-605-606 series. It does not have the tone generator output 

as, in these installations, only Mod. 1130 house phones of the System 

with conventional call with buzzer are used. 


Power supply: 

230Vac 

50/60Hz 

Power: 

28VA 

Secondaries: 15Vdc = 0,2A 

12Vca = 1,3A 

Protection: With PTC (*) 

Dissipated power after 1 average working hour: 4,2W 

(*) If the PTC protection is tripped due to overload, cut off mains 

voltage for at least 60” to reset. 

DIMENSIONS 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

126 mm 

Sch. 786/3A 

POWER UNIT WITH BOOSTED NOTE 

GENERATOR Ref. 786/4 

AVAILABLE 

TO END 

OF STOCK 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

Sch. 786/4 

126 mm 


This power unit replaces the integrated additional call device 

Ref. 787/4. 

The device, powered directly from the mains and bearing the EC and 

IMQ marks has been designed to perform the following functions in 

door phone and video house phones systems. 

• PS output: generation of the call tone for a maximum of 4 house 

phones (4+n type) with electronic short-circuit protection. 

• PS1 output: generation of the call tone for a maximum of 4 house 

phones (1+1 type) with electronic short-circuit protection. 

• SN output: activates any video power supply unit following a call on 

outputs PS or PS1. 

• 12Vac output for alternative calls (without activation on SN) with 

short-circuit protection. 

• 6Vdc output for separate powering of any loudspeaking unit with 

electronic short-circuit protection. 

• -J output for intercom systems (referred to the 6Vdc output) with 

electronic short-circuit protection. 

• Max. 2A capacity relay output with NO contacts closed during a call 

on PS or PS1 but not on 12Vac call. 

Note: the emission level of the call tone applied to each individual 

door phone is constant as the house phones in parallel vary 

and corresponds to the level currently applied on single house 

phones. 


Lenght: 

Width: 

Height: 

126mm (7 DIN 18mm modules) 

96mm 

75mm 


Power supply: 

110/230Vac 

50/60Hz 

Power: 

28VA max 

Output +6/-6: 6Vdc = 0,11A 

Output PS: F1: 1230Hz ± 20% 

F2: 760Hz ± 20% 

Sweep: 12Hz ± 10% 

Exit: +10Vpp ± 10% 45Ω Short-circuit protection 

45Ω x 4 parallel Short-circuit protection 

Output PS1: F1: 1230Hz ± 20% 

F2: 760Hz ± 20% 

Sweep: 12Hz ± 10% 

Exit: -10Vpp ± 10% 45Ω Short-circuit protection 

45Ω x 4 parallel Short-circuit protection 

Output ~12/~0: 

12Vac ± 10% 800mA max 

NO/C/NC output relay: 

Maximum switching voltage: 

30V 

Maximum switching current: 

2A 

Peak switching load: 

18VA 

Protection: With PTC (*) 

(*) If the PTC protection is tripped due to overload, cut off mains 

voltage for at least 60” to reset. 

Note: the loads indicated for different types of generated calls (PS, 

PS1, ~12) are reciprocally alternative can calculated on a 

maximum time of 1 minute. 

The performance of the power unit for door unit or for intercom 

systems (terminals +6, -6, -J) is alternative. 


VIDEO POWER SUPPLY Ref. 789/5B 


INSTALLATION 

Ref. 789/5B 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY Ref. 789/5B 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

The power supply Ref. 789/5B can only be used in video systems with 

electronic call. 

It can be used in 5 wire systems without coax cable, too. 

The video door phone power unit Ref. 789/5B was designed in 

compliance with safety standards CEI 12/13 and 64/8; it carries IMQ 

marking. 

The power supply is supplied with the timer which is adjusted on 50”; 

if you wish to change this time, please use the special control for 

changing from 45” to 180”. 

The “PS” call output can be used to control up to four speakers (video 

door phones or door phones in a coax system) in parallel. 

The power unit Ref. 789/5B can power up only one Artico video door 

phone or two Utopia, Atlantico or Scaitel video door phones. Use 

supplementary power units Ref. 789/2 or Ref. 789/3 according to the 

following table to obtain the same performance with Artico monitors or 

to connect more than one monitor in parallel: 

B 

180 mm 


Video door phone model 

Power unit 

789/2 789/3 

Utopia, Atlantico or Scaitel Max 1 monitor Max 3 monitors 

(after the second video door phone) 

Sentry+ or Artico Max 1 monitor Max 2 monitors 

(after the fi rst video door phone) 

0 

Timer adjust 

~230 

Mains voltage 

Adjust 18V 

R2 R2 R1 R1 +R +TC PS 

V D E 

Sch. 789/5B 

+6 -6 ~0 ~12 SE3 1/~ SE1 SE2 AP 


Power supply: 

230Vac 50/60Hz 

Power: 

45w 

Max. intake: 

200mA 


8,0Vpp min 

(max four 45Ω speakers in parallel) 


two-tone 

F1: 1063 ÷ 1438Hz 

F2: 638 ÷ 862Hz 

Sweep: 9,44 ÷ 14,16Hz 


0,20A @ 6Vdc 



or 

up to two K-steel 4 buttons modules 

or 

max two 3W bulbs 

Electrical lock power (~0, ~12): 2,0A @ 12Vca intermittent 

Not timed output (+R): 

0,11A @ 18,5Vdc 

Timed outputs (R2): 18Vdc 0,75A 

(+TC) 18Vdc 0,23A 

Timer: adjustable from 45” to 180” 


5A 

Protection: 

PTC 


INSTALLATION 

The housing may be used both in DIN bar mounting and wall mounting 

by means of screws and spacers; please take care of mounting it in dry 

and repaired environments. 


0 

} Power supply input 

~230 

+6 

-6 } Audio circuit power 

~0 

} Name tag light and electrical power output 

~12 

SE3 Electrical lock activation relay normally closed contact 

1/~ Reference earth (5-wire systems) 

SE1 Electrical lock activation relay normally open contact 

SE2 Electrical lock activation relay contact common 

AP Electrical lock activation command 

R2 Video door phone timed power 

R1 Reference earth 

+R Non-timed power (max. 0.11A) 

+TC Camera timed power 

PS Call tone generator Output 




sec.4 −−−− 7

Ref. 789/6B 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY 110/230Vac Ref. 789/6B 


INSTALLATION 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY 110/230Vac 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY 110/230Vac 

Ref. 789/6B 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

Power supply Ref. 789/6B can only be used in video phone devices 

with an electronic call system, that is to say with Utopia, Artico, 

Sentry+, Atlantico and Scaitel monitors. 

It can also be used in 5 wires systems without coax cable. 

The power supply is supplied with a timer fi xed at 50”; if needed, it can 

be changed by means of a control which allow a change from 45” to 

180”. 

The “PS” call output can be used to control up to four speakers (video 

door phones or door phones in a coax system) in parallel. 

Power supply 789/6B can feed one video phone only; in case of 2 

or more monitors working together, a supplementary power supply is 

needed for each additional monitor. 

Timer adjust 

B 

180 mm 


Adjust 18V 

R2 R2 R1 R1 +R +TC PS 


Power supply: 

110/230Vac 50/60Hz 

Power: 

38VA 

Max. intake: 

200mA 


8,0Vpp min 

(max four 45Ω speakers in parallel) 


two-tone 

F1: 1063 ÷ 1438Hz 

F2: 638 ÷ 862Hz 

Sweep: 9,44 ÷ 14,16Hz 


0,20A @ 6Vdc 



or 

up to two K-steel 4 buttons modules 

or 

max two 3W bulbs 

Electrical lock power (~0, ~12): 2,0A @ 12Vca intermittent 

Not timed output (+R): 

0,11A @ 18,5Vdc 


(+TC) 18Vdc 0,23A 



5A 

Protection: 

PTC 


INSTALLATION 

The container is suitable for both DIN rail mounting and wall mounting 

with screws and dowels and it must be installed in dry and protected 

environments. 

The device is foreseen for 110Vac mains feeding. 

If used with 230Vac mains feeding, connecting boards links must be 

respected as per Scheme A. 

SCHEME A 

P1 P2 P3 P4 

Sch. 789/6B 

0 ~ 

230 


P1 P2 ~ P3 P4 

+6 -6 ~0 ~12 SE3 1/~ SE1 SE2 AP 

Mains voltage (apply to scheme A) 

P1 P2 P3 P4 

0 ~ 110 


} 

P1 

P2 

Power supply input (apply to scheme A) 

P3 

P4 

+6 


~0 

} Name tag light and electrical power output 

~12 

SE3 Electrical lock activation relay normally closed contact 







+R Non-timed power (max. 0.11A) 




DEVICE WITH IMPEDANCEFOR INTERCOM Ref. 789/51 

TECHNICAL FEATURES - INSTALLATION 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY FOR ADDITIONAL MONITOR Ref. 789/2 


Ref. 789/51 

Ref. 789/2 

DEVICE WITH IMPEDANCEFOR INTERCOM 

Ref. 789/51 

75 mm 

36 mm 


Sch. 789/51 

103 mm 

In systems with a video power supply Ref. 789/5B or Ref. 789/6B, the 

device Ref. 789/51 permits to have the intercom service with automatic 

switching with the video outdoor station. 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY FOR ADDITIONAL 

MONITOR Ref. 789/2 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

Sch. 789/2 

126 mm 


The video power supply Ref. 789/2 is used to power an additional 

monitor in parallel to the main monitor. 

It may be used in installations with coax cable systems as well as in 

installations with 5 wires (without coax cable). 

DEVICE WITH IMPEDANCEFOR INTERCOM 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY FOR ADDITIONAL MONITOR 


Power supply: 

Max. intake: 

INSTALLATION 

6Vdc 

50mA 

The connections are made using screw type terminal strips. 

The maximum cross-section of the wires accepted by the terminal 

strips is 1.5 mm 2 . 


The device can be wall mounted, by means of the bracket supplied 

with, or installed on a DIN bar. To reach the connection terminals, lever 

as shown in the picture. 


-J Intercom connection output 

-6 

-6 } Reference earth 


Power supply: 

230Vac ± 10% 50/60Hz 

Max. intake: 

50mA 

Power: 

35W 

Outputs: 

(R2 out) 0,65A int. @ 18Vdc 

(RL) 0,02A @ 18Vdc 

(V2) 0,02A @ 18Vdc 

Protection: 

PTC 


INSTALLATION 

The power unit may be fi tted on DIN bar or on wall with two bolts. 

Connections are made using screw terminal board. 


strips is 1.5mm 2 . 


0 

} Mains power input 

~230 

V2 

R2in 

R1 

RL 

R2out 

Video door phone sub-power output 

Power activation input 

Reference earth 

Non-stabilised output 

Video power output 



sec.4 −−−− 9

Ref. 789/3 

Ref. 789/4 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY FOR 3 ADDITIONAL MONITORS Ref. 789/3 


VIDEO POWER SUPPLY FOR 3 ADDITIONAL MONITORS Ref. 789/4 


VIDEO POWER SUPPLY FOR 3 ADDITIONAL MONITORS 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY FOR 3 ADDITIONAL MONITORS 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY FOR 3 ADDITIONAL 

MONITORS Ref. 789/3 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

The video power supply Ref. 789/3 is used to power either 2 additional 

Mod. Artico or Sentry+ monitors or 3 additional Mod. Utopia, Atlantico 

or Scaitel monitors in parallel to the main monitor. 


Sch. 789/3 

126 mm 


Power supply: 

230Vac ± 10% 50/60Hz 

Max. intake: 

200mA 

Power: 

35W 

Outputs: 

(R2 out) 1,35A int. @ 18Vdc 

(RL) 0,02 A @ 18Vdc 

(V2) 0,02 A @ 18Vdc 

Protection: 

PTC 


VIDEO POWER SUPPLY FOR 3 ADDITIONAL 

MONITORS Ref. 789/4 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

The video power supply Ref. 789/4 is used to power either 2 additional 

Mod. Artico or Sentry+ monitors or 3 additional Mod. Utopia, Atlantico 

or Scaitel monitors in parallel to the main monitor. 

It may be used in installations with coax cable systems as well as in 

installations with 5 wires (without coax cable). 


Sch. 789/4 

126 mm 


Power supply: 

110/230Vac ± 10% 50/60Hz 

Power: 

38VA 

Outputs: 

(R2 out) 1,35A int. @ 18Vdc 

(RL) 0,02A @ 18Vdc 

(V2) 0,02A @ 18Vdc 

Protection: 

PTC 


INSTALLATION 

INSTALLATION 







0 

} Mains power input 

~230 

V2 

R2in 

R1 

RL 

R2out 

Video door phone sub-power output 

Power activation input 

Reference earth 

Non-stabilised output 

Video power output 





The device is foreseen for 110Vac mains feeding. 

If used with 230Vac mains feeding, connecting boards links must be 

respected as per Scheme A. 

SCHEME A 

P1 P2 P3 P4 

0 ~ 

0 ~ 110 


230 

P1 P2 P3 P4 

V2 Video door phone sub-power output 

R2in Power activation input 


RL Non-stabilised output 

R2out Video power output 

} 

P1 

P2 

Power supply input (apply to scheme A) 

P3 

P4 


VIDEO POWER SUPPLY 50VA Ref. 789/1 


INSTALLATION 

Ref. 789/1 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY 50VA Ref. 789/1 

DIMENSIONS (SINGLE DEVICES) 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

180 mm 

Lenght: 

Width: 

Height: 

180mm (10 DIN 18mm modules) 

90mm 

76mm 

A 

180 mm 

75 mm 

VIDEO POWER SUPPLY 50VA 

Power unit Ref. 789/1 may be used in electronic call systems and 

traditional call systems. 

These power units comply with CEI 12/13 5th edition - Dec. 1988 safety 

standing implementing European CENELEC HD 195 S6 standards. 

The video power unit Ref. 789/1 (110/230 V) consists of two units 

which may be connected using the specifi c wire and plugs: 

• The power unit. 

• The electronic unit. 


Power supply: 

110 - 230Vac 50/60Hz 

Power: 

50VA 

Intake: 

250mA 

Output note generator: 

8,0Vpp min. 120mA su 45Ω 


two-tone 

F1: 656 ÷ 984Hz 

F2: 405 ÷ 607Hz 

Sweep: 9,44 ÷ 14,16Hz 


0,20A @ 6Vdc 

Intercom connection power (+6J, -J): 

0,12A @ 6Vdc 

Electrical lock and current sensor circuit power 

(~0, ~12, ~A, ~B): 1,0A @ 12Vca 

2,0A @ 12Vca intermittent 


(+TC): 16Vdc 0,23A 


Max. relay contact power (SE1, SE2): 

5A 

Protection: 

PTC 


INSTALLATION 

Both units can be fi tted on a DIN bar (10 modules per unit) or on a wall 

by means of screws. 

The power unit must be fi tted in a dry, sheltered place preferably inside 

an electrical panel. 

Connect both transformers to the network voltage with the two-voltage 

power unit Ref. 789/1A. 

110 Vac 230 Vac 


} 

0 Mains power input 

110 Mains power input 110Vca 

230 Mains power input 230Vca 

+6 


~0 

~12 } Current sensor power input 


PS Call tone generator output 

SN Traditional call 12Vac output 



~A 

~B } Electrical lock relay power output 




-6 Electrical lock activation earth 


-J 

+6J } Output with impedance for intercom connection 



sec.4 −−−− 11

Ref. 1090/850 

Ref. 9000/230 - /110 

DISTRIBUTOR POWER UNIT Ref. 1090/850 

DISTRIBUTOR POWER UNIT Ref. 1090/850 


SAFETY TRANSFORMER Ref. 9000/230 - Ref. 9000/110 


SAFETY TRANSFORMER Ref. 9000/230 

DISTRIBUTOR POWER UNIT 

SAFETY TRANSFORMER 

45 mm 

63 mm 

69 mm 

65 mm 


64 mm 

Sch. 9000/230 

Ref. 1090/850 power units are used to power up to 4 video distributors 

Ref. 1794/4A at 15Vdc. 

Remove the jumper between terminals P1 and P2 to obtain 15Vdc 

voltage output. The output voltage will be 12Vdc if the jumper is not 

removed. 

83 mm 

PRI 

54 mm 



Power supply: 

230Vac ±10%, 50/60Hz 

Power: 

6W 

Intake: 

30mA 

Outputs: Vout= 12Vdc, 0,18A (with jumper P1 - P2) default 

Vout= 15Vdc, 0,18A (without jumper P1 - P2) 

Protection: 

PTC 

Weight: 

300g 

Temperature: -10°C ÷ + 40°C 


INSTALLATION 

Sch. 9000/230 

The Ref. 9000/230 URMET DOMUS transformer is suitable for DIN 

bar fi tting, the device was designed and made in compliance with 

the laws in force concerning isolation and safety transformers being 

protected from direct and indirect contact as required by the electrical 

system standards in force. It carries IMQ marking and respective 

certifi cations. 


The connections are made using screw type terminal strips. The 

maximum cross-section of the wires accepted by the terminal strips is 

1.5mm 2 . 


The power unit and circuit breaker may be fi tted on DIN bar or on wall 

with two bolts. 


~0 

} Mains 230Vac 

~230 

Vout 

} 12Vdc or 15Vdc power output 

Gnd 

P1 

} Jumper connection to change output voltage 

P2 


Power supply: 

Power: 

Intake: 

230Vac 50/60Hz 

18VA 

max 100mA 

Outputs (0, ~12): 

1,1A@ 12Vdc 

up to 20 Sinthesi 4 buttons modules, 

or 

up to 5 K-Steel 4 buttons modules, 

or 

up to five 3W bulbs 

Protection: 

PTC 


SAFETY TRANSFORMER Ref. 9000/110 

The Ref. 9000/110 safety transformers have the same characteristics 

as the Ref. 9000/230 model; the only difference concerns the power 

voltage (110Vac instead of 230Vac). 


“4+N” DOOR PHONE TONE GENERATOR Ref. 787/1 


“1+1” DOOR PHONE TONE GENERATOR “1+1” Ref. 787/2 


Ref. 787/1 

Ref. 787/2 

“4+N” DOOR PHONE TONE GENERATOR 

Ref. 787/1 

“1+1” DOOR PHONE TONE GENERATOR 

Ref. 787/2 

75 mm 

103 mm 

Sch. 787/1 

72 mm 


The tone generator Ref. 787/1 is used as a auxiliary call device 

in electronic call 4+n wire door phone and coax video door phone 

systems. 

The device acts as a primary call generator when used with 786 door 

phone system power units or 789 video door phone system power 

units. 

75 mm 

103 mm 

Sch. 787/2 

72 mm 


The Ref. 787/2 tone generator is used in 5-wire video door phone 

systems (*) and 1+1 wire door phone systems as additional fl oor call 

device. Floor calls are not possible with the handset off-hook. 


“4+N” DOOR PHONETONE GENERATOR 

“1+1” DOOR PHONE TONE GENERATOR 


Power voltage: 12Vac ±20% 

1 loudspeaker calling intake: 250mA @ 12Vac 

Stand-by intake: 

20mA @ 12ac 

Call tone: 

Two tone 

F1: 500Hz 

F2: 800Hz ± 20% 

Sweep: 

10 ÷ 12Hz 

Power voltage: 12Vac ± 20% 

1 loudspeaker calling intake: 250mA @ 12Vac 

Stand-by intake: 

20mA @ 12ac 

Call tone: 

Two tone 

F1: 820Hz 

F2: 500Hz ± 20% 

Sweep: 

10 ÷ 12Hz 



~0 

~12 } Power supply input 


SN Call tone Input 

1/~ 

~ } Power supply input 

Call tone generator Output 

PS1 (to be connected by means of calling buttons to the CA1 

terminal of door phones or video door phones) 

1/~ Reference earth 

(*) NOTE: this function is only available on devices with CA1 terminal. 

If it is not available, use an additional ringer for fl oor calls 

and connect as follows: 

Z 

R1 1/~ ~12 

Chime 

Ref. 9854/41 

K 

Power supply 

Ref. 789/5B 

Floor call 

button 

PS1 

1/~ ~ 

Tone 

generator 

Ref. 787/2 



sec.4 −−−− 13

~12 

~0 

-J 

Ref. 788/52 

MONOSTABLE RELAY BOX WITH 2 COMMUTATION Ref. 788/52 


INSTALLATION 

MONOSTABLE RELAY BOX WITH 2 COMMUTATION 

MONOSTABLE RELAY BOX WITH 2 

COMMUTATION Ref. 788/52 

This device can be used as a call repeater and for operating electrical 

loads such as, for example, supplementary lights for using cameras 

independently from the door panels. 


Power supply: 

Intake max: 

64 mm 

54 mm 


Max relay contact power: 

PS ~12 ~0 -J -6 

90 mm 

12Vac nominal 12Vdc; 18Vac; 18Vdc 

40mA @ 12Vac 

60mA @ 18Vac 

100mA @ 12Vdc 

150mA @ 18Vdc 

5A @ 100V 

The relay is equipped with two exchange contacts able to drive circuits 

with voltages not exceeding 100V and maximum currents of 5A. 

(15) 

12~ 

Terminal C must be used to energise the relay in 1+1 wire door 

phone systems, 5-wire video door phone system and traditional call 

systems. 

The CA terminal must be used to control the relay in 4+n door phone 

and coax wire video door phone systems. 

To operate additional lamps following the switching on of a video 

camera, terminals 14 and 15 need to be connected. 

INSTALLATION 

The device can be fastened to a DIN bar or bolted to the wall. 


C 

CA 

0~ 

6 

2 

(14) 

PS -6 


AUTOMATIC SWITCHING DEVICE ON 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR SETS Ref. 788/54 


INSTALLATION 

Ref. 788/54 

AUTOMATIC SWITCHING DEVICE ON 4 VIDEO 

OUTDOOR SETS Ref. 788/54 

64 mm 

This relay box can be installed in 5-wire video systems as well as video 

systems with coax cable; it allows a single column to be connected up 

to 4 video stations, each one with its own push button panel. 

By adding a further relay box it is also possible to increase the 

connections up to 7 entries. 

During the call from any outdoor station, the called tenant will be 

connected to the calling push button panel, temporarily excluding the 

other outdoor stations from the service. 

Only the corresponding lock will be released by pressing the proper 

key. 

The device must always be powered at 12Vac. 



Intake: 

90 mm 

INSTALLATION 

Sch. 788/54 

216 mm 

(12 DIN modules to 18mm) 

12Vac 

100mA @ 12Vac 

The device can be DIN bar fi tted or wall fi tted using screws and bolts. 

• Inputs 

Each of the 4 inputs has the following terminals: 

~12 

} 12Vac output 

~0 

SE Electrical lock operation 

1 Audio input (from door unit speaker) 

2 Audio output (from door unit microphone) 

VE Video signal 


R1 Reference earth telecamera 


+6 

-6 } Outdoor station sound circuit power supply 

• Column 

9 Electrical lock operation command from apartment station 

6 Apartment station audio reference earth 

R2 Video door phone timer power output 

R1 Video door phone timed power reference earth 



2 Audio input (from door phone microphone) 

1 Audio output (from door phone speaker) 

AUTOMATIC SWITCHING DEVICE ON 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR SETS 





• Power 

~12 

} 12Vac input 

~0 

+6 

} Audio circuit power 

-6 

6i 

AP 

6u 

SE 

Massa per circuiti intercomunicanti 

Electrical lock activation command 

Output for intercom connection 

Electrical lock activation common 

GND Reference earth reset 

INH Input reset on input A 

~B 

~A } 12Vac power input 

+TC Camera timer power input 

R2 Video door phone timed power input 

R1 Video camera timed reference earth input 

C1 

} Activation current sensor input A 

SN1 

C2 

} Activation current sensor input B 

SN2 

C3 

} Activation current sensor input C 

SN3 

C4 

} Activation current sensor input D 

SN4 



sec.4 −−−− 15

Ref. 788/51 

Ref. 788/58 

DEVICE FOR AUTOM. SWITCHING ON 2 PUSH BUTTON PANELS Ref. 788/51 


DEVICE FOR AUTOM. SWITCHING ON 4 PUSH BUTTON PANELS Ref. 788/58 


DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC SWITCHING ON 2 PUSH BUTTON PANELS 

DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC SWITCHING ON 4 PUSH BUTTON PANELS 

DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC SWITCHING ON 2 

PUSH BUTTON PANELS Ref. 788/51 

61 mm 

90 mm 

The above mentioned device permits to connect a house phone 

column to two push button panels. 

Therefore, the most common application is in a building with two 

entrances each one equipped with a push button panel. 

Making a call from one of the two entrances, the user called will be 

connected to the calling panel, temporarily blocking out the other from 

the service. 

By then pressing the relevant button, you can control the opening of 

the single corresponding lock. 

The device must alwais be powered at 12Vac. 


108 mm 


Power voltage: 12Vac ± 10% 

Intake: 

100mA @ 12Vac 

Contacts can switch the currents shown in the following table: 

DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC SWITCHING ON 4 

PUSH BUTTON PANELS Ref. 788/58 

61 mm 

90 mm 

Ref. 788/58 relay device is used to connect one or more door phone 

groups to up to 4 electronic call or traditional call door units. 

Therefore, the most common application is in a building with more than 

2 entrances each one equipped with a push button panel. 

During the call from any outdoor station, the called tenant will be 

connected to the calling push button panel, temporarily excluding the 

other outdoor stations from the service. 

Only the corresponding lock will be released by pressing the proper 

key. 

The device must always be powered at 12Vac. 


108 mm 


Power supply: 12Vac ± 10% 

Intake: 

100mA @ 12Vac 


Contacts between terminals Max. current 

1-2-3 2 A 

4-5-6 1 A 

7-8-9 5 A 

10-11-12 1 A 

13-14-15 2 A 

The relay can be energised by powering terminals C1/SN1 or C2/SN2. 

The position of the contacts shown in the following fi gure corresponds 

to non-energised relay state or energised state via sensor C2/SN2. 

INSTALLATION 

The casing is made of soft extinguishing ABS plastic. 

Ref. 788/51 relay device can be fi tted on DIN bar or on wall with two 

bolts. 


The maximum cross section of the wires accepted by the terminal 

strips is 1,5mm 2 . 

INSTALLATION 

It can be mounted on DIN bars or to the wall by means of two screws 

and nogs. 


• Power 

~0 

~12 } 12Vac power input 

C2 

SN4 } Activation current sensor output IV 

C1 Activation current sensor common outputs I, II and III 

SN1 Activation current sensor output I 

SN2 Activation current sensor output II 

SN3 Activation current sensor output III 

• Inputs 

Each of the 4 inputs has the following terminals: 

2 Audio output (from door unit microphone) 

1 Audio input (from door unit speaker) 

AP Electrical lock operation 

- Door unit audio circuit power negative 

• Column 

2 Audio input (from door phone microphone) 

1 Audio output (from door phone speaker) 

AP Electrical lock operation command from apartment station 


SWITCHING RELAY DEVICE Ref. 788/30 


MINIATURE CALL REPEATER AUXILIARY RELAY Ref. 788/22 

INSTALLATION 

Ref. 788/30 

Ref. 788/22 

SWITCHING RELAY DEVICE Ref. 788/30 

MINIATURE CALL REPEATER AUXILIARY 

RELAY Ref. 788/22 

75 mm 

90 mm 

72 mm 


The Ref. 788/30 relay device replaces the Ref. 9330 relay and consists 

of a 12Vac relay equipped with 4 exchange contacts. 


60 mm 

Sch. 788/22 

CH- 0L C NC NA +L + CH+ 

50 mm 

Device Ref.788/22 can be used for the call repeat function in the 

following types of systems: 

• 4+n door phone system with electronic call 

• 4+n door phone system with traditional call 

• 1+1 door phone system with electronic call 

• 1+1 door phone system with traditional call 

• Coax video door phone system with electronic call 

• Coax video door phone system with traditional call 

• 5 wire video door phone system with electronic call 

• 5 wire video door phone system with traditional call 

15 mm 

SWITCHING RELAY DEVICE 

MINIATURE CALL REPEATER AUXILIARY RELAY 

Intake max: 

400mA @ 12Vac 

Max. relay contact power: 

5A @ 30Vdc 

Command: impulsivo max 2” 

(min 10,5Vcc/Vca max 20Vcc/Vca) 

Sensitivity: 

250mA min 

INSTALLATION 

It can be installed on a DIN bar or wall surface mounted using 2 screws 

and nogs. 




INSTALLATION 

In all other types of systems, simply connect the call signal. In this 

case, the device will close the relay contact, repeating the call pattern 

in time. In all cases, the device can be connected separately (i.e.not in 

parallel to the house phones/video house phones). 

The device can be fastened to the wall or to other devices by means of 

the two holes on the casing tables (screws not provided). 

Sch. 788/22 

DOOR PHONE UTOPIA 

Sch. 788/22 

Sch. 788/22 



sec.4 −−−− 17

Ref. 1038/69 

VIDEO SWITCH 4 IN -1 OUT Ref. 1038/69 


INSTALLATION 


SCAITEL 


ATLANTICO 

VIDEO SWITCH 4 IN -1 OUT Ref. 1038/69 

VIDEO SWITCH 4 IN -1 OUT 

Sch. 788/22 

Sch. 788/22 

118 mm 

114 mm 

52 mm 

The Ref. 1038/69 video switch is used to switch up to 4 coax video 

inputs on a single cyclic output. 

The user can cyclically switch the signal received from the monitor to a 

camera connected to the device (up to 4) by pressing a button. 

WIRING DIAGRAMS 

4+n door phone system with electronic call 

4+n door phone system with traditional call 

Coax video door phone system with electronic call 

Coax video door phone system with traditional call 

CA / 7 

Ref. 788/22 

CH+ 

NA 


Power voltage (+V, 0V): 

16 ÷ 25Vdc 

Intake in terms of unitary loads: 

10mA 

Maximum distance between button 

contacts and terminals (T, RES, 0V): 

300m 

Working temperature range: 

-5 ÷ +50°C 

Humidity: 90%UR a 30°C 

R1 / 6 

CH- 

C 

INSTALLATION 

1+1 door phone system with electronic call 

1+1 door phone system with traditional call 

5 wire video door phone system with electronic call 

5 wire video door phone system with traditional call 

The device can be wall-mounted using the screws provided. 


R1 / 1 

CA / 2 



Intake max: 

Max relay conctact power: 

Ref. 788/22 

CH+ NA 

CH- C 

12 ÷ 20Vdc 

50mA @ 12Vac 

1A @ 24dc 

Set the jumper on the device to the position shown in the table 

according to the number of cameras used: 

Nr. JP1 JP2 JP3 FUNCTION 

of cameras 

2 ON -- -- Video signal switch I1 ÷ I2 

3 -- ON -- Video signal switch I1 ÷ I2 ÷ I3 

4 -- -- ON(*) Video signal switch I1 ÷ I2 ÷ 

I3 ÷ I4 

(*) Factory presetting. 


4-OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION BOX Ref. 955/40 

Ref. 955/40 

4-OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION BOX Ref. 955/40 

28 mm 

64 mm 

95 mm 

The video house phones can be connected using distribution boxes at 

the fl oor, which are indispensable for distribution of the video signal. 

The Ref. 955/40 distribution box features one input, one thru type 

output and 4 outputs for branching towards the related video house 

phones. 

The device must be powered at 18 Vdc between terminals R1 and 

R2. 

Passing output 

(connect two 82 Ohm 

resistors if not used) 

4-OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION BOX 

2 x 82Ohm 1/4W 


RH (Not used) 

RG (Not used) 

RF (Not used) 

RE (Not used) 

0V Power input (ground) 

+V Device power input (positive) (+18Vdc) 

I1 Coax video door unit input 1 

V5 Video signal ground input (video door unit sheath 1) 







I5 

Coax video signal input (for cascade connection; 

de-energised passing through “U”) 


U Coax video signal output 

V5 Video signal ground output (sheath) 

TC4 Video door unit camera power output 4 

TC3 Video door unit 3 



R2 Camera power input 

T Button input 

0V Button ground 

RES Reset input 

Monitor of 

other 

distributor 

Monitor of 

other 

distributor 

R1 

R2 

B 

A 

R1 

R2 

A 

B 

AB R1 R2 

Output 

I 

II 

955/40 

III 

IV 

A 

B 

Input 

AB R2R1 

TC 

R2 R1 

R1 

R2 

A 

B 

R1 

R2 

Monitor of 

other 

distributor 

Monitor of 

other 

distributor 

POWER SUPPLY 



sec.4 −−−− 19

Ref. 1794/4A 

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR Ref. 1794/4A 


INSTALLATION - WIRING DIAGRAM 

VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR Ref. 1794/4A 


VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR 

62 mm 

29 mm 

90 mm 

To monitor or 

other 

distributors 

To monitor or 

other 

distributors 

To other 

distributors 

Ref.1794/4A 

To monitor or 

other 

distributors 

To monitor or 

other 

distributors 

The Ref. 1794/4A is used to distribute the video signal according to the 

various installation needs: 

• On several riser columns. 

• Across fl oors. 

This distributor, is used in coax systems. 

TC 

POWER SUPPLY 


Power supply: 

Intake without load: 

Input impedance: 

Output impedance: 

with 4 loads: 

15 ÷ 20Vdc 

25mA 

40mA 

75Ω 

75Ω 

NOTE: the unused video distributor outputs must not be closed by a 

75Ω resistor. 

INSTALLATION 


The video distributor can be wall-mounted by fastening the base with 

the bolts provided. 

The connections are made using screw-on terminal boards with 

clamps. Pre-cut slots in the cover walls are provided for passing 

wires. 

SETTING AND REGULATION 

For video distributors using output U5, remove the 75Ohm jumper 

JP1. 


U1 Video signal output 1 


E Video signal input 

U5 

Video signal output 5 

{ (only for other distributors) 




LOCK RELEASE TIMER Ref. 1032/81 



Ref. 955/40 

LOCK RELEASE TIMER Ref. 1032/81 

75 mm 

90 mm 

72 mm 


The Ref. 1032/81 devices are used to time the powering of an electrical 

lock as follows: 

a) With jumper AR to “NO” position: the timer will operate the relay 

output when external command “SE2” is received only for the time 

set on the potentiometer (TIME), regardless of whether the input 

signal continues or not. 

b) With jumper AR in “YES” position: timer will operate the relay 

output for the minimum programmed time: the output will remain 

active if the input signal “SE2” lasts longer than the programmed 

time. 

JUMPERS AND ARRANGEMENTS 

AR: possibility of recycle. 

AMCR: possibility of connecting the common wire of the relay. 

TIME: potentiometer for programming the delay of the activation of 

the output relay; the max. delay may be obtained by turning 

the potentiometer clockwise. 


CONNECTION SCHEME FOR ACTIVATION OF ELECTRIC LOCK 

WITH TIMER 

Use an additional power unit to power the lock when uptake of 200 mA 

from the system is not possible. 

LEGENDA 

A Video Power supply Ref. 798/5B 

B Timer Ref. 1032/81 

C Electric lock 

D Door release key 

E Auxiliary power supply Ref. 9000/230 

E 

B 

C 

4-OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION BOX 

Electrical locks can be: 

• Directly activated by capacitance discharge. 

• Activated by capacitance discharge and 150mA hold current. 

• Safety electrical locks. 

D 


Voltage on +24: 

22 ÷ 27Vdc 

Voltage on +12/~: 

10 ÷ 15Vdc/ac 

Continuous current from AP: 

125 ÷ 170mA 

Timing range: 1 ÷ 30Sec ±20% 

Functioning temperature: -1 ÷ 45°C 

Max. resistive commutable charge: 

10A with 24Vdc/10A 

with 120Vac 

Max. voltage for switching: 

240Vac/110Vdc 

Max. resistive commutable power: 1400VA with 240Vca/300W 

with 110Vdc 

Min. charge to apply: 

10mA with 5Vdc 

Maximum load at 12 Vdc: 

200mA 


+24 Voltage input 22-27Vdc 

+12/~ Voltage input 10-15Vdc o 10-15Vac 

-/~ Common wire 

-/~ Common wire 

SE2 

Timer adjust input; its activation is possible by connecting 

it to the voltage common wire 

AP Door release output 

NO Contact normally open 

NC Contact normally closed 

C 

This one is common for NC/NO, it is normally connected 

to the voltage common wire with jumper AMCR 

DISPLAY 

LED LI (on): input SE2 is active 

LED LO (on): the relay output is active 

A 

A 

CONNECTION SCHEME FOR ACTIVATION OF SECURITY 

ELECTRIC LOCK 

Voltage with separated security power supply. 

LEGENDA 

A Video Power supply Ref. 798/5B 

B Timer Ref. 1032/81 

C Electric lock 

D Door release key 

E Security power supply 12 Vdc/ac or 24Vdc 

D 

B 

E 

C 



sec.4 −−−− 21

Ref. 1840/44 

Ref. 1332/85 

12Vdc VOLTAGE ADAPTER FOR SECONDARY CAMERA Ref. 1840/44 

TECHNICAL FEATURES - INSTALLATION - WIRING DIAGRAM 

POWER LINE PROTECTION DEVICE 230Vac 4000VA Ref. 1332/85 


12Vdc VOLTAGE ADAPTER FOR SECONDARY 

CAMERA Ref. 1840/44 

POWER LINE PROTECTION DEVICE 230Vac 

4000VA Ref. 1332/85 

12Vdc VOLTAGE ADAPTER FOR SECONDARY CAMERA 

POWER LINE PROTECTION DEVICE 230Vac 4000VA 

75 mm 

36 mm 


Sch. 1840/44 

103 mm 

The adapter is used to reduce camera power voltage (18Vcc) supplied 

with power unit 789/5B or 789/6B at a voltage of 12Vdc. This device 

can be used to power the additional camera. 


103 mm 


36 mm 

90 mm 

This is a voltage surge varistor power line protection device.The device 

immediately trips to limit amplitude and preserve the devices installed 

downstream to the device in the presence of voltage surges generated 

by atmospheric events.Install a power line fi lter 230V 4000VA 

Ref. 1332/86 downstream to the power protection device to ensure 

better system operation. 

Level of protection: 

as per standard IEC 61643-1 and A1: class III with Uoc 6 kV. 

Power supply: 

18 ÷ 21Vdc 

Output: 12Vdc ±1% 

0,25A continuous 

0,3 A intermittent 

Power: 

3W max 

INSTALLATION 

The device can be installed on the wall with the racket supplied or on 

a DIN bar. 

Lever as shown in the fi gure to access the connection clips. 


Power protection with tripping tension ≥ 300 Veff. 

On two self-extinguishing DIN modules. 

Nominal voltage: 

Maximum voltage: 

Maximum current: 

Working frequency: 

Power: 

Temperature range: 

INSTALLATION 

230Vac 

255Vac 

20A 

50Hz 

4000VA 

-25°C +40°C 



maximum cross-section of the wires accepted by the terminal strips is 

1.5 mm 2 . 



MAINS 

COAX WIRE 

POWER SUPPLY 

Ref. 789/5B 

ADAPTER 

Ref. 1840/44 

w/b 

black 

SV102-2877A 

TV-CAMERA 

The device must be fastened on a DIN bar in a closed electrical 

panel. 

Check electrical connections before powering the circuit. 

Locate the phase wire with a power phase fi nder connected to terminal 

“1 ”, IN side. 

IMPORTANT 

The device must be protected by fi tting appropriate restricted earthfault 

protection with current fl ow equal to 18 A and differential switch 

with opening current equal to 30mA. The protection device must be 

connected to earth. Device effi cacy will be better at lower earth system 

resistance.For this reason,the system must comply with standards CEI 

64-8/1 V1 edition 01/2001 booklet 5902.Implement specifi cations in 

CEI 64-8/4 edition 01/1998 booklet 4134 on safety. 


N 

L 

EARTH 

MAIN ˜ 

2 

1 

Ref. 1332/85 

PROTECTION 

2 

1 

IN 

Ref. 1332/86 

FILTER 

2 

1 

1= PHASE 

OUT 

2= NEUTRAL 

EARTH 

N 

L 

UTILITY 


POWER LINE FILTER 230Vac 4000VA Ref. 1332/86 


POWER LINE PROTECTION DEVICE Ref. 1332/80 


Ref. 1332/86 

Ref. 1332/80 

POWER LINE FILTER 230Vac 4000VA 

Ref. 1332/86 

POWER LINE PROTECTION DEVICE 

Ref. 1332/80 

103 mm 


36 mm 

90 mm 

This is a two-cell,high-attenuation,one-phase fi lter for frequencies >0.1 

MHz active on common and differential mode interference.The device 

is intended to prevent the propagation of external radiofrequency 

interference on the power mains which could cause faults in the 

electrical and electronic devices connected to the mains.Install a 

power line protection device 230V 4000VA Ref.1332/85 upstream to 

the power fi lter to ensure better system operation. 


One-phase, two-cell, high-attenuation fi lter for 

common and differential interference f >0.1Mhz. 

On two self-extinguishing DIN modules. 

Nominal voltage: 

230Vac 

Maximum voltage: 

255Vac 

Working frequency: 

50Hz 

Attenuation: 

60 dB frequency 2 MHz 

Maximum current: 

20A 

Power: 

4000VA 

Temperature range: 

-25°C +40°C 

INSTALLATION 

The device must be fastened on a DIN bar in a closed electrical 

panel. 


Locate the phase wire with a power phase fi nder connected to terminal 

“1”, IN side. 

IMPORTANT 

The device must be protected by fi tting appropriate restricted earthfault 

protection with current fl ow equal to 18 A and differential switch 

with opening current equal to 30mA. The power fi lter device must be 

connected to earth.Filter effi cacy will be better at lower earth system 

resistance.For this reason,the system must comply with standards CEI 

64-8/1 V1 edition 01/2001 booklet 5902.Implement specifi cations in 

CEI 64-8/4 edition 01/1998 booklet 4134 on safety. 

Note: see power line protection wiring diagram Ref. 1332/85. 

75 mm 

36 mm 


Sch. 1332/80 

103 mm 

The power line protection device protects electronic devices in general 

- and telephone devices in particular - from power surges and 

interference on the 230V power line. 

The Urmet Domus protection device Ref. 1332/80 is equipped with a 

re-arming thermal switch. 

The presence of output voltage is indicated by a red warning light. 

The thermal switch trips and cuts off power to utilities in the presence 

of output current in excess of 2A (eff). The power warning light goes 

out and the re-arm button springs out from the casing. To re-arm the 

device, press the re-arm button until it clicks. Re-arming will not be 

possible in the presence of short-circuit or excessive output load. 

The device is built according to the following standards: 

CEI 103-1/12: Protection of indoor telephone systems. 

CEI 70-1: Degree of protection classifi cation for casings. 

The device is CE marked. 



Max Power: 

Temperature: 

Casing material: 

Humidity: 

INSTALLATION 

230Vac ± 10% 50/60Hz 

400VA 

-5 +45°C 

self-extinguishing plastic 

95% UR max 

The device may be fastened to the wall by means of the bracket 

provided or fi tted on a DIN bar. 

Lever as shown in the fi gure to access the connection terminals. 


maximum cross-section area of the wires to be connected to the 



Locate the live wire with a power phase fi nder and connected to 

terminal “L”. 

The device is equipped with a re-arming fuse which cuts off the circuit 

in the presence of overload or short-circuit in the utility circuit. 

Press the button on the top of the casing to re-arm the circuit. 

The red warning light will indicate the presence of network voltage. 

POWER LINE FILTER 230Vac 4000VA 

POWER LINE PROTECTION DEVICE 



sec.4 −−−− 23

MULTICORE CABLES 

8 WIRE PLUS COAX MULTICORE CABLE Ref. 7057/235 

14 WIRE PLUS COAX MULTICORE CABLE Ref. 7057/234 



IMPORTANT 

The ground terminal of the power line protection device must be 

connected to the electrical system ground. 

Device effi cacy will be better at lower ground system resistance. 

The system must comply with CEI 64-8/5, 10/1992, booklet 1920 

standards. 

Install in accordance with CEI 64-8/4 10/1992 booklet 1919 standards 

concerning safety matters. 

Be careful to connect the live and neutral wires correct to the respective 

terminals. 


GROUND 

Ref. 1332/80 

GROUND 

Both cables are subjected to dielectric rigidity test at approx. 2000 Vac 

voltage for 5 minutes among wires and wires and sheath. 

As regards fi re reaction, they are classifi ed as not fl ame propagating 

according to the Rules 20-35 (IEC 332-1). 

8 WIRE PLUS COAX MULTICORE CABLE 

Ref. 7057/235 

Used for connections between the power supply and riser, and for 

distribution to the fl oors. 

Composed of: 

• Coax cable. 

• Blue and red wires 1mm 2 (terminals R1 and R2). 

• Brown and white wires 0.8mm 2 (terminals 9, ...). 

• Light blue wire 0.5mm 2 (terminal 6). 

• White/green, grey and black wires 0.35mm 2 (term. CA, 2, 1). 

MAIN ˜ INTPUT OUTPUT 

UTILITY 

In any case, the section of the wires is in proportion to the system 

with a maximum distance of 100m between the power unit and the last 

monitor. The outside diameter of the cable is 15mm. It is supplied in 

reels of about 100m. 

14 WIRE PLUS COAX MULTICORE CABLE 

Ref. 7057/234 


Used for connections between the power supply and the video outdoor 

station. The number of wires are suffi cient for one-family systems (1 

monitor only). For system of a higher capacity, further relative single 

call wires are required. 

Composed of: 

• Coax cable. 

• Brown and green wires 0.8mm 2 . 

• Pink, blue, orange, violet, red, yellow wires 0.5mm 2 . 

• Light blue, grey, black, white, white/green, white/blue wires 

0.35mm 2 . 

In any case, the wire section is in proportion to the systems with a max. 

distance of 100m between the video outdoor station and the power 

unit. The outside diameter of the cable is 17mm. It is supplied in reels 

of about 100m. 


SECTION 5 

(REV.E) 

ONE-FAMILY 

AND TWO-FAMILY KITS 


‘AUDIO TWO’ DOOR PHONE KIT WITH SMYLE PANEL 

AND ATLANTICO DOOR PHONE 2 



AND UTOPIA DOOR PHONE 6 


AND FREE-HANDS DOOR PHONE 11 

2-WIRE ONE FAMILY VIDEO KIT 16 

ONE AND TWO-FAMILY VIDEO KIT Mod. 956 

WITH ARTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONE 23 


ONE-FAMILY AND TWO-FAMILY KITS 


sec.5 −−−− 1


AND ATLANTICO DOOR PHONE 

DEVICES - ACCESSORIES - SPARE PARTS 

TECHNICAL FEAUTURES - PANEL INSTALLATION 

‘AUDIO TWO’ DOOR PHONE KIT WITH SMYLE PANEL AND ATLANTICO DOOR PHONE 


‘AUDIO TWO’ DOOR PHONE KIT WITH SMYLE 

PANEL AND ATLANTICO DOOR PHONE 

The “audio two” door phone kit is used to make one-family door 

phone systems with electrical door lock release using only two wires to 

connect the door phone to the door unit. 

The following Audio Two door phone kits are available: 

• With plastic panel Ref. 1129/10 

• With zama vandal-proof panel Ref. 1129/21 

NOTE: the panels with plastic casing are provided with 35 x 56mm 

name tags; those with zama casing are provided with 15 x 

56mm name tags. 

A conversation can be established by picking up the door phone 

handset after receiving a call from the door unit. 

In addition to an auxiliary button for supplementary services (e.g. 

switching on staircase lights, operating electrical door locks, etc.), 

the door phone is equipped with a control for adjusting call volume. 

Maximum, minimum or mute volume can be selected. A red tab will 

appear on the right-hand side of the door phone to indicate that the call 

tone has been muted. 

An additional ringer (Ref. 9854/41) can be connected to the door 

phone. The additional ringer output level is fi xed and does not depend 

on the door phone ringing level setting. 

The volumes can be adjusted during installation by means of the 

loudspeaking unit controls. 

The name tag on the speaker is back-lit with 2 LEDs. 

The electric lock can be operated at the end of the conversation by 

pressing the button on the door phone. 

A mechanically released electric lock must be used (single pulse 

opening). 

The maximum distance between the transformer and the door unit 

must be less than 110m. 

DEVICES 

The base kit has the following devices: 

• Atlantico door phone with door opening button and 1 supplementary 

button. 

• Smyle Door speaker unit with one call button. 

• Power transformer 230/12Vac. 

ACCESSORIES 

The following accessories may be purchased separately: 

• Additional ringer Ref. 9854/41 

• Additional door phone buttons Ref. 1133/55 

• Tabletop installation support Ref. 1133/50 

• Supplementary door phone (6 wires) Ref. 1129/51 

PRI 

SPARE PARTS 

The following spare parts are provided for repairs: 

• Atlantico Door phone Ref. 1129/110 

• Door unit Ref. 1129/112 

• Transformer 230/12Vac Ref. 9000/230 


Power supply: 

230Vac ± 10% 50-60Hz 

Transformer output: 

12Vac (nominal) 

Transformer power: 

18VA max. 

Protection Electronic: electronic fuse PTC (*) 

Electrical lock: 

12Vac 

Power unit-door unit distance: 

Max. 110m 

Wire cross-section area: 

distance = 60m 0,5mm 2 


distance = 110m 1mm 2 

(*) Disconnect the main power for at least 60” to reset the power unit 

if the PTC trips due to overload or short-circuit. 

NOTE: do not use double telephone wires for connections. 



ø 4 mm 

• Extract the door unit from the base. 

2 −−−− sec.5 





• Fasten the base onto a fl at wall at the height shown in the fi gure 

using the bolts provided. 

• Adjust volume. Volume is calibrated to optimal values during 

production. Change the settings when needed only. 

NOTE: the panels with plastic casing may also be fi xed in a fl ushmounting 

box Mod. 503 as shown below. 

Mod. 503 

• Insert the door unit into the compartment in the based and connect 

the wires (it is advisable to have approximately 40-45mm of wire 

protruding from the wall). 

1,55 m ÷ 1,65 mm 

• Write the name on the name tag and insert in the housing. 

Rossi 



Rossi 

CLICK 



the support. 

CLICK 



sec.5 −−−− 3



APARTMENT STATION INSTALLATION 

TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION 


The handset connector telephone plug into the door phone base. 


To remove the door phone top, lever with the tip of a screwdriver in the 

area shown and remove it by turning it on the upper tabs. 

Use the holes on the base to fasten the door phone to the wall. Use 

the bolts provided with each device. 

NOTE: fasten the door phone to the call with the bolts provided for 

fl ush-mounting in Mod.503 boxes. 

1,55 m 

Mod. 503 

ADJUSTING THE CALL VOLUME 

MAX 

Maximun 

calling volume 

MIN 

Minimum 



Before connecting the transformer to the mains, disconnect the mains 

switch. 

Fit the protective cover on the network terminals after connecting the 

system. 

Disconnect the mains power supply for 60” to reset the transformer if 

the PTC thermal switch trips due to overload or short-circuit. 

Use lever “A” to remove the transformer fi tted on a DIN rail. 

Fitting to DIN rail 

Red 

MUTE 

No calling 

tone 



NO 

Wall fitting 

OK 

PRI 

A 

4 −−−− sec.5 






NOTE: a total of up to 5 devices (1 main door phone and 4 door phones Ref. 1129/51, or 2 door phones Ref. 1129/51 with 2 supplementary 

ringers Ref. 9854/41) may be installed. 

The supplementary ringers Ref.9854/41 must be connected to terminals S+, S-. The ringers connected to terminals S+ and S- of the main 

door phone are connected to the main door phone calling volume trimmer while the ringers connected to the supplementary door phones 

Ref. 1129/51 will always ring at the maximum possible volume. 

CONNECTION OF ONE FAMILY 2-WIRE AUDIO KIT WITH AN ADDITIONAL RINGER 

Transformer 

Mains~ 

12 

˜ ˜ 0 ˜12 

Additional 

ringer 

Ref.9854/41 

Door phone 

Ref.1129/110 

CONNECTION OF A SUPPLEMENTARY DOOR PHONE IN 

PARALLEL TO A MAIN DOOR PHONE IN A ONE-FAMILY 2-WIRE 

AUDIO KIT 

SC101-1308A 

Mains~ 

~ ~ ~12 ~0 

Transformer 

2 

1 

2C 

S+ 

12 S- 

12 S- 

0 S+ 

2 

1 

0 

S- S+ 

K 

Z 

2 

1 

Door phone 

Ref.1129/51 

Door phone 

Ref.1129/110 

Door 

release 

button 

Door unit 

Ref.1129/112 

2 

1 

AP1 

AP2 

SE1 

SE2 

Electric lock 

12Vca-15VA 

CONNECTION OF 4 SUPPLEMENTARY DOOR PHONES IN 

PARALLEL TO A MAIN DOOR PHONE IN A ONE-FAMILY 2-WIRE 

AUDIO KIT 

SC101-1309A 

2 

1 

2C 

S+ 

12 S- 

2 

1 

2C 

S+ 

12 S- 

4 

3 

Ref.1129/51 

Door phone 

2 

2 

1 

2C 

12 S- 

1 

2 

1 

2C 

S+ 

12 S- 


Lock 

release 

Door unit 

Ref.1129/112 

2 

1 

AP1 

AP2 

SE1 

SE2 

Electric lock 

Mains~ 

~ ~ ~12 ~0 

Transformer 

S+ 1 

12 S- 

0 2 

S+ 

Lock 

release 

Panel 

Ref.1129/112 

2 

1 

AP1 

AP2 

SE1 

SE2 

Door phone 

Ref.1129/110 

Electric 

lock 



sec.5 −−−− 5


AND UTOPIA DOOR PHONE 



‘AUDIO TWO’ DOOR PHONE KIT WITH SMYLE PANEL AND UTOPIA DOOR PHONE 


PANEL AND UTOPIA DOOR PHONE 








name tags; those with zama casing are provided with 

15 x 56mm name tags. 

3 

2 

1 

A conversation can be established by picking up the door phone 

handset after receiving a call from the door unit. 




The ring tone can be selected simply by means of a switch during 

installation. 










opening). 

Terminals for locally operating a second door or gate opener are also 

available on the door unit. 



PRI 


Power supply: 

230Vac ± 10% 50-60Hz 




18VA max. 



12Vac 


Max. 110m 










ø 4 mm 


DEVICES 



• Utopia door phone with door opening button and 1 supplementary 

button. 



ACCESSORIES 



• Additional door phone buttons Ref. 1134/55 

• Tabletop installation support Ref. 1134/50 


6 −−−− sec.5 











Mod. 503 




1,55 m ÷ 1,65 mm 


Rossi 



Rossi 

CLICK 



the support. 

CLICK 



sec.5 −−−− 7












Calling tone: 

1= Tone 1 

2= Tone 2 

2 1 

NOTE: select the ring tone before closing the hood. 


2 1 

1,55 m 

MAX 

Maximum 


MIN 

Minimu 



Red 

MUTE 

No calling 

tone 


switch. 


system. 






Wall fitting 

PRI 

A 

8 −−−− sec.5 






NOTE: a total of up to 5 devices (1 main door phone and 4 door phones Ref.1129/52). 

Only 1 supplementary ringer ref. 9854/41 can be connected to the system (terminals S+, S-). The ringer connected to terminals S+ and 

S- of the main door phone is subjected to calling volume setting of the main door phone. 

BASIC WIRING DIAGRAM 

Mains~ 

~ ~ 

~ ~ 

12 0 

Transformer 

Door phone 

Additional ringer 

Ref.9854/41 

LOCK RELEASE FROM HALL BUTTON CONNECTION DIAGRAM 

Mains~ 

~12 

~0 

S- S+ 

K 

Z 

2 

1 

~12 

~0 

S- S+ 

2 

1 

12 

2 

1 

AP1 

AP1 

SE1 

SE2 

AP2 

AP2 

C 

NA 

Electric 

lock 

1 

12 

2 

1 

Gate opening contact 

(MAX 1A 120Vac) 

SC101-1427 

SC101-1427 


~ ~ ~ ~ 

12 0 

Transformer 

Door release 

button 

AP1 

AP1 

SE1 

SE2 

Electric 

lock 



sec.5 −−−− 9





CONNECTION OF A SUPPLEMENTARY DOOR PHONE IN PARALLEL TO A MAIN DOOR PHONE IN A ONE-FAMILY 2-WIRE AUDIO KIT 

SC101-1428 

2 

Mains~ 

~ ~ ~12 ~0 

Transformer 

1 

2C 

S+ 

12 S- 

12 

0 

S- 

S+ 

2 

1 

Additional door phone 

Ref.1129/52 

Door phone 

Push button panel 

Electric 

lock 

CONNECTION OF 4 SUPPLEMENTARY DOOR PHONES IN PARALLEL TO A MAIN DOOR PHONE IN A ONE-FAMILY 2-WIRE AUDIO KIT 

SC101-1429 

2 

1 

2C 

S+ 

12 S- 

2 

1 

2C 

S+ 

12 S- 

2 

1 

2C 

12 S- 

4 

3 

2 

2 

1 

SE1 

SE2 


Ref.1129/52 

2 

1 


Mains~ 

~ ~ ~12 ~0 

Transformer 

S+ 1 

1 

2C 

S+ 

12 S- 

12 S- 

0 2 

S+ 

Door phone 

2 

1 

SE1 

SE2 

Electric 

lock 

Push button 

10 −−−− sec.5 



AND FREE-HANDS DOOR 




PANEL AND FREE-HANDS DOOR PHONE 










A conversation can be established by pressing the door phone button 

after receiving a call from the door unit. 




Maximum, minimum or mute volume can be selected. 










opening). 

Terminals for locally operating a second door or gate opener are also 

available on the door unit. 



DEVICES 


• Utopia free-hands door phone with door opening button and 1 

supplementary button. 



ACCESSORIES 




PRI 


Power supply: 

230Vac ± 10% 50-60Hz 




18VA max. 



12Vac 


Max. 110m 










ø 4 mm 


‘AUDIO TWO’ DOOR PHONE KIT WITH SMYLE PANEL AND FREE-HANDS DOOR PHONE 



sec.5 −−−− 11











Mod. 503 




1,55 m ÷ 1,65 mm 


Rossi 



Rossi 

CLICK 



the support. 

CLICK 

12 −−−− sec.5 


‘AUDIO TWO’ DOOR PHONE KIT WITH SMYLE PANEL AND FREE-HANDS 










Calling tone: 

1= Tone 1 

2= Tone 2 

ON 

FREE-HANDS (default) 

OFF 

ON OFF 

AUDIO WITH 


OFF 

1 

ON 

TONE 

2 


MAX 

Maximum 


MIN 

Minimu 




switch. 


system. 





Red 

MUTE 

No calling 

tone 

PRI 


NOTE: select the ring tone and the audio activation mode before 

closing the hood. 

Wall fitting 

A 



sec.5 −−−− 13







NOTE: a total of up to 5 devices (1 main door phone and 4 door phones Ref. 1129/62). 

Only 1 supplementary ringer Ref. 9854/41 can be connected. The ringer must be connected to the terminals K and Z. The ringer volume 

can be adjusted by adjusting the calling volume of the door phone. 

BASIC WIRING DIAGRAM 

SC101-1440 

Mains~ 

~ ~ 

~ ~ 

12 0 

Transformer 

~12 

~0 

K 

K 

L 

~0 

AP 

Z 

Z 

LOCK RELEASE FROM HALL BUTTON CONNECTION DIAGRAM 

SC101-1440 

Mains~ 

~ ~ 

~ ~ 

12 0 

Transformer 

Door phone 

Open door signalling contact 

(NO if door closed) 

Additional ringer 

Ref.9854/41 

~12 

~0 

K 

L 

~0 

Z 

Door phone 

Door release button 

L 

~0 

AP1 

AP1 

SE1 

SE2 

AP2 

AP2 

C 

NA 

Electric 

lock 

12 

L 

~0 

AP1 

AP1 

SE1 

SE2 

Gate opening contact 

(MAX 1A 120Vac) 

Electric 

lock 

14 −−−− sec.5 





CONNECTION OF A SUPPLEMENTARY DOOR PHONE IN PARALLEL TO A MAIN DOOR PHONE IN A ONE-FAMILY 2-WIRE AUDIO KIT 

SC101-1441 

Mains~ 

~ ~ ~12 ~0 

Transformer 

L 

~0 

~0 

L1 

~12 K Z 

S 

~12 

~0 

K 

Z 

L 

~0 


Ref.1129/62 

Door phone 

CONNECTION OF 4 SUPPLEMENTARY DOOR PHONES IN PARALLEL TO A MAIN DOOR PHONE IN A ONE-FAMILY 2-WIRE AUDIO KIT 

SC101-1442 

Mains~ 

~ ~ ~12 ~0 

Transformer 

S 

~12 

S 

~12 

S 

~12 

S 

~12 

S 

~12 

~0 

L 

~0 

~0 

Z 

L1 

K 

L 

~0 

~0 

Z 

L1 

K 

L 

~0 

~0 

Z 

L1 

K 

L 

~0 

~0 

Z 

L1 

K 

K 

L 

Z 

~0 

4 

3 

2 

1 

L 

~0 

SE1 

SE2 


Ref.1129/62 

Door phone 

Push button p 

Electric 

lock 

L 

~0 

SE1 

SE2 

Electric 

lock 

Push button p 




sec.5 −−−− 15

2-WIRE ONE FAMILY VIDEO KIT 


TECHNICAL FEAUTURES - WIRE CROSS-SECTION AREA 



The Urmet Domus Video Kits can be used to make one-family video 

door phone systems without coax wire using only two wires to connect 

the video door phone to the video door unit. 

The following versions of the Video Two one-family kits are available: 

• Black/white with plastic panel Ref. 952/11 

• Colour with plastic panel Ref. 952/41 

• Black/white with zama vandal-proof panel Ref. 952/21 

• Colour with zama vandal-proof panel Ref. 952/51 

NOTA: the panels with plastic casing are provided with 35 x 56mm 



Conversation between door unit and apartment unit can only be 

established after the apartment unit has been called. 

Call is two-tone electronic. The camera fi ts a high-sensitivity semipinhole 

camera. The subject is illuminated by LEDs. The video door 

phone has a door opener button and two special function buttons 

(auto-on, staircase lights, etc.). 

System block chart 

2 

SPARE PARTS 

The following spare parts are provided for repairs: 

• Power supply Ref. 952/100 

• Camera unit 

black and white Ref. 952/112 

colour Ref. 952/113 

• Atlantico video door phone 



• Bracket for Atlantico videodoor phone Ref. 952/111 

• Spare handset Ref. 1702/101 


VIDEO DOOR PHONE B/W (black and white) version 

Power supply: 

26Vdc 

Kinescope: 

4” Flat 

Resolution: 

450 TV lines 

Ringer: 

electronic two-tone 

Dimensions: 

218 x 220 x 80mm 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE (Colour version) 

Power supply: 

Kinescope: 

Resolution: 

Ringer: 

Dimensions: 

26Vdc 

4” colour LCD 

234 TV lines 


218 x 220 x 80mm 

2 

2 

CAMERA UNIT B/W (black and white) version 

Camera: CCD 1/3” 

Lighting: 

infrared LED 

Power supply: 

18Vdc 

Timer: approximately 90” 

Dimensions: 

185 x 99 x 35mm 

Press the button on the panel: the call is sent to the monitor and the 

picture will appear after approximately 4 seconds. 

The call tone will last for approximately fi ve seconds. 

Lift the handset to stop the call tone and speak with the video door 

phone. 

The monitor switch-on is timed (approximately 90 seconds). Any 

subsequent call or automatic switch-on will reset the timer. 

DEVICES 

CAMERA UNIT (Colour version) 

Camera: CCD 1/4” 

Lighting: 

White LEDs 

Power supply: 

18Vdc 


Dimensions: 

185 x 99 x 35mm 

POWER SUPPLY 

Power supply: 

110/230Vac ± 10% 50/60Hz 

Power: 

38VA 

Secondary unit: 26Vdc 0.9 A (timed 20%) 

Protections: with PTC thermal switch (*) 

Dimensions: 

96 x 126 x 75mm 

Weight: 

1.1kg 


The basic product confi guration is as follows: 

• One button camera unit. 

• Video door phone with bracket Atlantico style. 

• Power supply. 

ACCESSORIES 

The following accessories can be purchased separately: 

• Max 1 supplementary ringer Ref. 9854/41 

or 

• Max 1 supplementary door phone Ref. 1133 

or 

• Max 1 Atlantico supplementary Videodoorphone 



• Table mounting kit Ref. 1702/92 

• Coloured mask kit Ref. 1702/50 

• Wall bracket for supplementary video door phone Ref. 1202/90 

(*) To restore the power supply if the PTC thermal switch trips 

following overload or short-circuit, power the unit down for 60 

seconds or longer. 

WIRE CROSS-SECTION AREA 

Distance 50m 100m 

Power supply/Videodoor phone mm 2 0,50 -- 

Videodoor phone/Camera mm 2 0,50 0,75 

NOTE: the basic kit connections are not polarised. 

16 −−−− sec.5 



PANEL 

PANEL 

185 mm 

99 mm 35 mm 

The camera unit is supplied complete with: 

• Semi pin-hole camera. 

• Led for lighting. 

• Front plate with 1 button. 

• Electronic circuit. 

• Lamp for lighting the name tags. 

Adjust volume (to be adjusted only when needed) and camera 

position. 





1,55 m ÷ 1,65 mm 


INSTALLATION 


Mod. 503 


the wires (it is advisable to have approximately 40-45 mm of wire 


ø 4 mm 




sec.5 −−−− 17


PANEL 


the support. 




CLICK 

• Adjust volume and camera position. Volume is calibrated to optimal 

values during production. Change the settings when needed only. 

• Set the electrical lock operating time by shifting the jumper to the 

required position. 

5° 

5° 5° 

10° 

= 1" default 

= 3" 

= 5" 

DOOR OPENER TIME 

PROGRAMMING 


Rossi 


Rossi 

CLICK 

18 −−−− sec.5 



VIDEO DOOR PHONE - POWER SUPPLY 


This wall-mounted video door phone apartment station with next 

generation fl at 4” kinescope screen does not need to be fl ush-mounted 

given the minimum protrusion from the wall. 

Installation is extreme simple and fast because the connections are 

shown on the terminal boards arranged on the bracket. 







• Service buttons ( and ) for activating, for example, supplementary 

electrical locks, staircase lights, video door phone auto-on function, 

etc. 


218 mm 80 mm 

INSTALLATION 

1) Arrange the duct so that it ends in correspondence with one of the 

input holes. 

2) Fasten the bracket to the wall at the height from the fl oor shown by 

means of the four screws. 



position. 

5) Extract the retainer hook A by inserting the tip of a screwdriver and 

pulling the hook downwards. 

6) Fasten the monitor to the bracket as shown in the fi gure. 

7) Fasten the monitor by pushing the retainer hook A upwards. 

A 

A 

B 

Bracket 

1,55 m 


220 mm 

POWER SUPPLY 

Contrast/Colour 

adjustment 





Mute function 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

126 mm 

The power supply unit provides power to the entire system. It is 

connected to the monitor by means of two wires. It can be wall-fi tted or 

fi tted on DIN bar. 

The power supply unit must be installed in dry places protected from 

weather conditions. 

126mm in length correspond to seven 18mm modules, as per DIN 

43880 standard. 



sec.5 −−−− 19

BASIC KIT CONNECTION 

SV102-3216 


BASIC 


+ 

BRACKET 

A 

A 

CA LL 

R1 

AP 

2 

1 

V3 AI +M 

MAINS~ 

+26 

R1 

~ 

~ 


POWER SUPPLY 

Lock 

opening 

AP2 

AP1 

SE2 

SE1 

L 

L 

TC 


OUTDOOR STATION 

Electrical 

Lock 

12Vca 15VA 


20 −−−− sec.5 


A) Supplementary ringer Ref. 9854/41 Connection in parallel to 1 video door phone call 

B) Call repeater relay connection for controlling a supplementary ringer 

C) Connection of a secondary electrical lock 

SV102-3217B 

A) 

BASIC 


RINGER 

Ref.9854/41 

A 

A 

CA LL 

R1 

AP 

2 

1 

V3 AI +M 

FROM SYSTEM 


B) 

BASIC 


RELAY 

BOX 

Ref.788/52 

A 

A 

CA LL 

R1 

AP 

2 

1 

V3 AI +M 

S5 

S4 S1 

S6 S2 

S3 

C 14 

6 15 

CA 

0~ 

~ 

LINE~ 

RINGER 

12V~ 

~ ~ ~ 12 0 

TRANSFORMER 

Ref.9000/230 


C) 

BASIC 


A 

A 

CA LL 

R1 

Y1 

Y2 

LINE~ 

~ 

~ ~ ~ 12 0 

TRANSFORMER 

Ref.9000/230 


12~ 

2 

S2 

S3 

S1 

S5 

S4 

S6 

C 

6 

CA 

0~ 

SECONDARY 

ELECTRIC 

LOCK 

RELAY 

BOX 

Ref.788/52 



sec.5 −−−− 21

ONE DOOR PHONE Ref. 1133 CONNECTION IN PARALLEL TO 

THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE 

ONE ATLANTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONE CONNECTION IN PARALLEL TO 

THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE 

SV102-3218 


A) 

BASIC 



Mod.Atlantico 

Ref.1133 

A 

A 

CA LL 

R1 

AP 

2 

1 

V3 AI +M 

1 

2 

9 

6 

10 

CA 


B) 

BASIC 


A A 


CA LL 

R1 

AP 

2 

1 

V3 AI +M 

R=120 ohm 

1/4W 


V4 V5 X1 V3 

1 

2 

9 

R1 

CA 6 

X2 

R1 

RD 

Secondary 


Mod.Atlantico 

Ref.1702/1 (black/white) or 

Ref.1702/40 (colour) + 

BRACKET Ref.1202/90 

(VX.030) 

VX.030 max. distance between basic and secondary video door phone 

(terminals V3-V5): 

• normal wires 20m 

• coax cable 50m 

R2 R1 R2 

out in 

~ ~ 

LINE~ 

POWER SUPPLY 

Ref.789/2 

22 −−−− sec.5 


ONE AND TWO-FAMILY VIDEO KIT Mod. 956 WITH ARTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONE 

EQUIPMENT - ACCESSORIES - SPARE PARTS 

TECHNICAL FEATURES - WIRE SECTIONS 

ONE AND TWO-FAMILY VIDEO KIT Mod. 956 

WITH ARTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONE 

Urmet Domus video door phone system Mod. 956 allows single and 

two-user video systems without coax cable and with a reduced number 

of wires: 4 common wires + 1 calling wire for each monitor. 

The 4” monitor with fl at screen does not need any embedding and, 

as for Urmet Domus traditional video door phone system, the image 

appears only on the called monitor. 

The conversation between the outdoor station and the monitor can 

take place even if the indoor set has not been called. 

The call is electronic bitonal type; the TV camera unit uses a CCD TV 

camera; the subject is lighted by means of infrared Leds. 

The monitor is equipped with a door-release key and 2 additional keys 

that can be used for any service or as self-insertion key: in this case 

the system needs an additional wire in conduit. 

Block diagram for two family system 

By pressing a button of the push button panel the call is sent to the 

monitor on which the image appears after 4” about. 

By unhooking the handset, the conversation with the video outdoor 

station can take place. 

Monitor lighting is timed (one minute about). Every new call cancels 

the previous one with timer reset. 

EQUIPMENT 

The products are the following: 

• One-family video door phone kit (230Vac 50Hz) Ref. 956/31 

Composed by: 

• Smyle Camera with 1 button 

• Artico video door phone with bracket 

• Power supply 

• Two-family video door phone kit (230Vac 50Hz) Ref. 956/32 

Composed by: 

• Smyle Camera with 2 buttons 

• 2 Artico video door phones with bracket 


• One-family video door phone kit (110Vac 60Hz) Ref. 956/19 

Composed by: 

• Smyle Camera with 1 button 

• Artico video door phone with bracket 


• Two-family video door phone kit (110Vac 60Hz) Ref. 956/29 

Composed by: 

• Smyle Camera with 2 buttons 

• 2 Artico video door phones with bracket 


ACCESSORIES 

• Max 1 Atlantico door phone Ref. 1133/35A 

or 

• Max 1 supplementary ringer Ref. 9854/41 

• Call repeater relay Ref. 788/52 

• Blue screen Ref. 1705/102 

• Transformer (230Vac 50Hz) Ref. 9000/230 

• Transformer (110Vac 60Hz) Ref. 9000/110 

SPARE PARTS 

The possible spare parts for repair are the following: 

• Camera Ref. 956/123 

• Panel with 1 button Ref. 1729/1 

• Panel with 2 buttons Ref. 1729/2 

• Power supply Ref. 956/110 

• Bracket for video door phone Ref. 1705/955 

• Video door phone (CCIR Version 50Hz) Ref. 1705/1 

• Video door phone (EIA Version 60Hz) Ref. 1705/18 

• Grey screen Ref. 1705/101 



Power supply: 

Consumption: 

Kinescope: 

Resolution: 

Video input: 

Ringer: 

Dimensions: 

18Vdc max 

600 mA max 

4” Flat 

450 TV lines 



200 x 241 x 83mm 

CAMERA UNIT 

Camera: 

CCD 

Lighting: 

infrared LED 

Power supply: 

18Vdc max 


Video output: 


Dimensions: 

185 x 99 x 35mm 

POWER SUPPLY 

Power supply: 

110/230Vac ± 10% 50/60Hz 

Power: 

38VA 

Secondary unit: 12Vac 1A + 1A (timed 30%) 

18Vdc 1A (timed 10%) 

Protections: with PTC thermal switch PTC (*) 

Dimensions: 

96 x 126 x 75mm 

Dissipated power after 1 average 

working hour: 4,2W 

Length of 126 mm corresponds to seven 18 mm modules in accordance 

with DIN 43880 standards. 

Weight: 

1,1Kg 

(*) To restore the power supply if the PTC thermal switch trips 

following overload or short-circuit, power the unit down for 60 

seconds or longer. 

WIRE SECTIONS 

FROM TV CAMERA UNIT TO MONITORS 

Function Wires m 50m 100m 200m 

Video power supply R1 S/mm 2 0,5 0,75 1,5 

Video power supply R2 S/mm 2 0,5 0,75 1,5 

Video signal A S/mm 2 0,35 0,35 0,35 

twisted 

Video signal B S/mm 2 0,35 0,35 0,35 

Call C1 - C2 S/mm 2 0,35 0,5 0,75 

Self-insertion call AI S/mm 2 0,35 0,35 0,35 




sec.5 −−−− 23


CAMERA UNIT 


Distances are between the TV camera unit and the last monitor. Up 

to 100m it is possible to use normal wires; for longer distances, up to 

200m, twist the wires A and B. 

FROM POWER SUPPLY TO TV CAMERA UNIT 

Function Wires m 50m 100m 

Power supply 12V~ ~12 S/mm 2 0,5 0,75 

Power supply 12V~ ~0 S/mm 2 0,5 0,75 

Power supply 18V +18 S/mm 2 0,35 0,35 

Power supply 18V R1 S/mm 2 0,35 0,35 

CAMERA UNIT 

185 mm 

The camera unit is fi tted in a Smyle panel. The unit includes: 

• Camera with solid state CCD sensor. 

• Infrared LED lights. 

• Front panel with 1 or 2 buttons. 

• Electronic circuits. 

• Name tag light LED. 

The internal and external sound volumes can be adjusted by operating 

on the proper controls. 

INSTALLATION 


99 mm 35 mm 


using either the bolts provided or a 503 box. 

Mod. 503 




1,55 m ÷ 1,65 mm 


ø 4 mm 


24 −−−− sec.5 



CAMERA UNIT 

• Fasten the name tag light circuit making the wires pass under neath 

the support; then adjust volume and camera position. 

5° 

5° 5° 

10° 

CLICK 

NOTE: volume is calibrated to optimal values during production. 

Change the settings when needed only. 


Rossi 




Rossi 

CLICK 



sec.5 −−−− 25



POWER SUPPLY 


INSTALLATION 




• Flat 4” video module 



Note: when volume is set to “MUTE” the video door phone will not ring 

but the video module will light up. 

• Door opener button. 

• Service buttons ( and ). 


200 mm 

A Door opener button. 



C Contrast/colour adjustment control. 

D Brightness adjustment control. 

E Call volume control and adjustment: turn the knob as far as it 

will go (red part visible) to mute the call tone (“MUTE” function). 

E 

241 mm 

C D E 

A 

B1 

B2 

83 mm 

MUTE 

1) Prepare the conduit so that it terminates at the infeed hole 

provided. 

2) Use 4 plugs to fasten the bracket to the wall at the height from the 

fl oor indicated. 


4) Extract the fastening hook A. 

5) Insert the video door phone in the bracket. 

6) Fasten the video door phone in place pushing hook A inwards. 

A 

POWER SUPPLY 

75 mm 

90 mm 

96 mm 

126 mm 

The power supply unit provides power to the entire system. It is 

connected to the monitor by means of two wires. It can be wall-fi tted or 

fi tted on DIN bar. 

The power supply unit must be installed in dry places protected from 

weather conditions. 

126mm in length correspond to seven 18mm modules, as per DIN 

43880 standard. 

1,55 m 

26 −−−− sec.5 


ONE FAMILY KIT CONNECTION Ref. 956/31 

SV102-2082C 

MAINS~ 

POWER SUPPLY 


Mod.Artico 

TC 

(V5.011) 


4F 

VIDEO OUTDOOR 

STATION 

V5.011 Connect the wire for Self-insert function. In this case make a 

jumper between terminals X2 and R3. 

Lock 

release 

Electric lock 

12Vca/15Va 



sec.5 −−−− 27

TWO-FAMILY KIT CONNECTION Ref. 956/32 

SV102-2081B 


MAINS~ 

1 

2 

POWER SUPPLY 


Mod.Artico 

(V5.006) 

(V5.011) 

(V5.011) 

TC 



STATION 

V5.006 The maximum distance between devices is 50 metres. 



Lock 

release 

4F 

Electric lock 

12Vca/15Va 

28 −−−− sec.5 


CONNECTION OF 2 ARTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONES IN PARALLEL 

SV102-2135C 

1 


Mod.Artico 

2 


Mod.Artico 

MAINS~ 

(V5.006) 

POWER SUPPLY 

Ref.789/4 

(V5.011) 

(V5.011) 

MAINS~ 


POWER SUPPLY 




TC 


STATION 

Lock 

release 

4F 

Electric lock 

12Vca/15Va 



sec.5 −−−− 29

CONNECTION OF 2 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 2 VIDEO DOOR UNITS 

INDIVIDUAL CALLS FROM VIDEO DOOR UNIT 

SV102-3225 



STATION 


Mod.Artico 


Mod.Artico 

TC 

Electric lock 

12Vca/15Va 

X 

(V5.013) 

C2 

C1 

PS 

R1 

R2 

A 

B 

F 

4 

+18 

R1 

~12 

~0 

~0 

SE2 

SE1 

1 

(V5.006) 

2 

(VX.021) 

LINE~ 

Lock 

release 

RD 

CA 

X1 

X2 A 

B 

R1 

R2 

R3 

RD 

CA 

X2 

X1 

A 

B 

R1 

R2 

R3 

+18 

R1 

~12 

~0 

~ 

~ 

POWER SUPPLY 

(VX.008) 

C1 

SN1 

7 

1 

4 

10 

11 

14 

13 

15 

8 5 2 

C2 

SN2 

9 

3 

6 

12 

~12 

~0 

RELAY BOX 

Ref.788/1 

or 

Ref.788/51 

~12 

~0 

~ 

~ 

TRANSFORMER 

Ref.9000/230 

or 

Ref.9000/110 

(VX.008) 

(VX.021) 

LINE~ 

Lock 

release 

X 

(V5.013) 

C2 

C1 

PS 

R1 

R2 

A 

B 

F 

4 

+18 

R1 

~12 

~0 

~0 

SE2 

SE1 


STATION 

TC 

Electric lock 

12Vca/15Va 





30 −−−− sec.5 


CONNECTION OF 1 DOOR PHONE IN PARALLEL TO 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE 

SIMULTANEOUS OPENING OF 2 LOCKS 

SV102-2136E 


Mod.Artico 


RELAY BOX 

Ref.788/52 

X1 

X2 

R3 

CA 

A 

B 

R2 

R1 

CA1 

1 

2 

SE2 

~0 

R1 

+18 

~12 

~0 

SE1 

R1 

R2 

B 

A 

Lock 

release 

(V5.011) 

C1 

C2 

AI 

4 F 

TC 


STATION 


~ 

~ 

~12 

~0 

TRANSFORMER 

12V ~ 40VA 

MAINS~ 

S2 

6 

C 

2 

12~ 

CA 

~0 



S1 

S3 

Electric lock 

12Vca/15Va 

Electric lock 

12Vca/15Va 



sec.5 −−−− 31

SV102-2137D 

CONNECTION OF SUPPLEMENTARY RING Ref. 9854/41 IN PARALLEL TO 

VIDEO DOOR PHONE CALL 

CONNECTION TO CALL REPEATER RELAY FOR CONTROLLING A 

SUPPLEMENTARY RINGER 



Mod.Artico 

RINGER 

Ref.9854/41 


Mod.Artico 

RELAY BOX 

Ref.788/52 

(V5.011) 

(V5.011) 


Ringer 12V~ 

TRANSFORMER 

Ref.9000/230 

or 

Ref.9000/110 



Line~ 

32 −−−− sec.5 


R 

SECTION 7 

(REV.D) 

FREE-HANDS SYSTEMS 

R 

WITH SINTHESI PANEL 


FREE-HANDS SYSTEMS DUO WITH SINTHESI PANEL 2 


DIAGRAMS SYSTEMS 

GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES.................................................2 

FREE-HANDS DOOR UNIT.............................................................2 

Description of terminals ................................................................3 

Interchangeable devices...............................................................3 

SINTHESI PANEL ............................................................................3 

Installation ....................................................................................3 

DUO INDOOR SET ..........................................................................5 

Interchangeability .........................................................................5 

Wall surface mounting version......................................................5 

Wall embedding version ...............................................................5 

POWER SUPPLY Ref. 752/20 .........................................................6 

Interchangeability .........................................................................6 

DIAGRAM NOTES .........................................................................13 

CONNECTION OF DUO INDOOR SETS 

TO A DUPLEX OUTDOOR STATION...............SC101-0209C .....14 

CONNECTION OF DUO INDOOR SETS 

TO TWO DUPLEX OUTDOOR STATION......... SC101-0210E .....16 

EXAMPLES OF CONNECTION OF 

THE DIFFERENT PARTS 

(INDOOR SET, OUTDOOR SET, POWER SUPPLY) 

OF THE NEW SYSTEM DUPLEX Mod. 752 

WHEN USED AS SPARE PARTS IN THE 

PREVIOUS SUPERJOLLY TWO-CHANNEL 

SYSTEMS 2ND SERIES................................... SC101-0211B .....18 

ADDITIONAL ELECTRONIC BUZZER Ref. 9854/52.......................7 

CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 788/52............................................7 

CONNECTION MISTAKES AND MOST COMMON FAILURES......7 

DIMENSIONS - FLUSH-MOUNTED VERSION ...............................8 

DIMENSIONS - WALL-MOUNTED VERSION .................................9 

EXAMPLES OF MODULAR CONSTRUCTIONS 

WITH VARIOUS CAPACITIES.........................................................9 



sec.7 −−−− 1

R 

FREE-HANDS SYSTEMS DUO WITH SINTHESI PANEL 

GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES 

FREE-HANDS DOOR UNIT 

FREE-HANDS SYSTEMS FREE-HANDS SYSTEMS DUO WITH SINTHESI PANEL 

FREE-HANDS SYSTEMS DUO WITH SINTHESI 

PANEL 

The system offers typical free-hands features, i.e.: 

• Electronic call from the outside push button panel to the indoor set. 

• Conversation from outdoor station to indoor station and vice versa. 

• Electric lock opening from the indoor set. 

• Possibility of an additional electric control from the indoor set (for 

example for stairs lighting). 

The following installation are only possible: 

• Connection to 1 outdoor station. 

• Connection to 2 outdoor stations with automatic switching. 

The secrecy of conversation function requires a wire more than the 

normal system in the cable conduit. The phone yield of the new system 

is higher, since a duplex telephone wiring with electronic balancing 

has been used. In the case of “speech” on one of the two channels, 

balancing drastically reduces the other channel, this avoiding the 

Larsen effect. 

The transmission and reception levels are calibrated on optimum value 

during production. The installer can only adjust amplifi cation towards 

the outside by acting on the potentiometer mounted in the loudspeaker 

module Ref. 1145/75. Amplifi cation towards the indoor set is not 

adjustable. 

The new indoor set Ref. 752/23 is compatible and interchangeable 

with the previous indoor sets Ref. 4340/23, and Ref. 4340/231, the 

same for the power supply. 

GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES 

For a correct installation of systems the following must be kept in 

mind: 

• System wires must be introduced into metal or plastic tubes, where 

there shall be no other wire, such as stairs lights lifts, or energy 

distribution net wires. 

• Use twisted coupled wires from power supply to outdoor set: 

• One couple from microphone MIC. 

• One couple for loudspeaking receiver ALT. 

• System wires diameter depends on connections lengths, as shown 

in the side table. 

Section Diameter Distance 

mm 2 mm m 

Speech circuit and call 

Door opener 

0,5 8/10 50 

0,5 8/10 100 

0,8 10/10 200 

1 12/10 300 

0,5 8/10 50 

0,8 8/10 100 

1 8/10 200 

1,6 8/10 300 

Calls from the outdoor station come directly on the indoor set 

loudspeaker operated by means of a determined frequency. 

Also foresee wires for push button panel lamps lighting with a separate 

transformer of adequate power (up to 2 lamps, the system power 

supply can be used) and wires for electric lock opener button next to 

the door. 

Name tag light bulb uptake is shown in the following table: 

Ref. Description Power [W] 

1145/71 Microphone module with 1 button ........................ 0,35 

1145/72 Microphone module with 2 buttons ...................... 0,35 

1145/11 Module with 1 button............................................ 0,35 

1145/12 Module with 2 buttons .......................................... 0,35 

1145/13 Module with 3 buttons ............................................ 0,7 

1145/14 Module with 4 buttons ............................................ 0,7 

1145/50 Repertory/house number module .......................... 0,7 

FREE-HANDS DOOR UNIT 

The DUO free-hands system door unit consists of two separate 

Sinthesi panel range modules only. 

The Sinthesi two-channel door unit consists of the following parts: 

• Loudspeaker module Ref. 1145/75 

• Microphone module without buttons Ref. 1145/70 

• Microphone module with 1 button Ref. 1145/71 

• Microphone module with 2 buttons Ref. 1145/72 

Ref. 1145/75 Ref. 1145/70 

Ref. 1145/71 Ref. 1145/72 

Module dimensions are: 90 x 90mm. 

ROSSI 

BIANCHI 

The microphone modules have a “call feedback” function. A visual 

signal indicating that the call is actually being placed (blinking LED) 

will be generated by the door unit when a call is being made by any 

module with buttons. 

IMPORTANT: This service is not available in 12 Vac call systems 

(Jolly or Superjolly 1st series models) and if button common contacts 

(G/T) are separated. 

The transmission and reception levels are calibrated by default to 

optimal values. External amplifi cation can be adjusted by means of 

the potentiometer on the 1145/75 speaker module. Amplifi cation to 

apartment station cannot be adjusted. The potentiometer fi tted in the 

microphone module acts on the apartment station transmission level 

only when used as a spare in old Superjolly systems where the + 

terminal is connected instead of the +M terminal. 


R 


SINTHESI PANEL 

L - + +M 

1145/72 

1145/75 


Speaker module Ref. 1145/75 

1 

} Speaker signal 

2 

Microphone modules Ref. 1145/70-/71-/72 

+ Microphone signal positive 

+M Microphone signal positive for Superjolly apartment 

stations 

- Microphone negative signal 


~0 


~12 

G/T Call button common (Ref. 1145/71- /72 only) 

U1 Call button (Ref. 1145/71- /72 only) 

G/T2 Call button contact 2 (Ref. 1145/72 only) 

U2 Call button (Ref. 1145/72 only) 

INTERCHANGEABLE DEVICES 

1145/75 

1145/72 

The Sinthesi door units are electrically compatible with Kombi door unit 

modules and with 4340/27 door units for 625 panels. 

The frames and holders for fastening to the fl ush-mounting box must 

be replaced to fi t replacements in Kombi modules. 

The fl ush-mounting box must also be replaced for panels with 4340/27 

door units. 

The correspondence between terminals of the various modules is 

shown in diagram SC101-0211. 

2 1 

L - + +M 


The module consists of anodised aluminium profi le modular elements 

which can be fi tted in specifi c frames. 

The innovative feature of this system consists in the possibility of 

vertical or horizontal installation. Furthermore, the fl ush-mounting 

boxes can be coupled by means of shims to create various panel 

types and confi gurations with a small number of components. The 

advantage of needing to stock fewer components is relevant for both 

wholesalers and installers. 

Module installation is simple thanks to the pre-wired connections on 

the modules and system terminal boards on extractable carriages. 

The following installations are possible: 


• Wall-mounting 

• Half fl ush-mounting on pillar (max. 3 modules) 

The system employs the following accessories: 

• Flush-mounting boxes which can be jointed together 

• Frames and holder frames (fl ush-mounting version) 

• Wall cover frames (fl ush-mounting version) 

• Rain hoods (fl ush-mounting version) 

• Case and hood (wall-mounting version) 

Refer to the “Door Phone-Video Door Phone Technical Manual”, 

“Sinthesi Panel” section for a description of the components and 

accessories needed to install the panel. 

INSTALLATION 

You are advised to install the modules at the heights shown below 

according to the required system confi guration. 

1,55 ÷ 1,60 m 1,55 ÷ 1,60 m 

A 

4 mm 



sec.7 −−−− 3

R 

J2 




MODULE POSITIONING EXAMPLES 

1145/75 

1145/50 

1145/72 

1145/75 

1145/72 

Vertical 

installation 

Horizontal 

installation 

OK 

1145/75 1145/50 1145/72 

NO 

1145/72 1145/75 1145/50 

Arrange an additional Sinthesi module (e.g. house number, blank 

module, etc.) between the speaker module (1145/75) and the 

microphone (1145/70, 1145/71,1145/72). 

GT2 

GT3 

GT4 

0~ 

12~ 

NOTE: the procedure for horizontal installation of module holders and 

frames is similar to that described above. The frame hinge 

will be found on a side instead of on the bottom and will 

consequently open horizontally. The modules are fastened 

to the frame in the same way, regardless of the direction of 

development of the panel. 

B 

B 

A 

A 


R 


DUO INDOOR SET 

DUO INDOOR SET 

Duo indoor set Mod. 752 utilizes, as transmitting capsule, an electret 

microphone that guarantees a more constant and linear transmission. 

It is arranged to receive the call directly on the loudspeaker with a 

bitonal sound supplied by the power supply. 

Duo indoor set is foreseen for two way of installation: 

• Wall surface mounting. 

• Wall embedding. 

All connections to the line are made after Duo base has been fi xed to 

the wall, thus simplifying all operations. 

Duo is foreseen in the version: 

• For outdoor station systems, with 1 additional key, 

with 1 conversation key and 1 door opener key Ref. 752/23 

INTERCHANGEABILITY 

Duo indoor set Mod. 752 is interchangeable with the previous models: 

Jolly and Superjolly 1st series with carbon transmitting capsule, and 

Superjolly 2nd series. 

It is not interchangeable with jolly model with loudspeaker instead 

of carbon capsule. 

The fact that the duo is not equipped with a buzzer but only preengineered 

to receive the external call directly on the loudspeaker 

by means of a two-tone signal provided by the power supply is very 

important. In the case of replacement of the Jolly and in Superjolly 

1st series systems where the call is sent to the buzzer (terminal RZ), 

the electronic buzzer Ref. 9854/52 must be inserted inside the duo. A 

terminal of the buzzer must be connected with terminal 6 of the duo; 

the other terminal must be connected to the call wire that, in old house 

phones, was connected to the RZ terminal. In the case of replacement 

of Superjolly 2nd series, the buzzer is not required as the call wire in 

both systems is sent to terminal CA. 

INDOOR SETS 

Ref.4340/23 

Ref. 752/23 

SC101-0211B 

INDOOR SETS 

Ref.752/23 

-/~ 

+/~ 

WALL SURFACE MOUNTING VERSION 

17,7 cm 


OPENER KEY 

CONVERSATION 

To fi x Duo to the wall, it is necessary to prearrange two nogs in 

correspondence of two holes placed on the horizontal A and on the 

vertical B. 

The central zone indicates the space for wire input. 

66 mm 

34 mm 32 mm 

A 

WALL EMBEDDING VERSION 

21 cm 

8,8 cm 3,7 cm 

16 

mm 

For this way of installation use the proper: 

• Embedding box Ref. 4328/16 

• Frame Ref. 752/1 

155 cm 

107 mm 

B 

0,6 

12,2 cm cm 4,6 cm 

155 cm 

20,2 cm 



sec.7 −−−− 5

R 


POWER SUPPLY Ref. 752/20 


The operations to be performed are the following: 

• Embed box A. Plaster should be leveled or stick out the edge of the 

box 1cm max. 

• Remove the screw caps of the frame B by means of a screwdriver. 

• Fix the frame to the embedding box by means of the two screws e1 

and e2. 

• Remove the indoor set front plate to have access to connection 

terminals. The front plate is hinged to the base in the upper side and 

fi xed by a snap-system in the lower side. To remove it, hold the base 

with one hand and pull the front plate outwards with the other hand 

(or exert leverage with a screw driver in the specifi c slots). 

• Make the connections. 

• Replace the front plate. 

• Insert indoor set C into frame B. The indoor set will be snapped by 

means of four clips: d1 - d2 - d3 - d4. 

d 3 

e 1 

d 1 

C 

A 

d 4 

d 2 

B 

e 2 

DUO INDOOR SET INTERNAL CONNECTION 

Ref. 752/23 

B 


75 mm 

90 mm 

108 mm 

The power supply Ref. 752/20 consists of: 

• 28 VA transformer. 

• Primary 110-230V. 

• Secondary 12V, 1A (supply for door opener and buzzer terminals 0 

and 12). 

• Secondary 18V, 0.2A (terminals 0 and 18). 

• Secondary 15Vdc, 0.2A (connected internally - supply for amplifying 

circuits). 

• Output for bitonal call on loudspeaker with F1= 1200Hz, F2 = 

1800Hz with sweep rate 10-20Hz. 

• Inwards amplifi er (input terminals 3-4, output terminals 5-6). 

• Outwards amplifi er (input terminals 7-8, output terminals 1-2). 

The power supply can be mounted on drawn bars according to ‘DIN 

46277’ specifi cations or fi xed to the wall by means of two screws and 

nogs. 

The length of 162 mm corresponds to 9 modules of 18 mm each, in 

accordance with ‘DIN 43880’ specifi cations. 

INTERCHANGEABILITY 

Sch. 752/20 

Prim. 110/220/240V ˜/50Hz 

28VA 

Sec. 15V ˜/0,2A 

12V ˜/1A 

18V ˜/0,2A 

162 mm 

It is interchangeable with the previous model Ref. 4340/20. On the 

contrary, it is not interchangeable with the Jolly type Ref. 4330/20. In 

this case it is necessary to replace also the outdoor station. 

MAIN~ 

MAIN~ 

45 mm 

SC101-0211B 

POWER SUPPLY 

Ref.752/20 

POWER SUPPLY 

Ref.4340/20 


R 


ADDITIONAL ELECTRONIC BUZZER Ref. 9854/52 - CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 788/21 

CONNECTION MISTAKES AND MOST COMMON FAILURES 

ADDITIONAL ELECTRONIC BUZZER 

Ref. 9854/52 

CONNECTION MISTAKES AND MOST COMMON 

FAILURES 

The device Ref. 9854/52 can be used for an additional call. 

To mount the buzzer inside the indoor set proceed as follows: 

• Fix the buzzer to the base using the two 2.9 x 13.5mm screws 

indicated by a-b. 

• Connect the system wires to the two terminals. 

b 

CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 788/52 

As previously described, the call coming from the outside push button 

panel towards the indoor sets takes place directly on the loudspeaker 

with a bitonal sound supplied by the power supply. 

When the call has to be sent also to additional ringers, it is necessary 

to use the call repeater Ref. 788/52 or Ref. 788/21 to be parallel 

connected to the indoor set loudspeaker. For its connection, proceed 

as follows: 

• Connect terminals 6 and CA to the indoor set corresponding 

terminals. 

Feed the call repeater relay by means of a 12Vac transformer, the 

voltage of which can feed the additional ringer. 

INDOOR SET 

Ref.752/23 

AP 

6 ALT 

CA 

5 

7 

8 

MIC 

MAINS˜ 

~ ~ 

RELAY 

Ref.788/52 

CA 

6 

~ 

0 ~ 12 

~ 

0 ~ 12 

-S1 

-S3 

a 

BUZZER 

12V˜ 

~ 

TRANSFORMER 

Ref.9000/230 

• Operation failure from indoor set to outdoor station 

On the outdoor set disconnect wires 1 and 2 and measure the 

loudspeaker resistance (the resulting resistance varies from 45Ω to 

515Ω, since the circuit is made of a 45 Ω loudspeaker with a series 

connected 470 Ω potentiometer). 

If the loudspeaker is not defective, the failure might be caused by 

the loudspeaker line (line 1-2) or by the indoor set transmitting 

capsule line (line 7-8). In this case, insulation and continuity of the 

above lines must be carefully checked. 

If the failure does not fall within the above mentioned cases, the 

power supply will have to be checked and probably replaced since it 

might be causing the failure. 

• Operation failure from outdoor station to indoor set 

Defective electret microphone circuit. A check with a tester is not 

possible. Try to replace the outdoor set. If the failure is still present, 

check line 3-4 disconnecting the two wires from outdoor set and 

power supply, and measuring continuity and insulation. Make same 

check on the indoor sets loudspeaker line (5-6). If the failure does 

not fall within the above mentioned cases, the power supply will 

have to be checked and probably replaced since it might be causing 

the failure. 

• Operation failure on both directions 

Check the 315mA fuse: if burnt, it shall be replaced with one of the 

same value. 

Check network voltage. 

• Lock does not open 

Check that there is a voltage of 12V between terminals 0 and 12 of 

the power supply. 

Check the door release lines between terminals AP, 6 or that the 

contact of the door release key is working correctly. 

• NO calls on loudspeaker 

Check that the power supply generates the call signal through 

insertion of a 45Ω resistance between terminals PS and 6 of the 

power supply. 

• “Whistle” or Larsen effect 

If the system presents a “whistle” due to Larsen effect, duly adjust the 

potentiometer of the loudspeaker module, reducing the volume until 

the effect disappears. The inwards amplifi cation is not adjustable. 



sec.7 −−−− 7

R 


DIMENSIONS 



Note: H1= 204, 294, 384 indicates flush mounting height and H2= 213, 303, 393 indicates to total height relative to 2, 3 and 4 module 

versions 

H3 

241 / 331 / 421 

45 mm 

158 mm 

118 mm 

H1 

204 / 294 / 384 mm 

H2 

209/ 299/ 389 mm 

45 mm 

244 mm 


370 mm 

Note: H3 referred to the total height may differ according to the number of modules that the case may contain. 

H1 

204 / 294 / 384 mm 

125 mm 250 mm 375 mm 

79 mm 

59 mm 

H3 

241 / 331 / 421 

287 mm 

H2 

209/ 299/ 389 mm 

79 mm 

59 mm 

H3 

331 / 421 

416 mm 

H1 

204 / 294 / 384 mm 

H2 

209/ 299/ 389 mm 

79 mm 

59 mm 


R 



COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

FLUSH 

MOUNTED (#) 

WALL 

MOUNTED (#) 

GATE 

PILLAR (#) 

DUO 



Button and 

repertory 

modules 

Microphone 

module 

Loudspeaker 

module 


box 


and frames 

Wall 

cover frame 

(°) 



(°) 

(for vertical 

panels only) 


frame and 


(for vertical 

panels only) 


1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/50 

1145/70 

1145/71 

1145/72 

1145/75 

1145/53 

1145/54 

1145/63 

1145/64 

1145/713 

1145/714 

1145/726 

1145/728 

1145/739 

1145/732 

1145/613 

1145/614 

1145/626 

1145/628 

1145/639 

1145/632 

1145/313 

1145/314 

1145/326 

1145/328 

1145/339 

1145/332 

1145/343 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 

5 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 

1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 

1 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

3 3 3 

1 1 1 1 

3 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

3 3 3 

2 2 2 3 3 3 3 

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 

3 3 3 

1 2 2 2 2 2 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

1 1 1 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 


1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 



sec.7 −−−− 9

R 





1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

11 12 13 

14 

15 16 

17 18 

19 20 21 22 

23 24 25 26 27 

28 29 30 

31 


R 



32 33 34 35 

36 37 38 

39 

40 41 

42 


1 2 

3 4 5 

6 7 

10 

8 9 



sec.7 −−−− 11

R 



EXAMPLES OF MODULAR CONSTRUCTIONS FOR Mod. KOMBI PANELS RETROFIT 


COMMON 

PRODUCTS 

FLUSH 

MOUNTED (#) 

WALL 

MOUNTED (#) 

DUO 



Button and 

repertory modules 

Microphone 

module 

Loudspeaker 

module 


box 


and frames 

Wall 

cover frame (°) 



(°) 


frame and 


1145/13 

1145/14 

1145/70 

1145/71 

1145/72 

1145/75 

1145/52 

1145/62 

1145/624 

1145/324 

BUTTONS 

NUMBER 

7 8 9 10 

1 

1 2 2 2 

1 1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 1 

2 2 2 2 

2 2 2 2 

1145/724 1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 

7 8 9 10 

BUTTONS 

NUMBER 

7 8 9 

10 


R 


DIAGRAM NOTES 

DIAGRAM NOTES 

C4.001 - MINIMUM WIRE 

CROSS-SECTION AREAS 

Distance 

50 

Door opening 

circuit 

sq.mm 0,5 0,8 1 

Provide two wires for switching on 

the push-button panel light bulbs. 

Use a separate transformer suitable 

to the number of light bulbs. 

The system power unit is sufficient 

for up to 2 bulbs (max 6 W). 

Transformer ref. 9000/230 is 

recommended for up to 5 bulbs 

(max 15 W). 

C4.009 - IMPORTANT Use cord pairs. 

VD.007 = Floor call button. 

m 

Voice and sq.mm 

call circuit 

100 

200 300 

0,5 0,5 0,8 1 

1,6 

- The indicated distance is between 

door unit and most distant door phone. 

- Lay the wires at a suitable distance 

from power lines (as far away as 

possible). 

C4.007 - Sinthesi models only: 

See instruction booklet provided with 

product for connecting terminals G/T, 

~0 and ~12 between modules. 

VX.006 - See the instruction book 

provided with the product for fitting 

the accessory in the device. 

VX.014 - Dusk switch or similar device 

for switching lights on, where 

relevant. 



sec.7 −−−− 13

R 

12V ˜/1A 

18V ˜/0,2A 

CONNECTION OF DUO INDOOR SETS TO A DUPLEX OUTDOOR STATION 

FUNCTION 

5+(n-2) 


Pushing one of the buttons on the push button panel, outside the 

building, the bitonal call sound is sent to the corresponding indoor set 

loudspeaker. 

When on the called indoor set the conversation button is pressed, 

contact is made between inside and outside and conversation may 

start. 

The indoor set conversation button must be kept pressed during all the 

conversation. 

To operate the electric lock it is suffi cient to briefl y press the 

corresponding button. 

5+(n-1) 

6 

6 

5+n 

10+n 

Sch. 752/20 

Prim. 10/ 20/240V ˜/50Hz 

28VA 

Sec. 15V ˜/0,2A 

2 

PRI 

EQUIPMENT 

For said installation (Scheme SC101-0209C) the following items are 

required: 

APARTMENT STATION REFERENCES 

N. X Indoor sets Ref. 752/23 

For wall embedding, add: 

N. X Embedding boxes Ref. 4328/16 

N. X Frames for embedding box Ref. 752/1 

MISCELLANEOUS 

WIRES 

As indicated in the Scheme SC101-0209C. 

N. 4 Wires from power supply to push button panel towards 

the outdoor set (2 twisted coupled wires); 

N. 2 Wires from power supply to electric lock; 

N. 1 Wire from power supply to push button panel common; 

N. 4 Common wires from power supply to indoor sets; 

N. 1 Common wire from electric lock to indoor sets; 

N. 1 Single wire from push button panel to each indoor set. 

Also provide wires for switching on of the bulbs of the push button 

panel powered by separate appropriately rated power transformer. 


N. 1 Power supply Ref. 752/20 

OUTDOOR STATION REFERENCES 

N. 1 Loudspeaker module Ref. 1145/75 

N. 1 Microphone module Ref. 1145/70-/71-/72 

N. X Push button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14 

N. X Repertory module Ref. 1145/50-/59 

The panels must be installed in fl ush-mounting boxes with 

module holder frames or in cases with hood for wall-mounted 

versions. Refer to “Sinthesi panel” section. 

IMPORTANT: Use twisted wires for the connection towards the 

outdoor station, one for microphone MIC and one for loudspeaker 

receiver ALT. 

Transmission and reception levels are calibrated, during production, 

on optimum values. It is possible to adjust the outwards amplifi cation 

by acting on the potentiometer inserted in the loudspeaker module 

Ref. 1145/75. 

The inwards amplifi cation cannot be adjusted. 

DIAGRAM NOTES 

(see page 20) 

C4.001 

C4.009 

VX.014 


R 

CONNECTION OF DUO INDOOR SETS TO A DUPLEX OUTDOOR STATION 

SC101-0209C 

Main˜ 

ELECTRIC LOCK 

~ ~ 

(VX.014) 

Power supply 

U2 

G/T2 

G/T 

U1 

L 

- 

+M 

+ 

~0 

Name tag 

~12 

lighting 

twisted 

coupled 

~12 

wires 

~0 

2 

1 

Light bulb 

transformer 

~ ~ 

0 12 

Name tag 

lighting 

Lock 

Release 

Main˜ 

FREE-HANDS SYSTEMS DIAGRAMS SYSTEMS 


sec.7 −−−− 15

R 

12V ˜/1A 

18V ˜/0,2A 

12V ˜/1A 

18V ˜/0,2A 

CONNECTION OF DUO INDOOR SETS TO TWO DUPLEX OUTDOOR STATION 

FUNCTION 

5+(n-2) 


This type of installation allows connection of a series of indoor sets to 

two push button panels in a building with two entrances. 

With the proposed solution, by simply pushing a button on one of the 

two panels, the called indoor set, pushing the conversation button, is 

automatically connected with the calling panel. 

However, this type of installation does not allow to talk from the two 

outdoor stations simultaneously, since they work alternatively. 

Indoor set conversation button must be kept pressed during all the 

conversation. 

To operate the electric lock it is suffi cient to briefl y press the 

corresponding button: in this way, the electric lock corresponding to the 

push button panel from which the call has been made is energized. 

5+(n-1) 

6 

6 

5+n 

10+n 10+n 

PRI 

Sch. 752/20 

Prim. 10/ 20/240V ˜/50Hz 

28VA 

Sec. 15V ˜/0,2A 

2 

Sch. 752/20 

Prim. 10/ 20/240V ˜/50Hz 

28VA 

Sec. 15V ˜/0,2A 

EQUIPMENT 

WIRES 


For said installation (Scheme SC101-0210E) the following items are 

required: 

APARTMENT STATION REFERENCES 

N. X Indoor sets Ref. 752/23 

For wall embedding, add: 

N. X Embedding boxes Ref. 4328/16 

N. X Frames for embedding box Ref. 752/1 

MISCELLANEOUS 

N. 1 Power supply Ref. 752/20 

N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/52 

OUTDOOR STATION REFERENCES 

N. 1 Loudspeaker module Ref. 1145/75 

N. 1 Microphone module Ref. 1145/70-/71-/72 

N. X Push button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14 

N. X Repertory module Ref. 1145/50-/59 

The panels must be installed in fl ush-mounting boxes with 

module holder frames or in cases with hood for wall-mounted 

versions. Refer to “Sinthesi panel” section. 

As indicated in the Scheme SC101-0210E. 

N. 5 Wires from power supply to relay box; 

N. 8 Wires from relay box to each panel. 4 of these ones, that is the 

ones to the outdoor station, must be connected with twisted 

coupled wires, one for microphone M and one for receiver R; 

N. X Wires from push button panels to indoor sets; 

N. 5 Common wires from power supply and relay box group to the 

indoor sets. 

Also foresee wires for push button panels lamps lighting fed by a 

separate transformer of adequate power 

IMPORTANT: Use twisted coupled wires for the connections towards 

the outdoor station one for microphone MIC and one for loudspeaker 

receiver ALT. 

Transmission and reception levels are calibrated, during production, 

on optimum values. It is possible to adjust the outwards amplifi cation 

by acting on the potentiometer inserted in the loudspeaker module 

Ref. 1145/75. 

The inwards amplifi cation cannot be adjusted. 

DIAGRAM NOTES 

(see page 20) 

C4.001 

C4.007 

C4.009 

VX.014 


R 

CONNECTION OF DUO INDOOR SETS TO TWO DUPLEX OUTDOOR STATION 

SC101-0210D 

(C4.007) 

TO THE 

FOLLOWING 

MODULE 

G/T 

~12 

~0 

G/T 

ELECTRIC LOCK 

~12 

~0 

U4 

U3 

U2 

U1 

G/T 

U1 

U2 

G/T2 

L 

Name tag 

lighting 

Main˜ 

(C4.009) 

Power supply 

~12 

~0 To bulb 

To bulb 

transformer 

transformer 

- 

+M 

+ twisted(C4.009) 

twisted 

(C4.009) 

coupled 

coupled 

wires 

wires 

2 2 

1 1 

Lock 

Release 

RELAY 

BOX 

twisted 

coupled 

wires 

Lock 

Release 

Name tag 

lighting 

~12 

~0 

U4 

U3 

U2 

U1 

U2 

U1 

G/T 

G/T2 

L 

~0 

~12 

- 

+M 

+ 

G/T 

~12 

~0 

G/T 

(C4.007) 

TO THE 

FOLLOWING 

MODULE 

ELECTRIC LOCK 



sec.7 −−−− 17

R 

EXAMPLES OF CONNECTION OF THE DIFFERENT PARTS (INDOOR SET, OUTDOOR 

SET, POWER SUPPLY) OF THE NEW SYSTEM DUPLEX Mod. 752 WHEN USED AS 

SPARE PARTS IN THE 

PREVIOUS SUPERJOLLY TWO-CHANNEL SYSTEMS 2ND SERIES 


INDOOR SET Ref. 752/23 

To replace the indoor set Ref. 4340/23 by the new type Ref. 752/23, 

connect wires to the same terminals. If in the existing system the 

buzzer RZ has been used for the fl oor calls, since in the Duo indoor 

set this buzzer and the relevant terminal RZ are not foreseen, it is 

necessary to use the additional buzzer Ref. 9854/52, that can be 

inserted inside the same indoor set, or any other 12V a.c. 10VA max. 

buzzer or ringer to be installed outside the indoor set. 

SINTHESI FREE-HANDS PANEL AND DOOR 

UNIT 

The Sinthesi free-hands panel and door unit can be used to replace old 

Kombi models or 4340/27 panels with door unit. 

The Sinthesi free-hands door unit consists of: 

Loudspeaker module: Ref. 1145/75 

Microphone module: Ref. 1145/70 without buttons 

or Ref. 1145/71 with 1 button 

or Ref. 1145/72 with 2 buttons 

Separate the two modules by arranging a button or repertory module 

in between to avoid “Larsen” feedback. 

The outwards amplifi cation can be adjusted by means of the 

potentiometer fi tted in the speaker module Ref. 1145/75. 

The potentiometer fi tted in the microphone module acts on the 

apartment station transmission level only when used as a spare in old 

Superjolly systems where the + terminal is connected instead of the 

+M terminal. 

The panels must be installed in fl ush-mounting boxes with module 

holder frames or in cases with hood for wall-mounted versions. Refer 

to “Sinthesi panel” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system 

- product technical manual. 


To replace the power supply Ref. 4340/20 by the Duo power supply 

Ref. 752/20 connect wires to the same terminals. Only take care to 

connect the relevant wire to terminal 3 and not to terminal +3 (to be 

used in Duo system Mod. 752). 

DIAGRAM NOTES 


(see page 20) 

C4.001 

C4.007 

C4.009 

VD.007 

VX.006 


R 

EXAMPLES OF CONNECTION OF THE DIFFERENT PARTS (INDOOR SET, OUTDOOR 

SET, POWER SUPPLY) OF THE NEW SYSTEM DUPLEX Mod. 752 WHEN USED AS 

SPARE PARTS IN THE 

PREVIOUS SUPERJOLLY TWO-CHANNEL SYSTEMS 2ND SERIES 

SC101-0211B 

TO THE FOLLOWING INDOOR SETS 

Ref.4340/23 


Ref.752/23 

(VD.007) 

-/~ 

+/~ 

(VD.007) 

(VX.006) 

(C4.007) 

TO THE 

FOLLOWING 

MODULE 

Name tag 

lighting 

POWER SUPPLY 

Ref.4340/20 

POWER SUPPLY 

Ref.752/20 

PUSH 

BUTTONS 

MODULE 

~12 

~0 

~0 

~12 

G/T U4 

U3 

U2 

G/T U1 


KOMBI FREE-HANDS PANEL 4340/27 PANEL 

AND DOOR UNIT 

AND DOOR UNIT 

MAINS ~ 

+M 

+ 

MAINS ~ 

Microphone 

module 

U2 

G/T 

U1 

G/T2 

L 

Loudspeaker 

module 

~12 

~0 - 

2 

1 

To bulb 

transformer 

(C4.009) 

twisted 

coupled 

wires 

To bulb 

transformer 

(C4.009) 

twisted 

coupled 

wires 

To bulb 

transformer 

(C4.009) 

twisted 

coupled wires 

Lock 

Release 

MAIN ~ 

Name tag 

lighting 

(VX.014) 

~0 

~12 

~ 

~ 

TRANSFORMER 

ELECTRIC LOCK 

ELECTRIC LOCK 

ELECTRIC LOCK 



sec.7 −−−− 19

R 



Download 

FREE 

Today, you can observe, retrieve information, choose and add all Urmet Domus products to your system estimate with a few simply clicks of a 

mouse on your computer without having to browse, read and understand catalogues and manuals. 

This and more thanks to our “Domus Draw” program which has now become an indispensable working tool for professionals (installers, 

wholesalers, retrofi tters, architects, etc.). 

Domus Draw implements a few, simple commands for: 

• Creating and saving all system estimates either automatically and/or manually. 

• Printing estimates to paper or pdf fi le. 

• Creating system estimates using different user modes. 

• Retrieving information about systems and applications by consulting instruction booklets and technical documents of the various products or 

consulting the wiring diagrams of the system to be created. 

• Watching demo footage with sound for easily understanding how to use the program. 

• Connecting to the Urmet Domus web site to fi nd out about new features and get real-time updates. 

• Searching for cost-effective, ready-to-use kits which can be adapted to your system needs. 

• Saving and printing all your customer data in a specifi c database. 

• Browsing a comprehensive photograph and description database presenting all Urmet Domus products in detail. 

Accessing these functions is very easy: just press the corresponding function button on the program home page: 

“Domus Draw” can be downloaded free of charge from www.urmetdomus.com

DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM ... - Urmet

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?